Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Patents
The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of
ADVA Optical Networking. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these pat-
ents.
Disclaimers
Nothing in this document shall be construed as granting any license or rights with respect to its content
or the patents and trademarks mentioned above. The content of this document may include technical
inaccuracies or typographical errors, and is subject to change at any time without notice. Reliance on
this content is at the relying party's sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for ADVA Opti-
cal Networking. Any references in this document to publications and/or Internet sites that are not from
ADVA Optical Networking are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an
endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites. The materials within those publications and/or
Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA Optical Networking information, product, or
service, and use of those publications and/or Internet sites is at your own risk.
THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOC-
UMENT, UNLESS A SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING OR THE APPLI-
CABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHERWISE.
ADVA Optical Networking SE
5755 Peachtree Industrial Blvd
Norcross, Georgia 30092
USA
Phone +1 678 728 8600
Fax +1 678 728 8788
http://www.advaoptical.com
Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
FSP 150CC-GE11x User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
eVision Web Browser Management Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Service Applications and System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Software Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connection-Oriented UNI-EVC Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Provider Backbone Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Backbone Source Address and Destination Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Network Port Traffic Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1+1 Network Port Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Network Port Dual Active Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Link Aggregation Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
L2PT Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
L2PT Protocols, Addresses and Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Link Layer Discovery Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
LLDP Frame Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Fault Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
EFM-OAM Dying Gasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SNMP Dying Gasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
EFM-OAM Dying Gasp and SNMP Dying Gasp Inter-Operation . . . . . . . 95
Environmental Alarm Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Management and Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Management Traffic Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
eVision Web Browser Management Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Breadcrumb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Management Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
User Management and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operations Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Low Touch Provisioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
LTP Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Boot Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Alarm Generation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
FSP 150CC-GE11x Hardware Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Integrated Power Supplies - GE112/GE114/GE114S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Measure Optical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Optical Attenuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clean Fiber Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Precautions When Connecting Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Connect Fiber Cables to Access Port or Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
To Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Power Supply Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
LAN Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Environmental Alarm Connector Pin Description and Assignments -
GE114H/GE114PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
RJ-48c BITS Connector Pin Description and Assignment - GE114S/GE114SH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Time of Day (TOD) Connector Pin Assignments - GE114S/GE114SH . . . . 186
PPS/CLK Connector Pin Assignment - GE114S/GE114SH . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
GPS Connector Pin Assignment - GE114SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Changing Fan Air Filter Pad - GE114PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Etherjack® Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Performance Monitoring View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ESA and CFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Precision Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Service Activation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Provision Ports in a LAG Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Provision Network Ports in an Ethernet Ring Protection Group . . . . . . . . 299
Provision Management Tunnel(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) (GE114S/GE114SH) . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) (GE114S/GE114SH) . . . . . . . . . . 337
Edit System Sync Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Edit BITS-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Edit BITS-OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Edit CLK Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Edit PPS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Edit TOD Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Edit GPS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Edit Sync-E on a Network Port or Access Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Add a Sync Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Edit a Sync Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Delete a Sync Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Provision Environmental Alarms (GE114H/GE114PH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Provision Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Database and Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
ICF Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Determine Database Configuration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Set Up the FSP 150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port . . . . . . 402
Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Browser-based IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Edit DCN (eth0) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Configure Management Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Configure IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Configure Source Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Add/Delete Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Add/Delete Static ARP Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Configure Access Control List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Configure 3G Modem Using eVision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Sample Network - GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel . . . . . . . . . 454
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Editing PM Thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Edit Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG PM Registers . . . . . . . . 481
Edit ESA Probe PM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
ESA Provisioning and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Provision a Layer-3 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Provision a Y.1731 LM/DM Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Provision a Reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Provision an ESA Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
CFM Provisioning and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Run Untagged ECPA Test on an Access Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Run VLAN ECPA Test on an Access Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Service Activation Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Initiate Loopback Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Initiate Link Trace Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
PTP Configuration Options and Rules (GE114S/GE114SH) . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Transparent Clock Provisioning Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Telecom Slave Provisioning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Boundary Clock Provisioning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Master Clock Provisioning Order (GE114SH Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Transparent Clock Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Telecom Slave Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Create / Edit a Boundary Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Create / Edit a Master Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Create / Edit a Static Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
SAT Configuration Options and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Edit SAT System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Create/Edit SAT Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Create/Edit SAT Test Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Edit SAC Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 50: Access Port Terminal VLAN Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 51: Network Port I-Tag based Terminal Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 52: EFM-OAM Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 53: Network to Access Link Loss Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 54: Access to Access Link Loss Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 55: EFM-OAM Dying Gasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 56: SNMP Dying Gasp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 57: Single Level Management Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 58: Dual Level Management Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 59: eVision Web Browser Management Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 60: GE112 Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (AC Variant) . . . . . . 116
Figure 61: GE114 Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (-48 VDC Variant). . . 116
Figure 62: GE114S Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (-48 VDC Variant). . 116
Figure 63: GE114H Front Panel Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 64: GE114SH Front Panel Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 65: GE114PH Front Panel Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 66: GE112/GE114/GE114S Rear Panel Frame Ground Point. . . . . . 121
Figure 67: GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH Rear Panel Frame Ground Point. . 121
Figure 68: Install Half-width Units in Standard Rack in I-Temp Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 69: Install Half-width Units in Standard Rack in C-Temp Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 119: Edit Audit Log View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 120: Edit Syslog View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 121: Edit ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 122: Edit LLDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 123: Edit Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 124: Edit System Time Of Day. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 125: Edit System Time Of Day - Local Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 126: Edit System Time Of Day - NTP Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 127: Edit System Time Of Day - PTP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 128: Edit NE-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 129: Edit NTE11x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 130: Edit PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 131: Display SSL Certificate and SSH Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 132: Regenerate Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 133: Regenerate SSL Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 134: Regenerate SSH Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 135: Edit Policy Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 136: Add User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 137: Edit User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 138: Edit User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 139: Delete User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
............................................ 314
Figure 197: Network Port PTP Flow Point Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 198: Access Port PTP Flow Point Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 199: Delete Transparent Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 200: Create Telecom Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 201: Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Figure 202: Create PTP Flow Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 203: Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 204: OCS Port Configuration - Port State (Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 205: PTP Flow Point Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 206: SOOC Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 207: SOOC Raw PTP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 208: OCS Port Configuration Status (Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 209: Edit PTP Access Port Delay Asymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 210: Edit CLK Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 211: Edit PPS Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 212: Edit Time of Day Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 213: Edit System Time of Day (PTP Clock Method). . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 214: Create Boundary Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 215: Boundary Clock Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 216: Create Master Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 274: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - Web View . . . . . 388
Figure 275: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - SCP View . . . . . 389
Figure 276: File Transfer Progress Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 277: Transfer Log View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 278: Bulk Log Transfer - SCP View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 279: File Transfer Progress Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 280: Save Diagnostics File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 281: Diagnostics File Save in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 282: Diagnostics File Save Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 283: View Diagnostics Files Status and Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 284: Copy Diagnostics Files to Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 285: Diagnostics File Transfer - SCP View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 286: Diagnostics File Transfer - SCP Option Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 287: Diagnostics File Transfer Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 288: eVision System View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Figure 289: Edit DCN (eth0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 290: Edit DCN - DHCP Enabled Client Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 291: Create Management Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 292: Display Management Tunnel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Figure 293: Edit Management Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Figure 294: Delete Management Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 352: ESA Round Trip Delay Distributed Statistics Results in Chart Format
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Figure 353: Filtering ESA Probe Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Figure 354: Exporting ESA Probe Statistics to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Figure 355: ESA Probe Statistics Exported to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Figure 356: Create Maintenance Association Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Figure 357: Create Maintenance Association - Component . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Figure 358: Create MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Figure 359: Create VLAN Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 360: Configure Loop Back Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 361: Configure Link Trace Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Figure 362: MEP Display Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 363: Edit ECPA Test Streams Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 364: ECPA Set Configuration Window (Flow VLAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Figure 365: ECPA Test Results Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Figure 366: ECPA First Frame from ECPA Results Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Figure 367: Provision EVPL Flow for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Figure 368: Up MEP on Associated Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Figure 369: Create SAT Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Figure 370: SAT Control Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Figure 371: Edit SAC Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 49: Recommended CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on CIR / EIR Range
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Table 48: Minimum CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on CIR / EIR Range . . 699
Table 50: 8021P or IP-TOS Default Priority Mapping Table . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Table 51: IP-DSCP Default Priority Mapping Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Table 52: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Table 53: IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Table 54: Control Data Protocol Configuration Options and Rules . . . . . . 709
Table 55: Layer 2 Control Protocol Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Table 56: System LLDP Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Table 57: Physical Ethernet Port LLDP Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . 714
Table 58: Loopback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Table 59: Environmental Alarms Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Table 62: Ethernet Access Port/LAG QoS Queues Monitored Types and Default
TCA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Table 63: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Table 64: Ethernet Network Port QoS Queues Monitored Types and Default TCA
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Table 65: Flow Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . . . . . . 732
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Table 67: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Table 68: Master Clock Interface Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Table 69: PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . 742
Table 70: SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . . . . . . . 743
Table 71: PT Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings. . . . . . . . . 744
Table 72: PT Flow QoS Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Table 73: PT Flow Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings . . . 745
Table 74: ESA Reflector Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Table 75: ESA Probe Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Table 76: Scheduled ESA Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Table 77: Configure Default MD Parameters Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Table 78: Configure Server MEP Parameters Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Table 79: CFM VLAN Table Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
GE112
The FSP 150CC-GE112 has the following main features:
• One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode
(100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via a Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) trans-
ceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector. Using both
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2
may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
• Two Access interfaces (Three Optional - if Network protection is not provi-
sioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 con-
nector or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
• 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
• Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management
(CFM)
• Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
With four Ethernet copper/fiber combination ports, the FSP 150CC-GE112
device is capable of supporting multiple customers or service configurations
over an optional protected GbE or 100FX optical connection. The GE112 sup-
ports four Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for copper
(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed
and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a flexible port) may be config-
ured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. Ports 3 and 4 are
dedicated Access ports. The FSP 150CC-GE112 is a version of the product that
does not include Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) capability. See Figure 1 for a
front view of the FSP 150CC-GE112.
GE114
The FSP 150CC-GE114 has the following main features:
• One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode
(100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical
(10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector. Using both ports provides 1+1
protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2 may be configured
as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
• Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not provi-
sioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 con-
nector or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
faces via a RJ48c connector for T1/E1 timing input and output, one TOD inter-
face via RJ45 connector, two Mini-SMB connectors for PPS IN (for future use)
and PPS Out respectively, and one more Mini-SMB connector for exter-
nal10MHz Clock frequency output (CLK). See the following figure for a front
view of the FSP 150CC-GE114S.
GE114H
The FSP 150CC-GE114H has the following main features:
• One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode
(100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical
(10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector. Using both ports provides 1+1
protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2 may be configured
as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
• Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not provi-
sioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 con-
nector or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
GE114SH
The FSP 150CC-GE114SH is similar to GE114S, besides all the interfaces and
features supported in GE114S, it is a version of the product that include dual
(redundant) pluggable Power Supply Units (PSUs) and one additional front
mounted SMA connector for external GPS signal receiving. See the following
figure for a front view of the FSP 150CC-GE114SH.
The GE114SH product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm
deep chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC or -48VDC power supplies.
GE114PH
The FSP 150CC-GE114PH is similar to the GE114H, except that it is a version
of the product that also supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), dual (redundant)
pluggable (180 Watts, 60Watts or 95Watts) AC or 95 Watts DC Power Supply
Units (PSUs) - and the front connectors are arranged differently. See the follow-
ing figure for a front view of the FSP 150CC-GE114PH.
The GE114PH product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm
deep chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC / DC power supplies.
Document Overview
This manual is provided to help you install, configure and operate the FSP
150CC-GE11x. This manual provides an introduction to the FSP
150CC-GE11x, a description of its operation, and a step by step walk-through of
the installation process.
This version of the FSP 150CC-GE11x Installation and Operations Guide is
applicable to the FSP 150CC-GE11x software release 6.1. For defect resolution
and functional additions please refer to the Release Notes.
Although this document focuses primarily on using the eVision web browser for
configuring and monitoring the FSP 150CC-GE11x, equivalent CLI or SNMP
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
commands may be used. For more information regarding the CLI command
structure, refer to the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference
Guide. For more information regarding the SNMP command structure, refer to
the FSP 150CC-GE11x SNMP Reference Manual.
Before installing and provisioning the FSP 150CC-GE11x, familiarize yourself
with the FSP 150CC-GE11x equipment, its functions and requirements. The fol-
lowing chapters support the installation and operation of the FSP
150CC-GE11x:
Chapter 1, Overview of the FSP 150CC-GE11x contains product overview infor-
mation and feature descriptions.
Chapter 2, Physical Installation contains procedures to physically install the
FSP 150CC-GE11x and contains a recommended work flow sequence for new
installations, including support for software upgrades.
Chapter 3, eVision Web Browser Management Tool contains an overview of the
eVision web browser management tool workspace and contains procedures for
logging in and logging off.
Chapter 4, Operations Provisioning contains step by step operations and provi-
sioning procedures for the FSP 150CC-GE11x system. It is organized in the rec-
ommended workflow for new installations and can be applied to existing
systems.
Chapter 5, Communications Provisioning contains step by step procedures for
provisioning the FSP 150CC-GE11x communications interfaces. It is organized
in the recommended workflow for new installations and can be applied to exist-
ing systems.
Chapter 6, Etherjack® Testing Procedures and Performance Monitoring con-
tains information on service loopbacks and step by step procedures for perform-
Audience
The reader must have sufficient knowledge of the following when using this doc-
ument:
• IP addressing
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for additional information about the FSP
150CC-GE11x:
• FSP 150CC-GE11x 6.1 Technical Descriptions
• FSP 150CC-GE11x 6.1 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
• FSP 150CC-GE11x 6.1 Quick Start Guide
• FSP 150CC-GE11x 6.1 SNMP User Guide
• Safety Guide
Documentation Feedback
We want our manuals to be as helpful as possible. Feedback regarding the
manuals are therefore always welcome. You can e-mail your comments/sug-
gestions to:
global-techdocu@advaoptical.com
To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:
ADVA Optical Networking SE
Technical Documentation
Märzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany
We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the quality of
our manuals.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Technical training, both on-site and at company facilities in Germany, the
UK and the USA
• Expedited repair service
• Extended hardware warranty service
Customer Login ADVA’s customer login provides a suite of interactive, networking services that
provide immediate access to information and resources at any time, from any-
where in the world. This highly integrated Internet application is a powerful,
easy-to-use tool for doing business with us.
The Customer Login’s broad range of features and services help customers to
streamline business processes and improve productivity. Through your cus-
tomer login, you will find information tailored especially for you, including net-
working solutions, services, and programs. In addition, you can resolve
technical issues with online support services, download and test software pack-
ages, and order training materials.
Contact your local sales office for information on obtaining a customer login.
Access your customer login via the home page at
http://www.advaoptical.com
Network Topology
The FSP 150CC-GE11x is a next generation Ethernet demarcation unit with an
extended temperature range (-40C to +65C) which is suited for use in a remote
terminal cabinet.
The FSP 150CC-GE11x may be deployed in a stand-alone configuration con-
nected to a third party switch. Management can be direct to the DCN interface
on the front of the unit or via in-band IP-based management tunnel. The service
topology in this application could take the form of either a hub or spoke configu-
ration. In the spoke scenario, the system will need to support a few EVCs. In the
hub scenario, a much larger number of EVCs would be required.
In a simple point-to-point application, systems may be connected back-to-back
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
via direct fiber connection (or via some optical path network). Management is
only available at the end-points for the circuit and one end of the link may act as
a management proxy for the remote system with communication via an embed-
ded management tunnel.
E th ern et
E th ern et R ad io N etw o rk
U p lin k
C o n troller
P acket S T M 1 /O C 3
Sw itch (E 1 /T 1 )
N etw ork
F S P 1 5 0 C C -G E 11 x
G atew a y
B ase S ta tio n
C on tro ller
A 3G DCN port (cellular port) provides a wireless management port that can be
accessed via 3G network so that user can connect to the FSP 150CC-GE11x
without cable connections, or it can work as a backup management port when
the DCN LAN port is disconnected (see the figure below). However, the 3G
DCN port cannot work as the DCN port backup when the system is in manage-
ment bridging mode.
RPL Owner
RPL BLock
RPL Neighbor
MAJOR
RING
Ring Node
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
For more details regarding ERP functionality, see the FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1
Technical Descriptions document.
Within 60 days of enabling this feature, you must purchase and obtain
a valid license key corresponding to the feature being enabled. If you
do not comply with the above terms, continuing to use this feature is a
violation of your End User License Agreement and may result in legal
actions being taken against you. ADVA reserves the right to ensure
entitlement and compliance through auditing.
Network EVCs
UNI <–> EVC
Mapping
UNI-1 All frames
UNI-1
UNI-2 VLAN 56
UNI-2 Network Port
UNI-2 VLAN 405
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• The outer tag is a Backbone VLAN Tag (B-Tag, indicated by EtherType:
0x88A8) and the inner tag is an I-Tag (EtherType: 0x88E7).
The PBB frame arrive at network port is accepted only when its B-DA matches
system B-MAC or default B-MAC multicast group address.For the on incoming
traffic received on Network Port:
• PBB frames lookup is done with (Backbone Service Instance ID) I-SID.
• Non-PBB Frame lookup is done with C-TAG or S-TAG.
• Dual-active receive
• 1:1 protection switching via Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
work Ports so that both receivers are active at the same time. This option is pro-
vided primarily to support upstream equipment provisioned to handle different
VLAN traffic on each Network Port. Normally, in 1+1 protection, both transmit-
ters are active and transmit the same information, but only one receiver is
active. By setting both receivers to active, different packets on each Network
Port will still all get to their respective Access Port. However, it is possible to
receive duplicate packets and send them both to the Access Port. It is also pos-
sible for the receive traffic to exceed the effective bandwidth of the FSP
150CC-GE11x. Because of these potential problems, unless the user’s network
topology requires both receivers to be active at the same time, the user should
refrain from using this option.
to disable the link selection based on LACP (i.e., LACP Control disabled) for the
duration of the warm reboot.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
out of the data stream. L2PT should not be confused with the similarly named
Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP).
L2PT has local significance at the UNI Access ports. Its operation is transparent
to the Metro Ethernet Network and the Customer Equipment (see Figure 12).
L2PT Implementation
• L2PT is configured on a per port and per protocol basis
o
Protocol DA 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CC, Cisco multicast
o
Protocol signature: LLC+SNAP, SNAP OUI (Cisco’s) and SNAP Type
o
CDP and VTP have different SNAP Types
• The LLDP
o
Protocol DA 01:80:C2:00:00:0E.
o
Protocol signature: Ethernet Type Field = 0x88CC
For each protocol (BPDU, LLDP, CDP, VTP) that the user wishes to tunnel, the
CPD disposition for that feature is set to “Pass Thru L2PT”. The default L2PT
tunnel MAC address is 01:00:0c:cd:cd:d0 and is user editable. The same L2PT
MAC Tunnel is used for all tunneled protocols.
PS
LLDP does not solicit information from the neighboring node.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
LLDP frame is an Ethernet frame with destination MAC address, source MAC
address, Ethertype and LLDPDU.
Destination MAC address can be one of three standard IEEE 802.1 group MAC
addresses shown below:
• Nearest Bridge Group MAC Address: 01-80-C2-00-00-0E
• Nearest Non-TPMR Group MAC Address: 01-80-C2-00-00-03
• Nearest Customer Bridge Group MAC Address: 01-80-C2-00-00-00
Destination address used in generated LLDP frames depends on the scope of
propagation of the frames. The Nearest Bridge group MAC address is used if
the scope is limited to a single LAN which is limited to propagation of LLDP
frames across a link. The Nearest non-TPMR Bridge group MAC address is
used if the scope involves transmission of LLDP frames through Two-port MAC
Relays (TPMR) between two C-VLAN components, S-VLAN component or
802.1D Bridges. The Nearest Customer Bridge group MAC address is used if
the scope involves transmission of LLDP frames through TPMRs and S-VLAN
components between C-VLAN components or 802.1D Bridges. See the figure
below.
If LLDP transmit and/or receive is enabled on a port at least one group MAC
address and up to three allowed group MAC addresses can be configured.
These MAC addresses are used to transmit one or more LLDP frames each of
the configured MAC address. Also only the LLDP frames with configured group
MAC addresses are filtered.
Source MAC address shall be the sending port’s individual MAC address. LLDP
Ethertype is 0x88CC. LLDPDU is the payload of the LLDP frame which contains
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the ordered list of mandatory TLVs followed by optional TLVs ending with End of
LLDPDU TLV.
LLDP frame filtering is done in the FPGA the LLDP frames are filtered and for-
ward to the processor for frame validation and processing. LLDP is added to list
of L2CP filters supported. LLDP will behave like EFM-OAM from the L2CP per-
spective. There is an LLDP application level control per port which indicates
whether LLDP needs to be received and processed, so that the L2CP filter for
LLDP is set to PEER and if the application level control is not setup to receive
and process LLDP frames then the L2CP filter could be configured via the L2CP
interface to DISCARD or PASS-THRU. When PASS-THRU is provisioned the
EVC level L2CP filter decides if LLDP frames need to pass through the service
or discarded for the service.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
o
VID-based up/down MEPs, Port-based down MEPs
o
ESA Reflectors
o
Management tunnels
o
ECPA/Loopbacks
o
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF).
o
Priority Mapping
o
PCP Encoding/Decoding
MDs 44 70
MAs 44 70
Local MEPs 28 38
Remote MEPs 128 128
Concurrent LBM loopbacks
10 10
initiated
Outstanding LBMs 50 50
Management
Simultaneous Web sessions 5 5
Simultaneous telnet/SSH
3 3
sessions
Local User IDs 10 10
Remote TACACS+/RADIUS
3 3
servers
NTP servers 2 2
Management Tunnels 2 2
System ACL Entries 10 10
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Power over Ethernet (PoE) technology describes a system to pass electrical
power safely, along with data, on Ethernet cabling. The IEEE standard for PoE
requires category 5 cable or higher for high power levels, but can operate with
category 3 cable if less power is required. Power is supplied in common mode
over two or more of the differential pairs of wires found in the Ethernet cables.
PoE technology has helped increase the number of devices that can be con-
nected to network, i.e., CCTV cameras, Wireless LAN Access Points, and IP
Phones with advanced video conferencing features. Standard Ethernet distance
rules apply. The maximum cable length is 100 meters, or 333 feet (or twice the
distance if using a PoE repeater).
Wireless LAN
VoIP Phone Network Camera
Access Point
scheme is used.
The PD negotiates a power class during the time of initial connection. To pre-
vent damage to non-PoE devices, all PDs must include a 25 kΩ resistor across
powered pairs to allow for detection by the PSE. This scheme also allows the
PSE to detect when a PD is disconnected from the network. The detection sig-
nature is visible by both Alternative A and Alternative B PSEs.
During link power-up, after detect a PD requesting power, the PSE must deter-
mine the power classification of the PD (basically how much power must be sup-
plied to the PD). The standard provides two mechanisms for managing power
supplied to the PD: physical layer or data link-layer classification. In release
R5.4, the GE114PH supports Physical Layer Classification. Physical layer clas-
sification uses the link’s cable and PD electrical characteristics to determine
which power class to assign the PD (see IEEE 802.3at-2009 33.2 for details).
The total power output over PSE varies with the PSU type:
• 120W power output is supported with the 180W PSUs inserted.
• 31W power output is supported with the 60W PSU inserted.
RNC
RNC
RNC
RNC
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Split
Horizon
Group VPLS over IP/MPLS
Core Network w/
Full mesh connectivity
For more details regarding SHG functionality, see the FSP 150CC-GE11x Tech-
nical Descriptions document.
• The ELMI EVC status for a flow is determined by the defects detected by a
VID-based UP MEP with a primary VID that matches the flow (linkage
between flow and MEP is the same as Unavailable Seconds)
• DOWN MEP (untagged or VID) do not contribute to ELMI EVC status.
• E-LMI is included in L2CPD as a separate protocol
• ELMI stats are rollover counts and not binned
• All ELMI Mandatory Information Elements are supported, except for the
Bandwidth Profile (for both UNI and EVC)
Synchronous Ethernet
The GE114S/GE114SH supports Synchronous Ethernet according to ITU-T
G.8261 for frequency distribution over Ethernet networks, and can use any Net-
work or Access Port, or an E1 or T1 BITS clock.
Ethernet interfaces can be configured in synchronous operation mode or
non-synchronous operation mode. Synchronous operation mode can be
enabled or disabled on a per port basis. Default is non-synchronous operation
mode.
In synchronous operation mode, in the receive direction, the port is able to
recover the clock from the incoming signal. This recovered clock provides the
stable reference to the system clock from which the transmit clock for ports is
derived. Ports can be enabled to process the Ethernet Synchronization Messag-
ing Channel (ESMC) and extract the encoded Synchronization Status Message
Quality Level (SSM-QL) value. In the transmit direction, ports are locked to a
common clock derived from the system clock and can be enabled to insert the
ESMC channel with the appropriate SSM-QL value.
In non-synchronous operation mode, in the receive direction, the port’s recov-
ered clock is not used by the system clock and the port does not terminate the
ESMC channel. In the transmit direction, the port may be locked to the system
clock (which is either synchronized to another reference clock or is free running)
but does not generate an ESMC channel.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• an internal crystal oscillator
The GE114S/GE114SH feature BITS IN and BITS OUT ports. The BITS ports
are presented via RJ48 connectors.
Synchronous Ethernet interfaces and the BITS IN port can be selected as syn-
chronization sources and can be assigned an expected SSM-QL value.
If the selected synchronization input(s) fails, the GE114S/GE114SH product
automatically switches either to holdover or free-running. Holdover is used if the
internal clock was locked to the reference. The accuracy of the internal clock is
+/-4ppm and the performance in hold-over mode meets the requirements identi-
fied in ITU-T G.8262 Option 1. Free-running is used if the internal clock was not
locked to the selected reference. The switchover can occur as soon as the fault
condition is detected or after a configurable hold-over timer has elapsed. Syn-
chronization source switchover can be triggered by physical link defects (LoS)
or changes in the received quality level (SSM-QL).
The BITS output port can feed legacy devices or synchronization equipment
such as SSUs or SASEs. The BITS OUT port can be assigned a SSM-QL.
In the diagram below a GE114SH distributes the frequency reference to a leg-
acy base station via BITS output port and to a new generation base station via a
Sync-E interface.
Figure 18: Frequency Distribution via BITS Out Port and Sync-E Interface
Sync-E T1/E1
Office A
3G 2G
If the synchronization quality of the BITS output port falls below the configured
SSM-QL value, the port can be switched off (squelched).
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
3G 2G
physical layer of the transport media (e.g. fiber optic cable for SDH, SONET,
and SyncE, or twisted pair copper cable for DS1/E1). However, as mobile
networks and services grow in sophistication and complexity, the ability to
distribute precise time (also referred to as phase) through the network is
required. NTP provides time distribution; however, it does not satisfy the time
accuracy and precision requirements for next generation mobile networks.
IEEE 1588-2008 (1588v2) defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) which is
intended for use in high accuracy time and frequency synchronization
applications. PTP is a layer 5 protocol which can be transported over a variety of
lower-layer packet technologies (e.g. PTP/UDP/IPv4/ENET,
PTP/UDP/IPv6/ENET, PTP/ENET, etc.). It supports both unicast and multicast
messaging, and provides message formats for synchronization distribution,
delay estimation, signaling, and management purposes.
The PTP protocol enables accurate time transfer between two entities (clocks)
by transporting 80-bit timestamps in time-critical packets. Each timestamp rep-
resents the time at which the packet was sent and has a 1 nanosecond granu-
larity. Through the use of the CorrectionField in the PTP header, each
timestamp can support sub-nanosecond granularity. The periodic transmission
of messages is the basis for frequency recovery, while the distribution of the
timestamp values allows for accurate phase/time recovery.
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a packet based method dedicated to the distri-
bution of time and/or frequency over packet switched networks (PSNs). It is
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
based on a master-slave relationship between the time sources and their time
recipients. A time source (herein referred to as a master, Grand Master, master
clock, or Ordinary Clock-Master (OC-M)), distributes its time and frequency to
downstream nodes (referred to as slaves, slave clocks, Slave-Only Ordinary
Clocks (SOOC) via PTP messages. Since the transport mechanism is
packet-based, each intermediate node (e.g. router, switch, aggregation NE,
etc.) between the master and slave clocks introduces packet delay variation
(PDV) in the transport of the PTP messages. This creates uncertainty and error
in a slave clock’s recovered time and frequency.
The Grandmaster is the primary time reference source in the packet-based syn-
chronization network. It is equivalent to a PRC/PRS clock in a traditional fre-
quency-based synchronization network. For redundancy, more than one
Grandmaster exists within the same network time domain. An SOOC is the
recipient of the timing information and synchronizes to the Grandmaster to
within a specified accuracy/tolerance. For current mobile backhaul applications,
Slave Clock accuracy is currently required to be within ±1.5µs; however, ±1.0µs
has been accepted as the industry requirement with a future target of ±200ns for
MIMO applications.
To minimize the effects of PDV, 1588v2 defines two additional clock types, a
Boundary Clock, and a Transparent Clock, to account for the variable packet
delay incurred by PTP messages while in transit from the master to the slave.
A Boundary Clock is typically a multi-port device residing between an upstream
master and one or more Slave Clocks. A Boundary Clock is similar to an SSU or
SEC in SDH, and provides a timing boundary, or partition, between the master
and slave clocks. A Boundary Clock terminates the PTP messages received
from an upstream master clock, recovers the time and/or frequency based on
the received PTP messages, and generates new PTP message flows to down-
stream slave clocks based on its recovered version of the upstream master
time/frequency.
A Transparent Clock does not participate in the master/slave hierarchy, but
instead, measures the residence time for each PTP event message; i.e. it mea-
sures the time a PTP event message spends in transit through the Transparent
Clock, or more specifically, the time between the ingress point and the egress
point in the node. A Slave Clock uses the residence times to account for the
variable delay (i.e. queuing delay) incurred by a PTP event message while in
transit through the network.
1588v2 defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) for use in applications requir-
ing highly accurate time/phase synchronization. The PTP protocol involves the
transmission of messages containing accurate timestamps, with each time-
stamp representing the time at which the message was sent. The repeated
transmission of messages provides the means for frequency recovery, and
when combined with the timestamps embedded within the messages, accurate
time/phase is also recovered.
The performance achievable by the PTP protocol is dependent on the network
environment in which it is operating and the use and performance of the various
clock types (e.g. OC, BC, TC) within the network. 1588v2 doesn’t define the per-
formance criteria for recovering the clock (time and frequency) from a received
PTP message flow; however, ITU-T is working on such requirements for tele-
communications applications.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ered on the other side. Other applications include wireless access technologies
like LTE, WIMAX etc., where the air interfaces have stringent synchronization
requirements. Synchronous Ethernet was developed by ITU-T for physical layer
frequency distribution. But Synchronous Ethernet may not be a viable option in
all cases as it requires transceivers that are capable of extracting accurate fre-
quency from the received signal and hence requires different hardware. This
also adds cost to the network devices.
1588v2 defines mechanisms to accurately transfer time between two clocks. A
1588v2 slave computes the time based on a precise timestamp from the master
and the delay between master and slave. The accuracy of the time at the slave
depends on the accuracy of delay measurement between master and slave.
The delay is calculated by halving the round trip time between the master and
slave. To increase accuracy, the PTP protocol separates the link level delay
which is symmetric and if needed adjusts for fixed asymmetry and variable
delay which is mostly within the devices. To improve the accuracy of at the slave
all the timestamps in PTP event messages are recorded as close as possible to
the physical interface in ingress and egress directions. To minimize delay asym-
metry between Ordinary Clock Master (OC-M) and Ordinary Clock Slave
(OC-S), each device between the OC-M and OC-S should provide either a
Transparent Clock (TC) if fan-out of timing is not required or a Boundary Clock
(BC) if fan-out is required. TC calculations eliminate inaccuracy due to delay
asymmetry in a device in either direction by calculating residence time in the
device and record it in the PTP messages. BC involves at least one slave port
and one or more master ports where PTP messages are terminated and time-
stamp data is recovered by the slave function and the master ports generate
new streams of PTP messages using the time recovered by the slave function.
contents of all Announce messages received on the port and the data sets of the
OC or BC clock data sets are analyzed to determine the state of each port of the
clock. This approach makes the timing network dynamic where it is reconfigur-
ing itself by electing a master depending on factors like clock class, clock accu-
racy and priority of the available timing sources. This is not suitable for telecom
networks.
To support selection between multiple master clocks, ITU-T G.8265.1 defines
Telecom Slave which is the entity that recovers frequency based on timestamps
from the selected master clock. An entity called the Slave Only Ordinary Clock
(SOOC) is a 1588v2 OC-S that gets its PTP packets from a Grand Master (GM).
For protection, more than one SOOC is defined, each receiving timing from a
different GM. Based on the clock class in Announce messages (QL), priority and
Packet Timing Signal Fail (PTSF) a master is selected. PTSF is based on
PTSF-lossSync, PTSF-lossAnnounce or PTSF-unusable. PTSF-unusable is
undefined in G.8265.1 and this could be used to indicate conditions such as the
high PDV that could result in inaccurate clock recovery. Today G.8265.1 defines
selection only based on the quality of the GM, priority and lack of PTP mes-
sages required for clock recovery and does not base selection on network qual-
ity between GM and SOOC. This is an area for future improvement.
The object model for various PTP entities is shown as below:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Terminologies and definitions:
• Timing Domain: It is a source of timing that provides frequency and/or
phase.
• SYNC Timing Domain: It provides only frequency and it involves clock qual-
ification and clock selection. For now all the devices shall support one
SYNC Timing Domain which is the System SYNC Timing Domain. SYNC
Timing Domain generally involves selection from multiple SYNC references.
These SYNC references can be Sync-E from Ethernet ports, other forms of
frequency inputs like 10MHz, BITS or PTP recovered frequency.
• PTP Timing Domain: involves a Telecom Slave that selects a PTP stream
from one or more Slave Only Ordinary Clocks (SOOC) and recovers fre-
quency and phase from it.
• Currently the system supports only a System SYNC Timing Domain and
one PTP Timing Domain. In the future some devices will support up to 4
PTP Timing Domains.
• System Clock: the frequency output by the System SYNC Timing Domain
which is one of the SYNC references of SYNC Entity.
• SYNC Entity/Object: an abstraction of the System SYNC Timing Domain
and is used interchangeably with System SYNC Timing Domain.
The GE114S/GE114SH implementation follows IEEE 1588v2 and ITU
G.8265.1. 1588v1 is not supported.
The following figure shows various clock interface functions and interconnec-
tions.
Reference Selector
SYNC-1-1-1-1
BITS-IN BITS-OUT
PPS-1-1-1-1
TOD-1-1-1-1
Source Selector
Reference Selector
GPS TIME
CLOCK-1-1-1-1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
System
NTP Time of Day
Local
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
deploy profitable Ethernet services by providing carrier grade remote monitoring
and diagnosis for Ethernet based services. This capability is analogous to the
Smartjack™ capability used as a demarcation point for traditional T1 services.
T1 V.35
ADM or Smartjack or Switch/Router
Modem CSU/DSU
While early data services were delivered blind, without demarcation capability,
carriers quickly determined that remote management was critical to providing
value-added services to their customers while reducing truck rolls and the
expense of diagnosing an Ethernet service problem.
ADVA Optical Networking’s Etherjack® technology includes performance moni-
toring, remote failure indications (e.g., dying gasp), remote loopbacks, cable
integrity testing and Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM) to provide diagnostics through the carrier network and on
both sides of the demarcation point (see the following figure).
100/1000BT 10/100/1000BT
ADM, FSP 150CC Switch/Router
Modem or
Media converter
When Etherjack® locates a cable fault; it will provide the distance from an FSP
150CC-GE11x Ethernet port to the cable fault to the nearest meter. In addition,
the FSP 150CC-GE11x can detect if an Ethernet cross-over cable has been
improperly installed on the LAN port, and re-configure its port to compensate for
the improper wiring. These unique isolation and diagnosis capabilities can dra-
matically reduce the quantity and duration of truck rolls necessary to maintain
Ethernet services.
Etherjack® Diagnostics
Etherjack® diagnostics provide a suite of tests to isolate faults between carrier
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
equipment, customer equipment and Ethernet cables:
• Ethernet EFM loopback to test the traffic from a far-end over the link
• Ethernet LAN cable diagnostics to detect open-circuit, short-circuit condi-
tions
• Manual restart of Ethernet auto-negotiation sequences (to detect one-way
failures and MDIX conditions)
The FSP 150CC-GE11x can monitor the status of a physical Ethernet link to
determine whether the link is properly terminated, improperly terminated,
open-circuit or short-circuit. See Figure 26 for an example of Etherjack diagnos-
tics results using the eVision Web Browser Management Tool. For additional
information on Etherjack Diagnostics using eVision, see Etherjack® Diagnostics
on p. 462.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) feature is a real-time monitoring tool to
allow Ethernet services to be subjectively measured for the basis of Service
Level Agreements (SLA). ESA implements standards-based approaches that
are currently in progress.
SLA monitoring is a key success factor for carriers offering premium Ethernet
services. Sophisticated enterprise customers demand SLA guarantees in their
service contracts. Carriers must monitor the performance of a connection to
determine if the agreement is being satisfied.
The FSP 150CC offers built-in SLA monitoring via the ESA feature set. The ESA
feature provides Ethernet service providers with the ability to monitor individual
customer SLAs without the need to install any extra monitoring and reporting
equipment. ESA test results are displayed in tabular or chart format using the
eVision Web Browser Management Tool. See Figure 28 for an example of ESA
test results in chart form.
Network Performance
Network performance is measured and reported in terms of the experience a
packet encounters as it traverses a network. This performance is typically
expressed in terms of the following four parameters:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Delay
• Delay Variation (Jitter)
• Packet Loss
• Network Availability
A Service Level Agreement for a service hosted on a network defines the perfor-
mance expectations of the network in terms of these four parameters.
Delay Delay, often referred to as latency, is the time delay experienced by a packet in
traversing the network from the source to the destination.
Controlling congestion points is just one means of ensuring consistent network
throughput and predictable network delay. Delay can cause significant QoS
issues for sensitive services such as voice and video. Voice and video over IP
can compensate for minor delays across a network, but once a threshold is
exceeded, the quality of the service degrades exponentially. Network delays are
typically caused by queueing points in the network. The more queues which a
packet encounters, the greater is the potential for delay. The key to low latency
QoS is to minimize the amount of queueing which a packet encounters when
transiting the network.
Delay Variation Jitter is the variation in the delay of transmission of packets from source to des-
tination. Some applications are more sensitive to jitter than others. Voice and
video applications, for instance, cannot tolerate excessive jitter. The same tech-
niques and mechanisms employed to manage delay are employed to bound the
jitter across a network. With small queue sizes and committed bandwidths, the
maximum amount of jitter which a service will experience can be computed and
bounded. With appropriate tuning, a network can easily be engineered to meet
the strict jitter tolerances of jitter-sensitive traffic.
Packet Loss Packet loss refers to the number of packets of a particular class which are
received by the network but are never delivered to the intended destination.
Traffic loss is often expressed as a ratio of: (#packets not delivered at destina-
tion) / (total #packets received at source).
Packet loss can occur due to physical errors on network links, hardware faults in
network equipment, and network congestion. Traffic loss can also be experi-
enced if a service transmits more bandwidth into the network than its SLA con-
tract specifies. Rate limiting discards packets which exceed the guaranteed
bandwidth or burst size for a service. Congestion management mechanisms,
such as Random Early Discard (RED), can be employed to reduce congestion
within a network. Such algorithms randomly discard packets once the network
nears congestion. This practice effectively limits the size of traffic bursts pre-
sented to the network.
An application’s response to packet loss is dependent on the application type.
Certain applications respond by ignoring lost packets. VoIP and video applica-
tions, for instance, recover from a single lost packet by re-using the last packet
received. Other applications, such as E-mail, file transfer and web applications
are intolerant to packet loss. Such applications often rely on transport layer pro-
tocols, such as TCP/IP, to retransmit lost packets. Application layer protocols
may also guard against packet loss using retry methods.
Network Network availability refers to the percentage of time that a network is capable of
Availability transporting packets between a source port and destination port. While a net-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
work may be capable of physically transporting packets presented to it, it may
not always meet the QoS specifications for all traffic classes. Thus, we extend
the definition of network availability as the percentage of time that a network is
able to transport packets while meeting the QoS requirements for each traffic
class supported by the network.
Failures which completely inhibit the transmission of packets are easy to detect
and quantify with simple metrics, but partial failures or service degrades which
impact different traffic types in different ways require QoS specific network
probes and metrics.
10/100BT
10/100BT
IP Network
Demarcation Device Demarcation Device
ESA Operation
The Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) feature provides real-time monitoring of
the four major network performance metrics (delay, delay variation, packet loss
and network availability) for an Ethernet circuit.
ESA operates by injecting test traffic into a live Ethernet connection and moni-
toring the delay, jitter and loss of the test traffic as it transits the connection. Net-
work availability is then computed from the measured parameters.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ESA uses a special Probe object to inject test traffic into an Ethernet connec-
tion. This test traffic is targeted to another object called a Reflector. See the fol-
lowing figure. There are two types of Reflectors. The first Reflector type is a
simple Reflector which simply “echoes” the test traffic back to the Probe. The
Probe object then calculates round-trip delay, jitter and loss. The second type of
Reflector recognizes the injected test traffic and inserts timestamps into the test
traffic before reflecting it back to the Probe. This allows the Probe to compute
one-way delay and jitter.
Responder
Responder Probe
10/100BT 10/100BT
IP Network
IP Network
FSP 150CC FSP 150CC
Customer Customer
Premise Premise
Optionally, when defining a Probe the user can specify the probe protocol as
Y.1731 LM/DM and use previously defined CFM MEPs (see Ethernet Connec-
tivity Fault Management on p. 71) in which case a Reflector is not required since
MEPs respond to LMMs (Loss Measurement Messages) and DMMs (Delay
Measurement Messages) by definition.
A Probe can support up to 10 active monitoring sessions each. A Reflector can
terminate up to 30 sessions. ESA utilizes IP layer frames to conduct perfor-
mance monitoring. Probes and Reflectors are assigned individual IP addresses
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
was received. When the Reflector sends the packet back toward the Probe, it
inserts a third timestamp indicating time of transmission. When the Probe
receives the original packet, it again timestamps the packet as it is received.
The Probe then uses the four timestamps to calculate the one-way transmission
time in both directions (Probe to Reflector and Reflector to Probe). This opera-
tion is shown in Figure 31.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the packet to the Network Processor queue. Once received by the ESA Packet
Processor, the receive timestamp will be inserted. The ESA Packet Processor
will then process the packet and update the appropriate metrics based on the
information in the packet. This operation is shown in the following figure.
Reflector Operation
The ESA packets follow the same traffic path through the device as customer
traffic. Just prior to being sent to the customer port, if the packet matches the
ESA Filter criteria, it is diverted to the ESA Packet Processor. At the ESA
MEP
MIP
The CFM features included in this release of the FSP 150CC are:
• Configure Maintenance Domains (MD)
• Configure Maintenance Association Networks (MANET)
• Configure and manage Maintenance Association Component assignments
(MACOMP)
• Configure and manage Maintenance End Points (MEP)
• Configure and manage Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIP)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Transmit and receive Continuity Check Messages (CCM)
• Initiate transmission of and receive responses for Link Trace Messages and
Loopback Messages (LTM, LBM)
• Fault Monitoring (ETH-AIS)
• Detect and raise CFM related alarms
• Performance Monitoring
o
Loss Measurement (LM)
o
Delay Measurement (DM)
o
Delay Variance Measurement
CFM Overview
The managed network in the context of CFM consists of Maintenance Domains
(MDs), Maintenance Domain levels, Maintenance Association Networks
(MANETs), and Maintenance Association Component assignments
(MACOMPs). An MANET consists of a set of Maintenance End Points (MEPs)
and Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) that have the same MA ID and MD
level.
CFM exchanges messages and performs operations on a per-domain basis. A
Maintenance Domain is a bridged network (or network of bridged networks)
maintained by an operator. Multiple domains at different levels create a hierar-
chy of Maintenance Domains. Each maintenance domain is assigned a Mainte-
nance Domain level between 0 and 7. Suggested Maintenance Domain level
allocation is: Customer Domain (5-7), Service Provider Domain (3-4), Operator
Domain (0-2). An example of a Maintenance Domain hierarchy is shown in the
following figure.
Customer Domain
MD Level = 5
Service Provider Domain
MD Level = 3
Operator Domain Operator Domain
MD Level = 2
Domain). Similarly, the Service Provider Domain at MD level 3 uses the services
of Operators A and B at MD level 2.
The Maintenance Domain level restricts visibility upward and downward in the
hierarchy. The network topology of the Service Provider is not visible to the Cus-
tomer Domain. Similarly, the Service Provider cannot see the Operator
Domain’s topology. A higher level domain can only see what the lower level
domain allows it to see.
A Maintenance Association Network represents the service instance being mon-
itored and consists of MEPs which define the edge or boundary of the Mainte-
nance Association Network. Even though only one MEP is created on each
bridge for a Maintenance Domain, the MEP IDs of all MEPs in the MANET must
be configured at each bridge.
typically down MEPs created to monitor the link between the local port and the
far end port.
VLAN based MEPs are associated with specific VIDs. These are typically up or
down MEPs monitoring an X tag. EVC based MEPs monitor the service
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
instance over the network interface. These MEPs are usually associated with C
and S tags. The total number of MEPs supported by the system is limited to
28(GE112)/ 38(GE114x).
Server MEPs
A Server MEP is used when it is desired to monitor a port and create an
ETH-AIS condition when the port goes down. The Server MEP does not partici-
pate in sending or receiving CCM messages and no other CFM related configu-
ration is required on the port or the services on that port to support the Server
MEP.
Creation of an Active MD Level list which includes MAs and a default MD entry
with matching primary VID and component ID, and meet the following condi-
tions:
• MD levels of the MAs that have MEPs configured
• MD levels of the MAs that have No MEPs configured
• MD level of the default MD entry
Exactly one object in the list is used for MIP evaluation. It is the object with the
lowest MD level that does not have a MEP configured. If it meets the following
criteria, then:
• If there is no such object, then no MIP change will occur.
• If the chosen object is an MANET, and Maintenance Intermediate Point Half
Function (MHF) creation control is Not Defer, then the MHF creation control
is taken from the MANET.
• If the chosen object is an MANET, and MHF creation control is Defer, then
the MHF creation control is taken from the MD object for the MANET.
• If the chosen object is a default MD entry and MHF creation control is Not
Defer, then the MHF creation control for the default MD entry is used.
• If the chosen object is a default MD entry and MHF creation control is Defer,
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
then the MHF creation control is taken from the default MD level object.
For each possible value of MHF creation control, the results are:
• None - No MIP is created.
• Default - A MIP is created at the chosen MD level for the primary VID and
component ID if it does not currently exist.
• Explicit - A MIP is created if there is a MEP at the next lower Active MD
level.
If the output of the evaluation result is a MIP should be created,
then a MIP is created if it does not exist. If the output of the
PS
association network must transmit at the same interval, the CCM interval is also
used as the receive interval for loss of continuity detection.
Operator B
Operator A
A D
Service Provider Domain
M EP
CCM MIP
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
CCMs can also be used to detect misconfigurations. These defects include:
• Unexpected MD Level
• MANET ID Mismatch/Service cross-connect
• Missing or Unexpected MEP ID
• CCM Interval Mismatch
• Duplicate MEP ID
• Duplicate Sequence Number
The CCM carries information about the sender such as the source MAC
address, maintenance association network ID, source MEP ID, MD Level, etc.
Each MEP receiving a CCM from a peer MEP must catalog this information into
a local CCM MEP database. An entry should be created in the database for
each MEP in the MANET. The CCM interval ranges from 3.3 ms to 10 minutes.
The 3.3 ms CCM interval is intended for protection applications. An interval of 1
second is recommended for fault detection. CCMs are drop ineligible.
Finally, CCM Defect Detection can be used by the FSP 150CC to control 1+1
protection switching on the Network port if so configured (see Protection in FSP
150CC GE11x R6.1 Installation and Operations Manual document).
Based on the information in the LTRs received, the originating MEP can deter-
mine the path to the target if the Link Trace was successful, or the location of the
fault in the event of a failure.
Operator B
Operator A
A D
Loopback Message
Loopback Messages (LBMs) are Unicast messages that a MEP transmits, at
user request, to verify connectivity to a particular maintenance point. LBMs may
also contain additional data in the payload to measure performance characteris-
tics of the service. At the destination maintenance point, a Loopback Reply Mes-
sage (LBR) is transmitted back to the originating MEP. A reply to a loopback
message indicates whether a destination is reachable but does not contain
hop-by-hop discovery of the path.
Operator A Operator B
A D
LBM from MEP A forwarded to MEP B, LBR from MEP B forwarded to MEP A
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Y.1731 defines the fault and performance monitoring functions to operate and
maintain the Ethernet-based network and services. From a high level the func-
tions are:
• Fault Monitoring
• AIS
• Performance Monitoring
• Loss Measurement (LM)
• Delay Measurement (DM)
• Delay Variance Measurement
ETH-AIS
Ethernet AIS as defined in Y.1731 facilitates suppressing of alarms in higher
level MEPs, when they are due to defects in lower level MEPs. The idea is to
reduce the clutter of extraneous alarms, so the technician can home-in on the
actual failure. At the lowest level the defects on a port-based MEP (typically MD
Level = 0) can suppress alarms on one or more higher level MEPs.
Additionally, Ethernet AIS is used for Link Loss Forwarding (LLF). When a link
goes down, link loss is forwarded using the Interface Status TLV in the CCM.
TLV is sent in all the subsequent CCMs until the link down ceases to exist. On
the receiving end the Access port up MEPs can be configured to perform LLF
functionality by reacting to either CCM with an Interface Status TLV (isDown) or
ETH-AIS. ETH-AIS is a non-standard mechanism but is provided as a value-add
for situations where another vendor's equipment uses this mechanism for LLF.
This is implemented using the same ETH-AIS frame defined in Y.1731 without
any modifications in such a way as to not cause any interoperability issues.
MEPs running Continuity Check Protocol can be configured for one or more of
the following MEP defects to trigger ETH-AIS:
• Mismerge or Cross-connect defect
• Loss Of Connectivity (LOC) or Remote MEP CCM defect
• Unexpected or Error CCM defect
• AIS defect
Each MEP has a provisioned client MD level. If there is a MEP at the client MD
level then the AIS defect is set for that MEP and the AIS defect cascades up the
MEPs until a MEP is detected where there are no higher level MEPs or a MIP is
detected for that VID. If the highest level MP is a MEP, an ETH-AIS frame is
generated for a VID at client MD level of the MEP. If the highest level MP is a
MIP then an ETH-AIS frame is generated for a VID at the MIP MD level.
ETH-AIS frames are generated in the network-to-access direction for Network
port down MEPs and Access port up MEPs.
As per Y.1731 there are situations where a MEP could trigger ETH-AIS frames
for up to 4094 VIDs. This is not practical, so various criteria are used to limit the
number of ETH-AIS frames generated in the event of a qualifying defect on a
MEP.
For Access port up MEPs ETH-AIS frame is sent to the VLAN identified by the
MEP's primary VID and priority with ETH-AIS MD level set to the provisioned cli-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ent MD level.
For Network port-based down MEPs the ETH-AIS frames are sent to each
VLAN identified by Access port up MEP's primary VID and priority only for the
Access port up MEPs at the Network port MEP's client MD level.
For Network port VID-based down MEPs the ETH-AIS frames are sent to each
VLAN identified by Access port up MEP's primary VID and priority only for the
Access port up MEPs at the Network port MEP's client MD level. Additionally
Access port up MEPs should also have the Network port MEP's primary VID and
priority as the S-TAG of the service for which the Access port up MEP is
defined.
To keep it simple, MEPs were used above to identify the VLANs
to which ETH-AIS frames need to be sent. In all the above cases
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Loss Measurement capability is supported as defined in Y.1731. The exception
is that dual-ended LM is only partially supported. The device supports transmis-
sion of the LM counters in the CCMs that are sent out but not near-end or
far-end loss measurements based on the LM counters of the received CCMs.
This capability is provided to facilitate the peer MEP to support the near-end and
far-end loss measurements.
The single-ended on-demand LM is fully supported. The on-demand LM is con-
figured and scheduled by the user using the ESA interface. The MEP allows the
following configurable parameters for supporting the LM functionality:
• Transmission Period: 1 second. This is the frequency at which the Loss
Measurement Messages (LMMs) are transmitted.
• Priority: The priority used in the LMMs. If not specified the MEP's CCM pri-
ority is used.
• Ignore Priority: This flag indicates that the LM counts are combined for all
the priorities. This is a vendor extension and should be used only if the peer
device is an ADVA Optical Networking device.
For Access port up MEPs the MEP's primary VID and the LMM/CCM priority
make up the X-Tag of the LMM. For Network port down MEPs the MEP's pri-
mary VID and the LMM/CCM priority make up the S-TAG of the LMM. Port-level
Network port down MEPs cannot be used for loss or delay measurements.
The LMMs are drop-ineligible. Within the NID the policer passes the
LMMs/LMRs irrespective of the available bandwidth. But for the LMMs gener-
ated by the NID for the Network port down MEPs, it sets the DEI bit in the
S-TAG to 0 to indicate the drop eligibility as false.
If the ignore priority flag is enabled, the local counter values sent in the LMM are
aggregate values for all priorities. If the ignore priority flag is disabled then the
LM counters are maintained for each priority class. In this case the local counter
values sent in the LMM are the counters for configured LMM priority.
When it comes to LMM reception and LMR generation there is no limitation, an
LMR is generated for each LMM received.
There is a concern with loss measurements where receiving end receives more
frames than the transmitting end has sent resulting in negative frame loss. Even
though the chance of this happening is remote, it is possible. This happens if
data frames sent after the LMM on the transmitting end reach the receiving end
before the LMM. This implies that there will be a positive frame loss some time
after the negative frame loss. Software counts the occurrences of negative
frame loss so the user can correlate that a positive frame loss was not really a
frame loss but was potentially caused due to the negative frame loss occur-
rences in the past within this bin period.
There is also a situation where the receiving end is configured to perform some
CFM functions but potentially does not support or is not configured to perform
Y.1731 performance monitoring functions. This means that the transmitting end
will not receive any LMRs. This will show zero loss of frames and it should be
differentiated from genuine zero frame loss resulting from processing LMRs
(either due to lack of traffic or no frame loss with traffic). The user has a flag that
indicates that the bin period did not have any loss measurement samples (no
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
LMRs received).
is 100 milliseconds. This is the frequency at which the DMMs are transmit-
ted.
• Packet Size: This is the size of the frame. The frame size can expand from
the minimum size using a Data TLV padded with all zeros. Changing the
packet size may create interoperability implications since the DMM as per
Y.1731 is a fixed length frame without TLVs.
• DM Priority: The priority used in the DMMs. This setting is done on the MEP.
For Access port up MEPs the MEP's primary VID and the DMM/CCM priority
make up the X-Tag of the DMM. For Network port down MEPs the MEP's pri-
mary VID and the DMM/CCM priority make up the S-TAG of the DMM.
Port-level Network port down MEPs cannot be used for loss or delay measure-
ments.
The DMMs are drop-ineligible. The policer passes the DMMs/DMRs irrespective
of the available bandwidth. But for the DMMs generated by the NID for the Net-
work port down MEPs, it sets the DEI bit in the S-TAG to 0 to indicate the drop
eligibility as false.
For time stamps, software periodically updates an internal timing source based
on updates from SNTP. It uses this to timestamp the DMM and DMR frames.
The timing scheme accounts for the inaccuracies in the timing specifically for a
DMM which is sent before an NTP timing update and a DMR received after the
update by adding or subtracting the drift in the timing source.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
There is also a situation where the receiving end is configured to perform some
CFM functions but potentially does not support or is not configured to perform
Y.1731 performance monitoring functions. This means that the transmitting end
will not receive any DMRs. The user has a flag that indicates that the bin period
did not have any delay measurement samples (no DMRs received).
Component ID (MACOMP)
According to the 802.1ag standard MIB, the component ID is introduced to sup-
port 802.1ah where there could be multiple bridge-like components in a bridge
device. It can also be used to support multiple CFM components in a device
such as our NID that supports multiple C-VLAN and S-VLAN components. With-
out the component IDs, service definitions (VLAN membership) are identical on
all VLAN ports. It does not match well with our EVC service definition which is
port specific. The new model with component ID solves this problem. Essen-
tially, we assign a component ID to each of the access ports. Another flexibility
afforded by the component ID is that the MIP creation control and sender ID
control are also port specific.
for the system there are multiple VLAN tables - one for each component in the
bridge.
Loopback
Test Pattern
ECPA
FSP 150CC FSP 150CC
The ECPA feature can be controlled remotely from a Network Management ter-
minal anywhere in the network. Together with port and VLAN loopback func-
tions on each ECPA port, ECPA allows in-service end-to-end EVC traffic
testing.
Etherjack™ Connection Performance Analyzer:
• Provides a subset of Ethernet test equipment functions embedded directly
into the Provider Equipment so that each individual Ethernet port can act as
its own test equipment.
• Provides a management feature which allows the FSP 150CC to be con-
trolled remotely from a Network Management terminal anywhere in the net-
work.
• Allows service verification for new point-to-point EVCs on a multi-point
Ethernet port without disrupting other “live” connections on the same port.
• Provides a port loopback on each Ethernet port which loops egress traffic
back to the ingress path. This allows end-to-end traffic testing.
• Provides a VLAN loopback capability to allow only selected VLANs (up to 3)
to be looped back at a port
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
nection.
The FrameInjector and FrameMonitor blocks lie in the data-path on each ser-
vice card. The Input of the FrameMonitor can be connected to the ingress or
egress data path on the card so that frames can be monitored in either direction.
The output of the FrameInjector can be connected to either ingress or egress
data path. In addition, a VLAN loopback function can select egress frames with
a specific VLAN ID to be looped back into the ingress traffic path. This allows for
in-service testing of connections without disrupting normal EVC traffic.
A port loopback can also be selected which loops all traffic from the egress
direction back to the ingress data path. This is an out-of-service disruptive loop-
back.
Refer to Figure 42 for a block diagram of the data path of a service interface
card which contains the FrameInjector and FrameMonitor blocks.
WAN CLIENT
ETHERNET ETHERNET
PORT INGRESS PORT
FRAME
PROCESSING
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
MEDIA
FRAME FRAME
WAN
MONITOR INJECT
EGRESS
FRAME
PROCESSING
PORT
LOOPBACK
(All frames)
VLAN
LOOPBACK
(Only selected EVC frames)
By injecting test traffic into an EVC connection, then looping the test traffic at the
far end of the EVC, and monitoring the “echoed” traffic, ECPA can verify net-
work connectivity along with several performance parameters. An example of
this is shown in Figure 43.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
EGRESS INGRESS
FRAME FRAME
PROCESSING PROCESSING
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
MEDIA
MEDIA
FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME
NETWORK
WAN
WAN
INGRESS EGRESS
FRAME FRAME
PROCESSING PROCESSING
ECPA Operation
Under normal circumstances, the FrameInjector allows traffic from the MAC
block to pass-thru to the Ingress Frame Processing block. Similarly, the Frame-
Monitor, in normal operation, passes frames transparently in the egress direc-
tion from the egress frame processing block to the MAC block.
When placed in test mode, the FrameInjector can inject test traffic in the ingress
or egress data path. This test traffic emulates the flow of traffic from a UNI or
EVC and allows various characteristics of the traffic to be simulated to ensure
that the EVC connection performs correctly all the way through the network.
The FrameMonitor, when enabled, sniffs the ingress or egress traffic path for
EVC test frames and traps them. The FrameMonitor can perform various perfor-
mance calculations on the test traffic to analyze the EVC operation.
The FrameMonitor and FrameInjector also implement a flow loopback path
which allows egress traffic frames trapped in the FrameMonitor to be “looped”
back to the FrameInjector for transmission back into the network. This flow loop-
back enables a single EVC test traffic flow to be looped back without affecting
normal EVC traffic. This capability is critical to performing multi-service port test-
ing.
Each FrameInjector block is capable of sourcing three independent traffic flows,
each with a different set of characteristics. Thus, it is possible to test EVC per-
formance for multiple classes of traffic (for instance, with different priority levels)
to ensure that different traffic classes receive correct QoS treatment. Similarly,
each FrameMonitor is capable of monitoring and analyzing three independent
data flows.
An ECPA test setup window via eVision walks you though the steps for selecting
ECPA setup and execution options, and performing ECPA diagnostics. You can
place a facility in the maintenance state, select the desired tests to perform, exe-
cute diagnostics, view test results, and restore the facility from this window.
Refer to Figure 44 for an example of an ECPA test in progress using eVision.
ECPA upstream injection (e.g., network port as the source port and injecting in
the N2A direction) with the source port of a LAG Member Port is not expected to
function properly when injecting untagged frames and LAG protocols enabled.
The injection of untagged frames blocks LACP (because they are untagged)
and causes the removal of the port from the LAG function. The removal of the
port from the LAG also blocks all non-LACP frames from being forwarded on
that port.
For more information on the ECPA operation, see Etherjack® Connection Per-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
formance Analyzer on p. 514.
CO Based
Test Head
Loopback Loopback
Test Pattern 2 Test Pattern 1
As shown in the example in the figure above, traffic is looped back into the net-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
work and back to the test-set. The test-set can look for any anomalies such as
frame loss or out-of-sequence frames. The loopback eliminates the need to con-
nect a test-set in the field or at the customer premise to verify round-trip service.
Three basic types of loopback are available: Port, VLAN and EFM-OAM. The
following loopback functions are available:
• Terminal Loopback
• Terminal Timed Loopback
• Facility Loopback
• Facility Timed Loopback
• Terminal VLAN Loopback
• Facility VLAN Loopback
• Remote EFM-OAM Loopback
• Timed Remote EFM-OAM Loopback
• Facility I-TAG Loopback (Network Port only)
• Terminal I-TAG Loopback (Network Port only)
When using eVision, to remove a loopback, click on the drop-down list for Loop-
back Configuration and select “None”, then click on “OK”.
Port Loopback
Port loopbacks consist of Terminal and Facility loopbacks, which may be
applied in a constant or timed manner. A terminal loopback connects all traffic
frames about to be transmitted from the port to the associated, incoming
receiver (see Figure 46). This operation also enables testing of internal receiv-
ers and transmitters. Placing a port in facility loopback mode connects all traffic
frames received from the port to the associated transmitter (see Figure 47).
Both terminal and facility loopbacks will loop back all traffic frames (excluding
EFM-OAM messages), resulting in a disruption of service. Selecting the timed
loopback option can minimize the amount of time service is disrupted while
allowing a specified duration of testing. Port loopbacks ignore any traffic shap-
ing and allow testing at the full port bandwidth.
RX TX RX TX
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Access TX RX Network Access TX RX Network
RX TX RX TX
TX RX TX RX
Access Network Access Network
tion Address is the same address from where the frames are received, the Layer
2 cloud will discard the frames.
Selecting the Swap SA/DA [Swapping the Source Address (SA) with the Desti-
nation Address (DA)] option during the loopback directs the FSP 150CC to look
up the MAC address of frames being received and swap out the Source
Address with the Destination Address, allowing the Layer 2 cloud to forward the
frames (see Figure 49). This function is performed by the Media Controller Con-
verter (MCC). Only one Swap SA/DA loopback may be performed per system.
Once a Swap SA/DA loopback has been operated, a second Swap SA/DA loop-
back may not be performed on another entity.
Although the following examples show Access port loopbacks, the same applies
to Network port loopbacks.
Access Network
X Layer 2 Cloud Network Access
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
TX Media RX TX RX
FRAMES:
Converter
Controller SA MAC: 00:0B:90:00:08:32
DA MAC: 00:0B:90:02:8A:31
Access Network
Layer 2 Cloud Network Access
TX Media RX TX RX
FRAMES:
Converter
Controller: SA MAC: 00:0B:90:00:08:32
Swap SA/DA DA MAC: 00:0B:90:02:8A:31
VLAN Loopback
Both terminal and facility loopbacks send all traffic frames, and therefore result
in an out-of-service disruption of service for the time the loopback is applied.
The VLAN loopback function can select egress frames with a specific VLAN ID
to be looped back without disrupting normal EVC traffic. During a VLAN loop-
back, only the specified VLAN traffic is looped back. All other traffic is for-
warded, preventing any disruption of service. Only one VLAN loopback may be
performed per system. Once a VLAN loopback has been operated, a second
VLAN loopback may not be performed on another entity. For Network, selection
and entry of Inner Tag and/or Outer Tag VLAN IDs are possible. VLAN loop-
backs conform to any configured traffic shaping profiles.
TX Media RX TX RX
Converter
Controller VLAN ID = 4094-0
Selected VLAN(s) are looped back,
all other frames are forwarded
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
based loopbacks on the Network Ports. It is similar to VLAN-base loopbacks,
but the I-Tag is also used. FSP 150CC-GE11x ignores the Backbone VLAN Tag
(B-TAG) in the PBB frames. There are two types of I-Tag Based Loopbacks:
• Facility I-TAG Loopbacks
• Terminal I-TAG Loopbacks
Either types of I-TAG Loopbacks can be based on:
• {I-SID, I-PCP} or {I-SID, *} up to 3 pairs
• {I-SID, I-PCP} + inner {VID, PRI} or {VID.*} up to 3 pairs
• {I-SID, *} + inner {VID, PRI} or {VID.*} up to 3 pairs
In the list above, PCP means Priority Code Point (P-bits).
As for I-Tag based loopbacks, if the SwapSADA attribute is set to “Swap SADA”
the following are swapped:
• B-DA MAC and B-SA MAC
• C-DA MAC and C-SA MAC
If SwapSADA is set to “Swap DA Overrides SA” the following are swapped:
• B-SA MAC and local SA MAC
• C-DA MAC and C-SA MAC
TX Media RX TX RX
Converter
Controller I-Tag = 16777214-7
Selected I-Tag & VLAN(s) are looped back, VLAN ID = 4094-7
all other frames are forwarded
EFM-OAM Loopback
IEEE compliance requires EFM-OAM frame integrity when a loopback is in
place. The EFM-OAM loopback (which is similar to a facility loopback) performs
this function by processing all EFM-OAM frames while looping back all other
traffic. The EFM-OAM loopback function is performed by the Media Controller
Converter (MCC). See the following figure. Note that the Remote EFM-OAM
loopback includes management traffic, therefore management traffic is dropped
while the Remote EFM-OAM loopback is active. Since all EFM-OAM frames are
still processed, when the loopback is released, management connectivity will
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
also be restored.
TX Media RX TX RX
Converter
Controller
All Other Traffic
EFM-OAM messages are processed, Remote EFM-OAM Loopback
all other frames are looped back command sent from this FSP 150CC
Fault Propagation
The FSP 150CC supports two types of fault propagation:
• Network to Access Fault Propagation
• Access to Access Link Loss Forwarding
Network to Access fault propagation can be the simple link loss forwarding
across the system (i.e., between network and client ports) or the propagation of
a fault condition from the network to the access by means of Ethernet OAM
messages.
Link
Disable
®
MGMT
LA
N
STA 123LKL
FSP 150CC
Node B
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• by physically disabling the access port
• by transmitting frames with ETH-AIS information.
It is also often desired to propagate link faults across an intermediate network.
Access to Access Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) allows a failure detected on one
UNI to be propagated to the remote UNI across the EVC. This type of Link Loss
Forwarding requires the use of control messages between the FSP 150CC
products.
L in k D is a b le
C lie n t
S w itc h
FSP 150CC
Link Fault
FSP 150CC
C lie n t
S w itc h
The control messages to implement Access to Access LLF are based on the fol-
lowing standard Ethernet OAM protocols:
• IEEE 802.3ah EFM OAM
TX Media RX TX Media RX
Converter
EFM-OAM Dying Gasp sent
Converter
Controller to all EFM-OAM enabled interfaces Controller
RX TX RX TX
TX RX TX RX
SNMP Dying Gasp sent
to resolved SNMP Target Address
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The SNMP Dying Gasp feature is best utilized when connected to a device that
is not EFM-OAM compliant. Note that SNMP Dying Gasp, which is intended to
supplant EFM-OAM Dying Gasp, only functions on traffic carrying ports (i.e., not
the Management LAN port).
To set up the SNMP Dying Gasp feature, first create the appropriate Ethernet
encapsulated VLAN-based management tunnel (the SNMP Dying Gasp feature
only applies to Network and Access interfaces and are not applicable to the
Management LAN or Serial Port). Then configure SNMP Target addresses on
the FSP 150CC. Then enable SNMP Dying Gasp at the system level. Once an
SNMP target address is configured and resolved, the SNMP Trap Dying Gasp
Interface displays, indicating that the SNMP Dying Gasp feature is operational.
If an SNMP target address is unresolved, the SNMP Dying Gasp trap cannot be
transmitted for that SNMP target address. Each interface may have one target
address resolved for it. This means that a device that has two management tun-
nels, with a resolved target address on each tunnel, will send out two SNMP
Dying Gasp traps - one for each interface.
The first target address per interface that is resolved is considered as the
“resolved” one for that interface. Other target addresses that would be reach-
able on that same interface are listed as unresolved.
monitored devices can be connected to the 4 dry contact alarm inputs. The dry
contact alarm inputs are programmable to specify the monitored condition and
whether the alarm shall be raised on contact closed or open.
interfaces can also be used to connect and manage other FSP 150CC and FSP
150CP products. In order to support the management tunnels, each interface
supports an IP interface by reserving some provisionable bandwidth for trans-
porting management traffic. Basic ARP and IP routing functionality is provided in
the case where the DCN works like a router.
The DCN also supports an Access Control List (ACL) to limit management
access to the shelf. Up to 10 system level ACL entries can be made, and each
entry can be individually enabled or disabled. Enabling ACL filtering will “permit”
the corresponding management traffic. Disabling the ACL filtering will “deny” the
corresponding management traffic. Enabled entries apply to all management
interfaces and may be provisioned for specific IP addresses, or an IP address
range (subnetwork).
The system also provides a means for the user to control the availability of ser-
vices such as FTP, Telnet etc. The system supports broadcast storm suppres-
sion so as to prevent DOS attack.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
address - either from eth0 (DCN) or any management tunnel.
Management Traffic Bridging is enabled or disabled at the system level (Edit
System) where default is no bridging (Disabled).
The following figures show provisioning examples and the respective connectiv-
ity between the FSP 150CC-GE11x and a FSP 150CC-GE206 using the bridg-
ing feature via two scenarios: Single Level Bridging and Dual Level Bridging.
eVision Workstation
IP Address =
192.168.190.105
Subnet Mask =
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway =
192.168.190.1
eVision Workstation
IP Address =
192.168.192.50
Subnet Mask =
DCN
255.255.255.0
IP Address = 192.168.192.51
Default Gateway =
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
192.168.192.1
Default Router = 192.168.192.1
GE11x DHCP = enabled
Management Traffic Bridging =
Enabled
port1 port2
Mgmttnl Mgmttnl
VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100 VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
eVision Workstation
IP Address =
192.168.192.50
Subnet Mask =
255.255.255.0 DCN
Default Gateway = IP Address = 192.168.192.51
192.168.192.1 Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.192.1
GE11x DHCP = enabled
Management Traffic Bridging =
Enabled
port1 port2
DCN
DCN IP Address = 192.168.192.53
IP Address = 192.168.192.52 Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 Default Router = 192.168.192.1
Default Router = 192.168.192.1 GE11x port1 GE206 DHCP = disabled
Net
DHCP = disabled Management Traffic Bridging = Enabled
Management Traffic Bridging = Enabled Add static default route:
Add static default route: 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.192.1 eth0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.192.1 eth0
Mgmttnl Mgmttnl
VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100 VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100
Encapsulation Type = Ethernet Encapsulation Type = Ethernet
Management Interfaces
Management interfaces consist of a eVision Web Browser Management Tool
interface, a Command Line Interface and a Simple Network Management Proto-
col interface.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
150CC-GE11x SNMP Reference Guide.
Breadcrumb
Breadcrumbs are used by Fiber Service Platform Network Manager (FSPNM) to
store information. Information is packed into unstructured name-value pairs
(ESM-nvpair). Being unstructured allows Breadcrumbs to store any information
including that relevant to higher layer management systems such as Operations
support systems (OSSs).
The Breadcrumb can be manipulated on CLI or SNMP but not GUI. What nota-
ble is, when the user delete an entity (for example, a LAG or a Flow) on any
interface (CLI, SNMP or GUI), the Breadcrumb entities associated with it, are
automatically removed.
Management Features
ACL Management
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Up to 10 system level ACL entries can be made, and each entry can be individ-
ually enabled or disabled. Enabling ACL filtering will “permit” the corresponding
management traffic. Disabling the ACL filtering will “deny” the corresponding
management traffic. Enabled entries apply to all management interfaces and
may be provisioned for specific IP addresses, or an IP address range (subnet-
work).
Security Banner
The security banner feature allows an operator to define a custom security ban-
ner which is displayed whenever a user logs onto the system. This banner is
displayed on CLI and web browser logins. The system is shipped with a default
security banner.
RADIUS or TACACS+
Up to three RADIUS or TACACS+ servers may be configured for remote
authentication. Both support accounting.
Provisioning
The FSP 150CC provides provisioning options for the various NE functions. The
following provides a brief overview of provisioning options supported by the FSP
150CC. For detailed provisioning information, see Operations Provisioning on
p. 219 and Provisioning Rules on p. 599.
Communications Provisioning
The FSP 150CC provides facilities to set up a management communication
configuration for a particular site or specific network configuration and supports
several management configurations and options.
Typical deployment scenarios are in common IP network configurations and
within an IP environment the FSP 150CC can be connected in many different
ways, e.g.:
• connected to a LAN through direct connections, a router, or an Ethernet
switch
• static routes can be created to enable connections between a workstation
and an FSP 150CC
• different IP functions can be used to achieve specific network goals, e.g.,
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected FSP
150CC to serve as a gateway for other equipment that is not connected to
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the LAN
Operations Provisioning
Provisioning System Options
Facilities are provided to provision system options, including:
• common system options, such as:
o
System identity
o
IP connectivity
o
time
o
access
o
SNMP traps
• information logs, including Security, Alarm, Audit and System Logs
• system security, such as the configuration of users, Access Control List
(ACL) and the login security banner (see Management Features on p. 99)
• the Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Provisioning Protection
Facilities are provided to provision protection by adding a protection group for
1+1, Dual Active Receive).
Facilities are provided to provision protection by adding a LAG group for 1:1 pro-
tection (Network or Access interfaces).
Provisioning Alarms
Facilities are provided to modify alarm notification codes for given alarm condi-
tion types, displayed in the Alarms Pane. The options available for notification
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
codes are: Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed or Not Reported. For further infor-
mation on Alarm Monitoring see Alarm Generation and Monitoring on p. 110.
The DHCP server for the Installation Network has to be properly configured to
support the LTP function. The FSP 150CC-GE11x expects to receive not only
an IP address, but looks for a boot configuration file name and a server address
from which to retrieve the file. Since this boot configuration file is usually specific
for each NE, the DHCP server has to be able to identify the specific NE. If the
NE does not receive the “file name” and “next server” information, LTP is not
invoked.
After getting a valid IP address on the installation network, the FSP
150CC-GE11x accesses the “Next Server” to downloads the “Filename”
(BOOTP configuration file) via Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). Once a
BOOTP configuration file is downloaded and validated. The BOOTP configura-
tion file causes the FSP 150CC-GE11x to check the software version and install
the system software if necessary, and then download a CLI Configuration files
to perform in-depth provisioning.
The FSP 150CC-GE11x can reboot while running the Boot Configuration file,
(e.g., after installing the system software) but the BOOTP file isn’t in persistent
memory. This means the NE repeats all LTP actions including the authentica-
tion step, accessing the installation DHCP server and the “next server” to get the
BOOTP Config file again and re-examining each directive. When it gets to the
end of the BOOTP Config file, the FSP 150CC-GE11x should be properly provi-
sioned to access the traffic-carrying network.
LTP Process
LTP is always on. Every time when the Device is initialized or reinitialized, it
tries to communicate with the installation DHCP server.
Step 1 LTP starts at system boot.
Step 2 If an Management interface with DHCP enabled is detected. LTP per-
forms a DHCP Exchange to determine the Boot Configuration File-
name and Next Server.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x supports a Boot Configuration Filename up to 64
PS
PS
• The NE reboot twice, if both software upgrading and config-file
Note
load are required.
• The NE doesn’t reboot, if neither software upgrading and con-
fig-file load are required.
SCP protocol but not TFTP. Using TFTP can take longer than
acceptable. TFTP was designed as a slow protocol.
Note
configuration file to human readers of the file. Blank lines are also ignored
by the parser.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
#
# where:
#
# <major> - a two-digit "major" number
# <minor> - a two-digit "minor" number
#
# NOTE: A "version" directive MUST be the first directive in a boot
# configuration file.
#
# There SHOULD be at least ONE "version" directive in a boot
# configuration file. There SHOULD be ONLY one "version" directive
# in a boot configuration file. ALL "version" directives are
# processed and ALL are validated.
#
# If NO "version" directive is found, then no other
# directives can be processed.
#
# Special Case: If no directives are specified, then LTP
# will succeed. (do nothing)
#
# Example:
#
# version F3-01.00
#
version F3-01.00
# where:
#
# <version> - a version in the following format "xxx.yyy.zzz"
# where "xxx", "yyy" and "zzz" specify the software
# image release version "major.minor.build".
# <serverIpAddr> - a decimal dotted notation IPv4 address
# <username> - a username to use for the SCP client. This
# username must exist on the 825.
# <filepath/filename> - a file path and name with standard characters
#
# NOTE: The TOTAL directive length must not exceed 512 characters!
#
# There MUST be at most ONE "verify-software" directive in a boot
# configuration file. There MAY be NO "verify-software" directives
# in a boot configuration file.
#
# Example:
#
# verify-software 2.1.329 tftp 10.10.32.10 FSP825_2.1.329.img
# verify-software 2.1.329 scp 10.10.32.10 user1 FSP825_2.1.329.img
#
verify-software 5.4.1-249 sftp 172.23.191.253 zeno 123456
/home/zeno/fsp150cc-ge114.5.4.1-249.img
If the software upgrade fails, the system is in an unusable state and requires
manual intervention. There is no mechanism to limit the number of LTP attempts
to perform the software upgrade.
PS
can take time longer than acceptable. This is because TFTP was
designed as a slow protocol.
Note
For example:
# "download-config" directive
#
# Syntax:
#
# download-config tftp <serverIpAddr> <filepath/filename>
# download-config scp <serverIpAddr> <username> <filepath/filename>
#
# where:
#
# <serverIpAddr> - a decimal dotted notation IPv4 address
# <username> - a username to use for the SCP client. This
# username must exist on the 825.
# <filepath/filename> - a file path and name with standard characters
#
# NOTE: The TOTAL directive length must not exceed 512 characters!
#
# There MAY be no, one, or more "download-config" directives
# in the boot configuration file.
#
# Example:
#
# download-config tftp 10.10.32.10 configfiles/CLIconfig1
#
download-config tftp 10.10.32.10 configfiles/ConfigFile2
#
#
# <end>
In the example above, the CLI files are downloaded using the TFTP client.
If a failure occurs during the application of the CLI command file, the system dis-
continues processing the CLI Configuration file and then continue normal initial-
ization. An LTP Failure condition/alarm is not raised. Additional diagnostic
information can be retrieved with the system's configfile-status command.
In the CLI configuration File downloaded, the user must include commands to
ensure that the LTP process is appropriately terminated. Usually, this is
achieved by preventing the NE to communicate with the Installation DHCP
again. In order of this, the user can:
• Disabled DHCP on the Management Interface (Management Tunnel, DCN).
• Delete it the Management Interface (only applies if the Management Inter-
face is a Management tunnel).
• Disable the management interface (only applies if the is DCN).
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
In the cases where LTP download a CLI Configuration
File, but the Configuration file includes no commands to
disable DHCP on the Management tunnel or delete the
Management tunnel, the NE falls into an endless LTP
loop.
NOTICE This is because LTP reboot the NE to apply the CLI
Configuration file. With a DHCP-enabled management
Tunnel existing, LTP will continue to download the same
Boot Configuration File and CLI Configuration file again,
which will cause another reboot.
Comments Syntax
#
# Low-Touch Provisioning Boot Configuration File
#
# ADVA Optical Networking NA, Inc.
#
# Date : Tue Sep 16 09:14:40 CDT 2008
# Author : Jack B. Nimble (jnibble@advaoptical.com)
#
#
# Comments are denoted with the "#" symbol and are ignored during processing.
#
# Comments are denoted with the "#" symbol and are ignored during processing.
#
# "version" directive
#
# Syntax:
#
# version <major>.<minor>
#
# where:
#
# <major> - a two-digit "major" number
# <minor> - a two-digit "minor" number
#
# NOTE: A "version" directive MUST be the first directive in a boot
# configuration file.
#
# There SHOULD be at least ONE "version" directive in a boot
# configuration file. There SHOULD be ONLY one "version" directive
# in a boot configuration file. ALL "version" directives are
# processed and ALL are validated.
#
# If NO "version" directive is found, then no other
# directives can be processed.
#
# Special Case: If no directives are specified, then LTP
# will succeed. (do nothing)
#
# Example:
#
# version F3-01.00
#
version F3-01.00
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
# "verify-software" directive
#
# Syntax:
#
# verify-software <version> tftp <serverIpAddr> <filepath/filename>
# verify-software <version> scp <serverIpAddr> <username> <filepath/filename>
#
# where:
#
# <version> - a version in the following format "xxx.yyy.zzz"
# where "xxx", "yyy" and "zzz" specify the software
# image release version "major.minor.build".
# <serverIpAddr> - a decimal dotted notation IPv4 address
# <username> - a username to use for the SCP client. This
# username must exist on the system.
# <filepath/filename> - a file path and name with standard characters
#
# NOTE: The TOTAL directive length must not exceed 512 characters!
#
# There MUST be at most ONE "verify-software" directive in a boot
# configuration file. There MAY be NO "verify-software" directives
# in a boot configuration file. (The first "verify-software"
# directive shall be processed and completed before checking
# for other "verify-software" directives.)
#
# Example:
#
# verify-software 2.1.139 tftp 10.10.32.10 FSPNNN_2.1.139.img
# verify-software 2.1.139 scp 10.10.32.10 user1 FSPNNN_2.1.139.img
#
verify-software 5.4.1-249 sftp 172.23.191.253 zeno 123456
/home/zeno/fsp150cc-ge114.5.4.1-249.img
#
# "download-config" directive
#
# Syntax:
#
# download-config tftp <serverIpAddr> <filepath/filename>
# download-config scp <serverIpAddr> <username> <filepath/filename>
#
# where:
#
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
For further information on the Alarms Pane, see Chapter 3: eVision Web
Browser Management Tool.
(IEEE 1588 v2). In addition to data traffic, the GE114PH supports Power
over Ethernet (PoE) and functions as Power-Supplying Equipment (PSE) to
devices that are IEEE 802.3at compatible.
• Local Management LAN Port (labeled MGMT LAN) - front mounted RJ-45
connector
• Local Serial Port (labeled RS-232) - front mounted RJ-45 connector
• USB Port - high speed USB 2.0 port with type A receptacle for wireless
management using a USB wireless adapter
• GE112/GE114/GE114S - A single integrated Power Supply Unit (AC,
-48VDC or +24VDC variant) with integral Cable Tie support
• GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH - Two (redundant) Power Supply Units
(PSUs) with integral Cable Tie support (ordered separately). PSU Blank
Plates are not provided.
• GE114H/GE114PH - Environmental Alarm Input connector - front mounted
RJ45 connector
• GE114S/GE114SH - BITS IN/BITS OUT Port - front mounted RJ-48c T1/E1
timing input/output connector; TOD Port output connector - front mounted
RJ45 connector, PPS IN (for future use)/PPS output connectors- front
mounted Mini-SMB connectors, one CLK output connector - front mounted
Mini-SMB connector
• GE114SH - one front mounted SMA GPS connector
• Serial Console Adapter, RJ-45 to DB9, used to connect to a DB-9 RS-232
port on the PC or Laptop.
PS
are adequately protected, do not operate the FSP 150CC-GE11x for
Note extended periods without supplying plugs for vacant electrical and
optical ports.
Single fiber (bi-directional), dual fiber and copper Small Form factor Pluggable
(SFP) transceivers are supported. ADVA Optical Networking strongly encour-
ages the use of ADVA Optical Networking sourced SFPs. No support is pro-
vided for systems that use SFPs other than those sourced by ADVA Optical
Networking. The SFP contains a software key that is checked by the FSP
150CC-GE11x prior to initialization. This check is performed to ensure that only
ADVA Optical Networking approved SFP units are used. SFP units are individu-
ally qualified by ADVA Optical Networking to ensure the quality of the optical
output and conformance to the MultiSource Agreement (MSA).
If the SFP transceiver and rate do not match the configured application, an SFP
mismatch alarm is raised. The port is then configured to prevent traffic from
passing. If SFP cannot pass ADVA check criteria, but the SFP transceiver and
rate do match the configured application, a “SFP is not qualified” standing condi-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
tion is raised, and traffic is allowed. For more information on SFPs, see Sup-
ported SFP Interface in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical Descriptions
document.
For information on connectors and LED descriptions, see Connector and LED
Descriptions on p. 114. For details on connector pin assignments, see Connec-
tor Pin Assignments on p. 181.
Cable Tie Cable handling for the FSP 150CC-GE11x is provided by means of an integral
Support Cable Tie Support. This is located on the mounting brackets which provides a
(Integral) means to tie down all cables.
Mounting The chassis may be positioned as a standalone unit or it may be rack mounted
Brackets or wall mounted. Adaptation to rack mounting is possible by using mounting
brackets, which may be ordered separately. Mounting kits are available for a
variety of mounting environments (see Equipment Part Number in FSP 150CC
GE11x R6.1 Technical Descriptions document):
• Wall mounting
• Standard 19-inch, 23-inch rack or ETSI mounting for a single unit or dual
GE112/GE114/GE114S units, or for a single GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH
• 19-inch, 23-inch rack or ETSI Extended (recessed) mounting in order to
ensure that optical fiber bend radius is maintained when installed in some
cabinets with doors. Bracket configurations are provided for mounting for a
single unit or dual GE112/GE114 units, or for a single GE114H/GE114PH.
All brackets are designed to be screwed to the sides of the chassis and the
screws supplied have ETSI compatible threads.
Power Cabling With the exception of the -48 VDC PSU for European applications, which comes
with an EU power cable, all PSU power cords must be ordered separately. The
AC power cord is 6 feet long and each DC power cord is 10 feet long, each wire
is 16 Gauge, stranded. For more detailed specification information, see Power
in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical Descriptions document.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Refer to the following for FSP 150CC-GE11x connectors and LED descriptions
when performing the following procedures. They may be used as supporting
technical information for troubleshooting faults as well as connector and LED
location/identification. For connector pin designations, refer to Connector Pin
Assignments on p. 181.
Refer to Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing on p. 537 for a
description of the alarm condition, probable cause, suggested trouble clearing
procedures, and associated LED indication. To clear alarm conditions, it is sug-
gested that you start by using the trouble clearing procedure in Recommended
Steps for Trouble Clearing on p. 535, using the associated eVision alarm condi-
tion.
GE112
Four configurable 1GbE optical or 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports
(RJ45) - labeled 1 though 4:
• Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 may be con-
figured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. The optical
Network port interfaces use single or dual SFP optical transceivers (SMF or
MMF) that support 1000 Base SX/LX/ZX. Optionally, the Network ports may
be configured as 100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports.
• Ports 3 and 4 are Access ports and may be configured for optical or copper,
or copper SFP. (In addition, Port 2 may be provisioned as an Access port, if
Network protection is not used.) The optical LAN interfaces use an SFP
optical transceiver (SMF or MMF) that supports (1000 BaseLX10 or 1000
BaseLH) or single fiber (1000 Base BX10). Optionally, the Access ports
may be configured as 10/100 Base-T copper LAN ports (RJ45).
GE114x
Six configurable 1GbE optical or 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports (RJ45)
- labeled 1 though 6:
• Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 may be con-
figured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. The optical
Network port interfaces use single or dual SFP optical transceivers (SMF or
MMF) that support 1000 Base SX/LX/ZX. Optionally, the Network ports may
be configured as 100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports.
• Ports 3 through 6 are Access ports and may be configured for optical or
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Pulse Per Second input (labeled PPS IN) (for future use) and a Pulse Per
Second output connector (labeled PPS) - both are front mounted Mini-SMB
- TTL (75 Ohm)
• External (10MHz) Frequency Reference output (labeled CLK) - front
mounted Mini-SMB (75 Ohm)
• Ground Position Satellite connector (labeled GPS) - front mounted SMA (50
Ohm)
Figure 60: GE112 Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (AC Variant)
Figure 61: GE114 Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (-48 VDC Variant)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 62: GE114S Front Panel Connectors and LEDs (-48 VDC Variant)
System LEDs
The names and functions of each general system LED are described in the fol-
lowing table.
Table 3: System LEDs
LED Name Color Definition
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PSU-n Off No input power detected
Status Input power present and PSU operating
(GE114H Green
with normal limits
/GE114SH PSU fail or input power out of spec
/ GE114PH) Red
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Each optical Ethernet port provides one LED (Link / Facility) as defined in the
following table.
Each RJ-45 electrical Ethernet port has two LEDs associated with the connec-
tor. The definitions of the LEDs are shown in the following table. Connectors are
rotated for the upper electrical ports (Link/Facility on the left and Rate on the
right).
Physical Installation
Introduction
This Chapter deals with the physical installation of the FSP 150CC-GE11x,
PSUs, and the external cabling for power, management and traffic to and from
the chassis. Additionally, this chapter includes references to technical informa-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
tion and procedures elsewhere in the document that are needed or helpful in
successfully completing the installation process.
Physical Installation
This section provides the information required to successfully install an FSP
150CC-GE11x system. Installation consists of:
• The physical installation of hardware, which includes:
o
Preparing for installation
o
Mount the FSP 150CC
o
Connect optional earth (frame ground) cable
o
Install PSUs (GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH)
• Connect cables and power up the equipment
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
IEC 61340-5-1:1998).
The chassis is designed for passive (fanless) air cooling. The number
of units that can be stacked are determined by the environment the
unit will be installed in, not the unit type that will be installed. The
following are requirements for maintaining internal temperatures
within design limits:
When units are installed in an I-Temp (Industrial) environment, units
can be stacked 1 high and must be mounted as a single unit only.
Dual unit mounting in an I-Temp environment should not be
implemented. When units are installed in a C-Temp (Commercial)
PS
• Has the rack been correctly leveled and secured to the floor?
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Requirements
In order to install the FSP 150CC, several types of cables, tools, equipment and
software applications are needed. The requirements are described in the follow-
ing sections.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Cables
Ensure that the cable types under the following headings are readily available,
as appropriate, for installation.
Direct Current--48V
For connecting the FSP 150CC to a fuse panel use a Direct Current (DC) power
cable (Power wires AWG 16) and 4 Amp rating for GE112/GE114/GE114S or 5
Amp rating for GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH. DC power cables are not sup-
plied with FSP 150CC equipment and must be ordered separately. See Equip-
ment Accessories in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical Descriptions
document.
Frame Ground An optional Earth (Frame Ground) connection may be attached to the Earth ter-
Cable minal point, located at the rear of the unit. Each FSP 150CC unit is supplied with
an Earth Terminal Kit and a 10 foot, 16 gauge grounding cable, terminated with
a round connector at one end and a slotted connector at the other end. During
installation, the ground cable is terminated at the rear of the unit at one end and
terminated at a site designated frame mounting point or ground bar at the other
end. A terminal tab is provided in the Earth Terminal Kit for optional push-on
connection to the Earth terminal point.
Fiber-optic Use fiber-optic cables that support distances up to the maximum drive distance.
Cables Both single mode (9/125µm) and multi-mode (50/125µm and 62.5/125µm) are
supported. (Note that the fiber type (SM/MM) must match the SFP module type.)
Do fiber optic cables have correct connectors?
Are the appropriate Small Form Factor Plugables (SFPs) identified and supplied
for each applicable Network/Access interface? The “FSP 150 Ethernet Access
Compatibility Matrix” document contains up-to-date information on which SFPs
are certified for each product. This document may be obtained through ADVA
Technical Support or via the product support site on www.advaoptical.com.
Is there fiber for each applicable Network/Access interface?
An adapter to the PC serial port (F, DB9) is required. See Serial Console Port
Connector Pin Assignments on p. 184. (The Serial Console Adapter is shipped
with the unit in the Accessory Kit, and may also be ordered separately; Part
Number 1036904035.)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
used for connection to the Environmental Alarm port. A customer-provided
cable shall consist of an RJ-45 connector on one end and wire connections at
the opposite end as required for the connecting equipment. Maximum length of
wire supported on alarm inputs: 100m (328 ft.) at 24 AWG. See Environmental
Alarm Connector Pin Description and Assignments - GE114H/GE114PH on
p. 184.
Tools
The tools described below are required for installation.
Screwdrivers
The following screwdrivers may be required during installation:
• a No.1 Pozi or Phillips screwdriver to attach DC power cables
• a No.2 Pozi or Phillips screwdriver to attach chassis rack mounting brackets
• a flat blade screwdriver to lock PSUs into chassis
ESD Protection
As the FSP 150CC contains electro-static sensitive devices, a grounded
anti-static wrist or heel strap is required when handling the unit to reduce elec-
tro-static charges.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Compressed Air
Canned, dry, oil-free compressed air for removing dust or debris is required.
DC Power Cabling
For connecting DC powered FSP 150CC power supply units, you need the fol-
lowing items:
• Screwdriver
• Wire wrap tool
• Wire cutters
• Wire strippers
• Volt meter
• Fuse panel
• Other power related tools and supplies as required by local practices
Optical Equipment
The following optical equipment is required during installation:
• signal/protocol generator or Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT)
• variable or fixed attenuators in the range 3dB to 11dB or fiber spools provid-
ing equivalent attenuation
• an optical power meter calibrated for the required wavelength(s)
• Optical fiber cleaning materials
Personal Computer
When provisioning the FSP 150CC, a personal computer or laptop with telnet or
SSH is required, with an RJ-45 Ethernet patch cable (cross-over or
straight-through) and an RJ-45 to F, DB9 adapter (The Serial Console Adapter
is shipped with the unit in the Accessory Kit, and may also be ordered sepa-
rately; Part Number 1036904035.)
Use a PC or Laptop running the OS MS Windows version XP, Vista or Windows
7 with:
• an unused serial RS-232 port
• a VT100 or ANSI compatible terminal emulation program (e.g., Tera Term
Pro Web 3.1.3) loaded.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Further details on equipment packs and part numbers are given in
PS
Verify the contents of the shipment and the condition of the equipment as soon
as it arrives. Use the following procedure for unpacking and inspecting the
equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the FSP 150CC equipment from its shipping cartons.
Step 2 Compare the equipment in each carton with the equipment lists in this
section. If there are discrepancies, notify ADVA Optical Networking
immediately with details of the discrepancies (see Obtaining Techni-
cal Assistance on p. 34).
Step 3 Check all components. If shipping damage is discovered notify ADVA
Optical Networking immediately (see Obtaining Technical Assistance
on p. 34). Please have the following information available:
• Part number of the equipment pack
• Serial and version number of the damaged unit
• Description of the damage
• How the damage may prevent successful installation
Step 4 If any FSP 150CC equipment is to be returned to ADVA Optical Net-
working, re-pack the equipment in the original carton. For details on
returning FSP 150CC equipment refer to Returning Equipment on
p. 131.
End of Procedure
Returning Equipment
If you need to return equipment, use the following procedure.
This product contains electro-static sensitive devices.
Appropriate anti-static handling precautions should be followed (i.e.,
IEC 61340-5-1:1998).
ment protection.
Note
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Repack the FSP 150CC equipment in the original packaging for opti-
mum equipment protection.
Step 2 Contact ADVA Optical Networking for assistance. See Obtaining
Technical Assistance on p. 34 for contact details.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
recommended that a heat deflector is installed below the FSP
150CC-GE11x(s). If it is necessary to install heat sensitive equipment
above a single FSP 150CC-GE11x unit in an I-Temp environment or
4 rows of FSP 150CC-GE11xs in a C-Temp environment, it is
recommended that a heat deflector is installed above the FSP
150CC-GE11x(s).
See the figures below to have a more intuitive understanding of the installation
of different units in different environments.
Before installing FSP 150CC, refer to Preparing for Installation on p. 124, for
details on site verification, the tools and equipment required for installation and
procedures for installing the FSP 150CC.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
To avoid eye injury from debris, always wear safety
WARNING glasses when working with canned compressed air.
There are two procedures for mounting the FSP 150CC-GE11x, depending on
the product type. Refer one of the following procedures for the particular product
being installed:
• Mounting the GE112/GE114/GE114S on p. 135
• Mounting the GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH on p. 146
For GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH, power supply units (PSUs) are also
required:
• Install GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH PSU on p. 153
Mounting Options
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The chassis may be rack mounted, wall mounted or placed as a standalone unit.
Use one of the following procedures to mount the FSP 150CC:
Table 7: FSP 150CC-GE11x Mounting Procedures
Single Dual
GE112/G GE112/ Mounting Kit(s)
Mounting Type Procedure
E114/GE GE114/ Required
114S GE114S
X 19” Standard or 1013904010 Mounting a Single
Extended GE112/GE114/GE114S via a
Standard or Extended 19”
Configuration on p. 136
X 23” Standard or 1013904010 and Mounting a Single
Extended 1013904012 GE112/GE114/GE114S via a 23”
X ETSI Extended 1013904010 and Standard or Extended / ETSI
1013904012 Extended Configuration on p. 137
X 19” Standard or 1013904011 Mounting Dual FSP
Extended GE112/GE114/GE114S via a 19”
Standard or Extended
Configuration on p. 139
X 23” Standard or 1013904011 and Mounting Dual FSP
Extended 1013904012 GE112/GE114/GE114S via a 23”
X ETSI Extended 1013904011 and Standard or Extended / ETSI
1013904012 Extended Configuration on p. 141
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
o
Four M3x5 CSK POZI screws
o
Four 12-24 x 0.5 phillips screws - or - Four M6x20 screws and four M6
nuts
Procedure
The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows:
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 Secure the 19” mounting bracket (short) and 19” mounting bracket
(long) to the GE112/GE114/GE114S using four M3X5 CSK POZI
screws. If installing in a Standard configuration, set the brackets flush
with the GE112/GE114/GE114S. If installing in an Extended configu-
ration line up the rear set of bracket holes to the
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows:
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 Secure the 19” mounting bracket (short) and 19” mounting bracket
(long) to the GE112/GE114/GE114S using four M3x5 CSK POZI
screws.
For 23” rack installation: attach one 1U 19” to 23” extender bracket to
each 19” mounting ear (short and long) using four 10-32 x 0.375
screws. For ETSI rack installation: attach one 1U 19” to ETSI
extender bracket to each 19” mounting ear (short and long) using four
10-32 x 0.375 screws See Figure 73.
If installing in a Standard configuration, set the brackets flush with the
GE112/GE114/GE114S. If installing in an Extended configuration,
line up the rear set of bracket holes to the GE112/GE114/GE114S so
that the GE112/GE114/GE114S is recessed from the front of the
bracket.
Step 3 Mount the GE112/GE114/GE114S to the 23” rack or ETSI rack with
four 12-24 x 0.5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6
nuts.
End of Procedure
Figure 73: Mounting a Single GE112/GE114/GE114S via EXT 23” / ETSI Extended Configura-
tion
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows:
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 If necessary, determine which GE112/GE114/GE114S will reside on
the left and which will reside on the right. Install one of the dual
mounting brackets to the right side of the left GE112/GE114/GE114S
using two M3x5 CSK POZI screws. Mount the other dual mounting
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
bracket to the left side of the right GE112/GE114/GE114S using two
M3x5 CSK POZI screws. Ensure that the dual mounting brackets are
“flipped” from one another (oriented so they will mate correctly when
they are attached in the next step). See Figure 74.
Step 3 Secure the dual mounting brackets to each other using six M2x6 Phil-
lips A2 screws (three on the top and three on the bottom). See
Figure 74.
Step 4 Secure a 19” (short) mounting bracket to the left unit using two M3X5
CSK POZI screws and secure the remaining 19” (short) mounting
bracket to the right unit using two M3x5 CSK POZI screws. See
Figure 74.
If installing in a Standard configuration, set the brackets flush with the
GE112/GE114/GE114S. If installing in an Extended configuration line
up the rear set of bracket holes to the GE112/GE114/GE114S so that
the GE112/GE114/GE114S is recessed from the front of the bracket.
Step 5 Mount the GE112/GE114/GE114S to the 23” rack or ETSI rack with
four 12-24 x 0.5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6
nuts.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows:
Step 1 Perform all the steps in the following procedure: Mounting Dual FSP
GE112/GE114/GE114S via a 19” Standard or Extended Configura-
tion on p. 139.
Step 2 Attach the extension brackets to each end unit:
For 23” rack installation: attach one 1U 19” to 23” extender bracket to
each (left and right unit) 19” mounting ear using four 10-32 x 0.375
screws. For ETSI rack installation: attach one 1U 19” to ETSI
extender bracket to each (left and right unit) 19” mounting ear using
four 10-32 x 0.375 screws. See Figure 75.
If installing in a Standard configuration, set the brackets flush with the
GE112/GE114/GE114S. If installing in an Extended configuration,
line up the rear set of bracket holes to the GE112/GE114/GE114S so
that the GE112/GE114/GE114S is recessed from the front of the
bracket.
Step 3 Mount the dual-mated GE112/GE114/GE114S to the 23” rack or ETSI
rack with four 12-24 x 0.5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and
four M6 nuts.
End of Procedure
Figure 75: Mounting Dual GE112/GE114/GE114S via EXT 23” / ETSI Configuration
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 Mount four rubber feet to the bottom of the unit near each corner.
(Four white rubber feet are included in the Accessory Kit, which is
shipped with each unit.)
Step 3 Place the chassis on a secure flat surface, making sure that it is within
reach of the necessary connections.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
WARNING maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply
connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit.
Procedure
The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows:
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 Select the correct mounting bracket type from the
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH Rack Mounting Kit.
Step 3 Place one mounting bracket on one side of the
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH in the correct position, so that the four
screw holes on the chassis side panel and the mounting bracket are
lined up (one bracket for each side). The mounting bracket can be
used in the middle or the front of the side panels. See Figure 77.
Step 4 Align the shelf to the assigned frame location and insert two
counter-sunk M4 Pozihead Screws through the mounting holes (as
supplied in the Rack Mounting Kit) and tighten with a No.2 Pozi or
Phillips screwdriver. See Figure 78.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the opposite side of the chassis.
Step 6 Insert the chassis into the rack and secure each mounting bracket to
the rack using M5 (or M6) Pozihead Screws.
The following air flow rules apply:
The chassis is designed for passive (fanless) air cooling. The number
of units that can be stacked are determined by the environment, not
the unit type installed. When units are mounted vertically in an I-Temp
(Industrial) environment, they require 1 RU of space above and below
each unit to maintain internal temperatures within design limits. When
installed in a C-Temp (Commercial) environment, units can be
stacked 4 high without providing space between units.
PS
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 77: Installing Mounting Brackets for GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH Rack Mounted Appli-
cations
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Use the following procedure to mount a GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH chassis
to a wall.
Procedure
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static sur-
face. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 2 Mount four rubber feet to the bottom of the unit near each corner.
(Four white rubber feet are included in the Accessory Kit, which is
shipped with each unit.)
Step 3 Place the chassis on a secure flat surface, making sure that it is within
reach of the necessary connections.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
An optional Earth (Frame Ground) connection may be attached to the Earth ter-
minal point, located at the rear of the unit. Each FSP 150CC-GE11x unit is sup-
plied with an Earth Terminal Kit and a 10 foot, 16 gauge grounding cable, to
facilitate this connection.
A terminal tab is provided within the Earth Terminal Kit for optional
push-on connection to the Earth terminal point, which is not the
PS
Procedure
Step 1 Using the M4x6 RAIS Pozi screw and one lock washer provided with
the Earth Terminal Kit, attach the 10 foot, 16 gauge grounding cable
to the Earth terminal point located at the rear of the FSP
150CC-GE11x unit. See Figure 80 through Figure 82.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the site designated grounding
location (frame connecting point or ground bar location). See
Figure 82.
Step 3 Dress the cable, as required.
End of Procedure
Optional
Terminal tab
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Earth Terminal Kit and Ground Cable (for optional grounding)
Ensure that the correct PSU is installed in the corresponding unit. The
GE114H/GE114SH uses 24 Watts AC/DC PSUs whereas the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Take the PSU out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static surface.
If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust parti-
cles.
Step 2 Insert the PSU into the appropriate chassis slot with the thumbscrew
oriented to the right.
Step 3 Push the PSU firmly until its connector engages with the backplane
connector inside the chassis.
Step 4 Hold the PSU in position and tighten the thumbscrew on the front
panel of the unit to secure it in place. See Figure 83 through Figure 85
for an example of the PSU variants.
End of Procedure
Status
-48 to -60V DC
- Gnd +
Detail
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 84: GE114H/GE114SH 120-240 VAC PSU Locking Mechanism
(24W)
Status
100 -
240V AC
Detail
100 - 240V AC
Status
Detail
Install or Remove
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH Blank Plates
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ADVA strongly recommended Redundant Power Supply Units for FSP 150CC-
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH. There are no Blank Plates provided.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 8: Copper Cable Connections
Product Connection Type
Network and Access Ports
GE112 Four Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for copper
(10/100/1000 BaseT) or optical (100BaseFX/1000BaseX):
• Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port.
• Port 2 (a flexible port) may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network
protection, or as an Access port.
• Ports 3 and 4 are dedicated Access ports.
GE114/GE114S Six Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for copper
GE114H/GE114SH/GE1 (10/100/1000 BaseT) or optical (100BaseFX/1000BaseX):
14PH
• Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port.
• Port 2 (a flexible port) may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network
protection, or as an Access port.
• Ports 3 through 6 are dedicated Access ports.
Other Electrical Connections
All Ethernet DCN connection (labeled MGMT LAN).
All Local Serial port (labeled RS-232).
All USB port for ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G modem
connection
All Optional earth ground cable.
GE114H/GE114PH Environmental Alarm Input, RJ-45 connector.
For EMI Class A required sites, a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ-45 con-
nectors may be used. The cable should be no longer than 100m and should be
compliant with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
802.3:1998 Ethernet standard. See LAN Connector Pin Assignments on p. 182.
For effective environmental protection from external objects of any
kind, the FSP 150CC-GE11x is intended to be protected from dust
and particles with all covers complete. To ensure that all components
PS
Procedure
Step 1 Route the Access / Network interface cable(s) from the FSP
150CC-GE11x to the appropriate location. Repeat for each additional
port as needed.
Step 2 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the Access / Network Inter-
face port on the front panel of the FSP 150CC-GE11x. Repeat for
each additional port as needed.
Step 3 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Customer Equip-
ment. Repeat for each additional Access / Network Port copper cable.
Step 4 Dress cables, as required.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
150CC-GE11x.
Step 4 Dress cables, as required.
End of Procedure
Procedure
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 3 Connect the other end of the Environmental Alarm to the Environmen-
tal Alarm connector (labeled ALARM) on the front panel of the
GE114H/GE114PH.
Step 4 Dress cables, as required.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Route the BITS IN and BITS OUT cable(s) from the
GE114S/GE114SH to the appropriate location.
Step 2 Connect the one end of the BITS cables to the appropriate location of
the clocking device or cross-connect panel.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 3 Connect the BITS IN and BITS OUT cables to the appropriate con-
nectors on the front panel of the GE114S/GE114SH.
Step 4 Dress cables, as required.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Route the TOD cable from the GE114S/GE114SH to the appropriate
location. Dress cables, as required.
Step 2 Connect the one end of the TOD cable to the appropriate location of
the clocking device or cross-connect panel.
Step 3 Connect the TOD cable to the TOD connector on the front panel of
the GE114S/GE114SH.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Route the PPS cable from the GE114S/GE114SH to the appropriate
location. Dress cables, as required.
Step 2 Connect the one end of the PPS cable to the appropriate location of
the external device or cross-connect panel.
Step 3 Connect the PPS cable to the PPS connector on the front panel of the
GE114S/GE114SH.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Route the CLK cable from the GE114S/GE114SH to the appropriate
location. Dress cables, as required.
Step 2 Connect the one end of the CLK cable to the appropriate location of
the external device or cross-connect panel.
Step 3 Connect the CLK cable to the CLK connector on the front panel of the
GE114S/GE114SH.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Route the GPS cable from the GE114SH to the appropriate location.
Dress cables, as required.
Step 2 Connect the one end of the GPS cable to GPS antenna cable.
Step 3 Connect the other end the GPS cable to the GPS connector on the
front panel of the GE114SH.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
and rate do match the configured application, a “NON qualified SFP” standing
condition is raised.
Copper SFPs are supported. See FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical Descrip-
tions document for more information on SFPs. The “FSP 150 Ethernet Access
Compatibility Matrix” document contains up-to-date information on which SFPs
are certified for each product. This document may be obtained through ADVA
Technical Support or via the product support site on www.advaoptical.com.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
inside the device.
PS
(2) Keep all ports and connectors free from dust. When not in use, fit
Note both connector plugs and sockets with protective caps.
SFP Interfaces are hot swappable. The power to the FSP 150CC
PS
Use the following procedure for installing an SFP Interface. Repeat the proce-
dure for each SFP to be installed.
Procedure
Step 1 If so equipped, remove the protective cap from the appropriate port on
the front panel of the Access Port or Network Port.
Step 2 Take the SFP Interface out of its packaging and put it on an anti-static
surface. If necessary, use canned compressed air to blow off any dust
particles.
Step 3 Orient the SFP Interface until the duplex LC, simplex SC or RJ45 con-
nector is facing you and the manufacturer’s label is toward the Access
Port or Network Port port interface’s LEDs.
face does not click when inserted, remove it, turn it over and reinsert.
Note (2) Force should not be required to insert a SFP Interface. If an
interface does not insert easily, remove and inspect it, and if it is not
damaged, reinsert.
Step 4 Holding the SFP Interface by its sides, gently slide it into the port slot
until it clicks into place, or until it cannot be inserted any further.
End of Procedure
Never handle exposed fiber optic cables with bare hands or touch it to
your body. A fiber fragment could enter the skin and be very difficult to
detect and remove.
CAUTION
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Route all fiber optic cables from the GE11x to the appropriate loca-
tion. Do not connect the cables to the GE11x connectors at this time.
They will be connected later.
Step 2 Dress all fiber optic cables. Use local practices for protecting all
cables and connectors.
End of Procedure
The PSUs are load sharing and hot-swappable. They are physically accessed at
the front of the unit and source connections are located on the front of each PSU
module. If one PSU module fails - or its input source fails, the remaining module
continues to power the system without interrupting system function.
There are three variants of AC and one variant of DC PSUs available for
GE114PH. The software will detect the PSU type inserted.
o 180W Variant: Takes 120/240 VAC input.
o 60W Variant: Takes 120/240 VAC input.
o 95W Variant: Takes 120/240 VAC input
o
95W Variant: Takes -48 VDC input
Ensure that the correct PSU is installed in the corresponding unit. The
GE114H/GE114SH use 24 Watts AC/DC PSUs, whereas the
PS
When connecting power to a PSU, make sure that the office supply is
PS
correct according to the rating label of the GE11x. The rating label
can be found on the back of the GE11x.
Note
Use the following precautions when connecting power cables and applying
power to the GE11x.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
should be taken when addressing this concern.
(6) For AC variants, the power inlet connector is the disconnect
device. For DC variants, a readily accessible disconnect device
should be incorporated in the building / RT installation wiring.
Connect AC Power
The GE11x AC PSU operates with an AC source, with a voltage range of 120 /
240 VAC nominal, 50-60Hz nominal. The system operates with an AC source
with the voltage range specified in ANSI specification C84.1-1989, Voltage Rat-
ings (60 Hz) for Electric Power Systems Equipment, Range B. The equipment
shall tolerate any frequency within the range of 60 (+/-3) Hz. UK/EU Power
requirements: EN50160 defines voltage characteristics in public distribution
systems. Public low voltage is: 230 VAC +/-10% i.e., 207-253 VAC, 50Hz
-6%/+4% (47- 52 Hz).
Use the following procedure to connect AC power to each of the AC power
PSUs, as required.
Procedure
Step 1 Use an AC tester to verify the integrity of the AC outlet. Rectify any
grounding, isolation, etc., issues identified.
Step 2 Route the AC power cable(s) from the GE11x to the designated
power outlet, externally fused at 4 Amps for GE112/GE114/GE114S,
5 Amps for GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH.
PS
• AC variant PSU of GE114H/GE114SH : Use a left-angled con-
nector or a straight one.
Note
• AC variant of PSU GE114PH: Use a straight connector.
Step 4 Do Not Insert the power plug(s) into the power receptacle(s) at this
time. They will be inserted later during the procedure.
Step 5 For GE112/GE114/GE114S: skip this step. For
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH: Determine the next step.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Position Connector Release Tab
- Gnd + at top of power connector
3 2 1
- Gnd +
- Gnd +
3 2 1
Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the office DC power supply is set up to deliver the correct
operating voltage to the GE11x (-48 or -60 VDC nominal). Verify that
the correct fuse or breaker (4 Amp rating for GE112/GE114/GE114S
or 5 Amp rating for GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH) is installed at the
power supply source and that power is turned off. For
GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH: Repeat Step 1 for a second -48 VDC
power supply source, if applicable.
Step 2 Using a volt meter, measure the voltages at the source power supply
terminals. Verify that no voltage is present.
Step 3 Run the DC power cable(s) from the GE11x to the designated office
battery terminals. Dress cables as required.
When performing the following step, ensure that the proper polarity of
the DC power is observed as miswiring could result in damage to the
GE11x.
The GE11x detects polarity reversal and does not power up when the
WARNING
polarity is reversed.
Step 4 Remove the cover from the source power terminal strip. Connect the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the voltage between + and - terminals measures between -36 and -72
VDC.
Step 8 Using a volt meter, measure the voltage between + and GND termi-
nals. Verify that 2 VDC or less is present. Replace the cover to the
source power terminal strip.
Step 9 Dress cables as required.
Step 10 Insert the -48 VDC power connector(s) (For GE114H/GE114SH: Also
insert AC Power cable into AC receptacle, if present).The Status LED
on the PSU(s) should be illuminated Green. Observe the system STA
LED after applying power: See Start-Up LED Sequence on p. 175.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Verify that the source +24 VDC power supply is set up to deliver the
correct operating voltage to the GE11x (+24 VDC nominal). Verify
that the correct fuse or breaker (20 A rating) is installed at the power
supply source and that power is turned off.
Step 2 Using a volt meter, measure the voltages at the source power supply
terminals. Verify that no voltage is present.
Step 3 Run the DC power cable(s) from the GE11x to the designated battery
terminals. Dress cable(s) as required.
When performing the following step, ensure that the proper polarity of
the DC power is observed as miswiring could result in damage to the
GE11x.
The GE11x detects polarity reversal and does not power up when the
WARNING
polarity is reversed.
Step 4 Remove the cover from the source power terminal strip. Connect the
following wires to the source DC power supply terminals. Verify that
all power terminal connections are tight and that no strands of wire
are shorting terminals together.
• North American application
• Black Battery Return wire to the – terminal
• Green/yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal
• Red +24V wire to the + terminal
• European application
• Blue Battery Return wire to the – terminal
• Green/yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal
• Grey +24V wire to the + terminal
Step 5 Route the wire harness to the GE11x. Connect the following wires to
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the DC power supply terminals at the GE11x (see Figure 88). Verify
that all power terminal connections are tight and that no strands of
wire are shorting terminals together.
• North American application
• Green/yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal
• Black Battery Return wire to the – terminal
• Red +24V wire to the + terminal
• European application
• Green/yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal
• Blue Battery Return wire to the – terminal
• Grey +24V wire to the + terminal
Step 6 Reconnect the power source (reinstall fuses, reset breakers or turn on
power supply).
Step 7 Use a volt meter to verify the power and ground at the GE11x power
terminals. Connect the positive voltmeter lead to the + terminal and
the negative voltmeter lead to the - terminal. Ensure that the voltage
between + and - terminals measures between +18 and +30 VDC.
Step 8 Using a volt meter, measure the voltage between + and GND termi-
nals. Verify that 2 VDC or less is present. Replace the cover to the
source power terminal strip.
Step 9 Dress cables as required.
Step 10 Insert the +24 VDC power connector(s). The Status LED on the
PSU(s) should be illuminated Green. Observe the system STA LED
after applying power: See Start-Up LED Sequence on p. 175.
End of Procedure
Y
COLD
Hardware Ctrl
N Slot 200 ms
All Off/Red
Flashing Y Valid
Flashing Yellow
Flashing
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Load Y Valid Load
Green
BKDI BKDI U-Boot
Status
LED
STOP
Y
2 Sec Min
Red
MTPS
N
HW Test Status STOP
Pass? LED
N
Y “reset”
Cmd
User
Break
Detected
Force
Software WARM
N /HRESET
Upgrade
Upgrade
Lifetime
N N
All LEDs Force Cold WARM
Provisioned? Reset?
Off
Y Y
COLD
Green
Status
LED
LED Start-Up
Use the following procedure shows the sequence of LEDs during start-up.
Please note that the following steps can complete so quickly that you may not
see a particular LED transition.
Procedure
Step 1 Power up the GE11x by applying power to the GE11x while observing
the following start-up sequence:
• Insert the power plug into the AC power receptacle(s)
• Insert the power connectors at the GE11x -48 VDC / +24 VDC
PSU(s)
Step 2 Red - Between power up of the power controller on the card and the
other power supplies being enabled and before they are all within
acceptable tolerance of nominal, the Status LED is red; all other LEDs
are off during initialization.
Step 3 Yellow - The Status LED transitions from red to yellow after the volt-
age rails have come up and while the card is configuring hardware or
performing hardware tests (i.e., configuration of FPGA, CPLD, and
CPU).
Step 4 Once the hardware devices have been configured the Status LED will
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
tion if necessary (see Optical Attenuation on p. 178).
End of Procedure
Optical Attenuation
When making optical power measurements the following guidelines generally
apply:
For Access Interface connections:
• the power measured at the Rx input should be within the range of the
Access ports Rx level
• the power measured at the input to the customer equipment should be
within the range of the customer equipment’s Rx level.
For Network Interface connections:
• the Rx input should be within the range of the Network ports Rx level
In some cases it is necessary to attenuate the optical signal power to meet the
specification of the GE11x or the specifications of customer equipment.
Variable or fixed attenuators in the range of -3dB to -11dB can be placed, as
appropriate, at the:
• Rx and Tx Access Interface connectors
• Rx and Tx Network Interface connectors
Install an optical attenuator by plugging the appropriate fiber-optic cable into the
attenuator and installing the cable/attenuator combination at the appropriate
connector socket.
connection.
Note
To ensure that all fiber connectors are clean, thoroughly clean the connectors
using a lint free, non abrasive wipe or pad.
Keep all ports and connectors free from dust. When not in
NOTICE use, fit both connector plugs and sockets with protective
caps.
When cabling SFP Interface optics, note that Rx ports are on the right
PS
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the protective caps from both connector plugs and sockets.
Step 2 Connect the fiber cables depending upon the deployment scenario:
For direct connection to another FSP 150CC:
• the near end Tx port is connected to the far end Rx port
• the near end Rx port is connected to the far end Tx port.
For connection via a core active network:
• the Tx port is connected to the Rx port of the Switch or Router
• the Rx port is connected to the Tx port of the Switch or Router
End of Procedure
To Power Off
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
For maintenance or transport purposes, it may be necessary to power down the
GE11x. In which case, use the following procedure to do so.
ALWAYS remove power from the PSU to ensure that the GE11x is
electrically inert.
WARNING
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the -48 VDC and/or +24 VDC power supply to the PSU con-
nector(s).
Step 2 Remove the power cables from the AC outlet (for PSU 1 and/or PSU
2).
3 2 1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
- Gnd +
- Gnd +
3 2 1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
+
1 3 TX+
2 6 TX-
3 1 RX+
4 7 —
5 8 —
6 2 RX-
7 4 —
8 5 —
1 3 BI D1+
2 6 BI D1-
3 1 BI D2+
4 7 BI D3+
5 8 BI D3-
6 2 BI D2-
7 4 BI D4+
8 5 BI D4-
BI D = Bi-directional Data
— Not used 1 —
DSR Data Set Ready 2 6
DTR Data Terminal Ready 3 4
SG Signal Ground 4 5
RXD Receive Data 5 2
TXD Transmit Data 6 3
CTS Clear To Send 7 8
RTS Request To Send 8 7
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Environmental Alarm Connector Pin Description and
Assignments - GE114H/GE114PH
The Environmental Alarm input connector (labeled ALARM) is a front mounted
RJ-45 connector. Up to 4 monitored devices can be connected to the 4 dry con-
tact alarm inputs. The dry contact alarm inputs are programmable to specify the
monitored condition, and whether the alarm shall be raised on contact close or
open. Refer to the following table for the Environmental Alarm connector pin
assignments.
Table 14: RJ-45, Environmental Alarm Input Connector
B8 GND Ground
B1 — —
B2 — —
B3 GND Ground
B4 TRING Transmit Ring
B5 TTIP Transmit Tip
B6 GND Ground
B7 GND Ground
B8 GND Ground
T1 — —
T2 — —
T3 PPS_IN -/PPS_OUT - Receive/Transmit 1PPS negative
T4 GND Ground
T5 GND Ground
T6 PPS_IN +/PPS_OUT + Receive/Transmit 1PPS positive
T7 TOD_RX -/TOD_TX - Receive/Transmit TOD time
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
message negative
T8 TOD_RX +/TOD_TX + Receive/Transmit TOD time
message positive
1078904649-01). Ensure that the local air filter change schedule is entered
appropriately for the site.
Use the following procedure to change the air filter pad on the FSP
150CC-GE114 PH 180 Watts PSU.
Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the Thumbscrew on left hand-side, until the front panel of
PSU is removed from the PSU. The air filter becomes accessible.
Step 2 Remove the air filter and replace it with a new one.
Step 3 Restore the front panel of PSU back to the PSU.
Step 4 Fasten the Thumbscrew on left hand-side until the front panel is firmly
fixed.
Step 5 Dispose of the dirty air filter as designated by local practices.
End of Procedure
Introduction
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The eVision web browser management tool provides a Graphical User Interface
(GUI) for Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) functions. The eVi-
sion provides comprehensive support for fault, configuration, performance and
security functions from a web browser (see Minimum System Requirements on
p. 193) on a computer connected to Data Communication Network (DCN) port
(see Figure 93).
This chapter describes eVision and the features it provides to manage the FSP
150CC equipment. The chapter provides the following information:
• logging on and off
• getting familiar with eVision
• eVision Applications descriptions
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
To access eVision, the FSP 150CC must first be configured with an Internet
Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask. Details on how to do this are provided
in Provision Communications on p. 400.
eVision provides the user with the following major applications:
Alarms Pane
The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms. Alarms
are color-coded based on severity. The Alarms Pane is always displayed no
matter what application is currently selected, thereby providing continuous
alarm monitoring.
Configuration
This provides the user with the ability to:
• view the current status of the FSP 150CC system
• view the current configuration of the FSP 150CC system
• provision the FSP 150CC for operation.
See Configuration View on p. 206 for further details.
Maintenance
This provides the user with a single view from which to perform all testing and
maintenance related operations, such as:
Performance Monitoring
This provides the user with the ability to:
• Configure PM interval
• Obtain Performance Monitoring (PM) reports and chart them
• View and configure Performance Parameter threshold values
See Performance Monitoring View on p. 217 for further details.
packet loss, out-of-sequence and late arrival packets, and inter-packet delay
variation. In addition to performing an ESA measurement on demand, ESAs
may be scheduled for periodic monitoring. For more information, see ESA Provi-
sioning and Operation on p. 484.
Software Upgrade
Software may be easily updated to the current release level using the Browser
Management Tool provided by the GUI interface. For more information, see
Upgrade Software Version on p. 220.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Operations available for managing configuration data are: determining database
configuration status, restore system defaults, backup database and restore
database, modify the system default database, reset to system defaults, reset to
factory defaults and change the default value file. For more information, see
Database and Configuration Files on p. 356, Restore Database on p. 368 or
Restore System Defaults on p. 372.
Testing on p. 522.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that a DCN connection to the FSP 150CC has been estab-
lished, or the PC is connected to the DCN port, as required.
Step 2 Open up the appropriate Internet Browser and enter the following
address:
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the DCN that the FSP
150CC is connected to. This will be the IP address that has been
assigned to the DCN port (eth0) during initial IP configuration, or if
none has been set, the default address of 192.168.0.2.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
eVision opens and the Login Screen is displayed, as shown below:
Step 3 Enter a valid User ID and Password (default is root and ChgMeNOW,
respectively). See Provision Secure Access on p. 242 for additional
login information.
Step 4 Select Login.
The security banner displays, as shown below.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Resize the screen for viewing, as desired.
End of Procedure
Logging Off
To log out of the FSP 150CC eVision web browser management tool:
Procedure
End of Procedure
When this occurs, simply select here from the Authentication Failed screen to
go to the FSP 150CC login screen, and continue with the logon sequence (see
Step 3 of Logging On on p. 194).
The Details Pane provides a different set of viewing and editing options depend-
ing on the application and entity selected. The Alarms pane provides continuous
alarm monitoring regardless of the application currently selected.
The Configuration Application displays when you first open eVision. The FSP
150CC system view (located in the Details Pane) provides a physical represen-
tation of the FSP 150CC, its current provisioning configuration and alarm status.
System
Name
Selection
Tree Pane
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
View Tabs
Details
Pane
Alarm details are displayed in the Alarms Pane. Refer to Figure 98 for an exam-
ple of a system entity selected in Configuration view and each component of the
web browser window.
Title Bar
The Title Bar displays the current application that has been selected from the
Menu Bar, Application menu or the Tool Bar.
Menu Bar
Each item on the Menu Bar provides a pull-down menu which contain the menu
options available in eVision. Menu options are selected by pointing and clicking
with the mouse in the File or Application drop down menu and then clicking the
mouse on the desired option.
The menus available on the Menu Bar are:
• File, which provides the following options:
o
Logout
• Application, which provides the following options:
o Configuration
o Maintenance
o Performance Monitoring
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
o ESA
o CFM
o PTP (GE114S/GE114SH only)
o SAT
Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains a set of tool buttons that can be selected for quick access
to eVision applications. The tool buttons available are:
Configuration, which accesses the Configuration
application. It allows you to perform provisioning functions,
such as editing system, equipment, facilities or users.
Various views are provided when Configuration is
selected, depending on what entity is selected in the
Selection Tree. When entering a right click on a folder or
entity from the Selection Tree, provisioning options
become available in menu form. Options available to the
user are dependent upon the user access permission
level.
Maintenance, which accesses the Maintenance
application. It allows you to perform maintenance
functions, such as loopbacks, diagnostics, software
upgrade, database backup and restore. When entering a
right click on a folder or entity from the Selection Tree,
maintenance options become available in menu form.
Various views are provided, depending upon what folder
or entity is selected in the Selection Tree. Options
available to the user are dependent upon the user access
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
permission level.
Performance Monitoring, which accesses the
Performance Monitoring application. It allows you to
retrieve performance monitoring counts in columnar or
chart format. Performance monitoring thresholds can be
edited or displayed, and registers can be initialized
(depending on the user access permission level).
Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) feature is a real-time
monitoring tool to allow Ethernet services to be
subjectively measured for the basis of service level
agreements.
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) provides the ability
to detect, verify, isolate and report connectivity faults on a
service instance.
The applications available on the Tool Bar, may also be selected from
PS
the Application pull-down menu on the Menu Bar. See Menu Bar on
p. 199.
Note
Selection Tree
The Selection Tree (located at the left of the screen) enables the user to select
an entity in order to:
• display a status pane related to that entity (shown in the Details Pane to the
right)
• select menu options related to that entity
The Selection Tree provides a hierarchical tree of the entities that make up an
FSP 150CC system and the entities related to that system. Each Selection Tree
entity is representative of a specific entity type (NE, PSU, Network Port, Access
Port, protection group, communications, SNMP, administration, etc.).
Entities are arranged in hierarchical order, e.g., to gain access to an Access
Port, the System, NE-1 and FSP 150CC menus must first be opened. Selection
Tree nested items are opened or closed by clicking on the + or - symbol next to
the entity, respectively. Once an entity is opened, the entity item is expanded,
displaying nested items.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
A “pointing hand” cursor (displayed when hovering the cursor over an entity
within the selection tree) indicates there are menu selectable items available for
that entity, and if a right mouse click is entered on that entity, applicable menu
selectable items appear. See Figure 99 for an example of a Selection Tree with
menu selected. Menu selectable items are bold and non-selectable items are
grey. If an I-beam cursor is displayed, it indicates there are no menu selectable
items for that entity within the currently selected application.
When an entity is selected within the Selection Tree, the corresponding entity
status is displayed in the Details Pane. The status displayed in the Details Pane
is dependent upon which application is currently selected. For example, if Con-
figuration application is selected, and a Access Port facility is selected in the
Selection Tree, facility status information such as assigned state, operational
state and EVC mode status will be displayed. If the same Access Port facility is
selected in the Selection Tree while in Maintenance view, the Details Pane will
display Etherjack® diagnostics results and alarm attributes.
Details Pane
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
When an item is selected from the Selection Tree with the left mouse button
(see Selection Tree on p. 201), a status view related to that item is displayed in
the Details Pane (to the right of the Selection Tree). The details displayed are
dependent upon the Application currently selected.
If details are provided by more than one status pane, tabs are provided to toggle
between each pane. See Figure 100 for an example of tab selections in the
Details Pane.
Figure 100: Tab Selections and Scroll Bars in the Details Pane
Tab
Scroll
Bars
Window
Resizing
Bars
If data is too large to fit in the current Details Pane size, the browser window can
be resized or maximized to view a larger area, you can use the window resizing
bars to open the viewing area, or you can use the scroll bars located in the
Details Pane to view the remaining data (see Figure 100).
Right clicking on an entity in the Selection Tree Pane opens a window of avail-
able edits for that entity selecting one of these yields an edit view in the Details
Pane. See Figure 101 for an example of an Edit Access Port pane. Note that all
valid provisioning options are displayed in white and options that are not provi-
sionable are grayed out (Media Type).
Command Buttons
Actions are selected via command buttons that are available at the bottom of the
Details Pane. The common Command Buttons available on a Details Pane are:
• OK, which accepts the information in a status pane and closes the pane.
• Cancel, which cancels any changes that have been made to the information
in the status pane and closes the pane.
• Refresh, which reads and displays the latest values of the fields in the sta-
tus pane.
• Apply, which applies any changes made to the information in the status
pane, without closing the pane.
• Next>, which opens the next page (screen) of data.
• <Back, which opens the previous page (screen) of data.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Alarms Pane
The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms.
All alarms are color coded by severity:
• red; Critical
• orange; Major
• yellow; Minor
Each alarm is listed as a separate line item, with the following details:
• Interface type
• Notification Code
• Description
• Date/Time stamp
Keyboard Navigation
It is usual for the mouse to be used to navigate the Workspace and select menu
options. However, a number of keys on the PC keyboard can be used to navigate
around the Menu Bar, the Selection Tree Pane and the Details Pane as outlined
in the table below.
Key Function
In the eVision Workspace:
Tab Move through Workspace areas. This key enables the
user to move through the Menu Bar, the Tool Bar, the
Selection Tree Pane and the Details Pane.
In the Menu Bar:
Return Select. This key enables the user to display a pull down
menu and select a menu option.
Right arrow Move. These keys enable the user to move through the
Left arrow options on the Menu Bar to highlight the one required.
Up arrow Move. These keys enable the user to move up and
Down arrow down (scroll) through menu options on a pull down
menu to highlight the one required.
In the Selection Tree Pane:
Return Select. This key enables the user to select a highlighted
item or menu option and open the appropriate pane in
the Details Pane.
Up arrow Move. These keys enable the user to move up and
Down arrow down (scroll) through items and menu options to
Tab highlight the one required.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Right arrow Open. This key enables the user to view nested items. If
nested items are available it is indicated by a plus sign
(+) to the left of that item.
Left arrow Close. This key enables the user to close a nest of
items. A minus sign (-) to the left of an item indicates
that the item’s nested items are open.
In the Details Pane:
Return Select. This key enables the user to select a highlighted
field for information input or a highlighted command
button.
Right arrow Move through status pane tabs. This key enables the
Left arrow user to navigate through tabs at the top of the Details
Pane.
Tab Move through editable fields. This key enables the user
to move down through the editable fields and the
command buttons on a status pane.
Up arrow Move through the options of a drop down list. This key
Down Arrow enables the user to move up or down through the items
of a drop down list.
eVision Applications
The eVision web browser management tool provides the user with the following
major applications:
• Configuration
• Maintenance
• Performance Monitoring
• Etherjack Service Assurance
• Connectivity Fault Management
• Precision Time Protocol (GE114S/GE114SH)
• Service Activation Testing
Each of the Applications can be selected from the Menu Bar (see Menu Bar on
p. 199) or the Tool Bar (see Tool Bar on p. 200). The Title Bar displays the latest
application that has been selected (see Title Bar on p. 199).
Configuration View
Configuration view allows you to perform provisioning functions, and view provi-
sioning attributes of the entity that is selected in the Selection Tree or the entity
Details Pane. Left clicking an item in the Selection Tree displays current status
and configuration in the Details Pane. Right clicking an item in the Selection
Tree displays a selection window for editing configuration items for the selected
entity. Selecting an editing option brings up an edit view in the Details Pane.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane located at the bottom of the
screen, providing constant visibility and access to current alarms. Options avail-
able are dependent upon the user access permission level and the current entity
status.
For procedures regarding provisioning of specific entities, refer to Chapter 4,
Operations Provisioning on p. 219.
The following configuration changes can be applied and current status can be
viewed within Configuration View:
System
System level settings can be viewed by selecting the System entity in the selec-
tion tree. Additional system level settings may be viewed by selecting one of the
following tabs: Identification, Security Log, Alarm Log, Audit Log, Syslog, ACL
(Access Control List), Banner or NTP (Network Time Protocol). You can edit
system options by entering a right click on the System entity and selecting the
desired menu option. System Defaults may also be restored at this menu level.
See Figure 103 for an example of an Edit Network Port Configuration view.
PT Flows
By expanding the Protection Groups entity and selecting the Flow entity, the
configuration of a specific PT flow can be viewed on the Details Pane by dou-
ble-clicking on the row where it locates in the PT flow entity list. Entering a right
click allows editing, deleting and viewing configuration as well.
Protection Groups
By expanding the Protection Groups entity, the NE-1 entity and selecting the
NTE11x entity, the protection group configuration can be viewed, and entering a
right click allows adding, editing and deleting of a protection group.
Alternatively, by selecting the ERP entity under the NE-1 entity, the ERP
instance configuration can be viewed, and entering a right click allows editing,
deleting of an instance or clearing the statistics of an instance.
LAG
By expanding the LAG entity, entering a right click on the NE-1 entity allows
LAG creation. By expanding the LAG and NE-1 entities, and selecting the LAG
entity identifier, port configuration and aggregation port statistics can be viewed.
Entering a right click on the LAG entity allows editing LAG, LAG port, PCP, Pri-
ority Mapping configurations, clearing statistics or LAG deletion selections.
By expanding the LAG, NE-1, LAG entity identifier and Members entities, and
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
selecting a LAG Member entity, the Member configuration, statistics and LACP
debug information can be viewed - and entering a right click allows editing of
LAG member port configuration or clearing LACP statistics.
SHG
By expanding the SHG entity and selecting the NE-1 entity, the configuration of
a specific SHG entity can be viewed, and entering a right click allows editing,
deleting, viewing configuration, flushing FDB and viewing FDB entities.
Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH)
By expanding the Synchronization entity, NE-1 entity, NTE114S entity and
selecting the SYNC-1-1-1-1/TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 entity, the configuration and
status of the system sync entity can be viewed. Entering a right click allows edit-
ing, adding/editing/deleting sync reference. Expanding BITS-1 entity and select-
ing BITS-IN/BITS-OUT allows viewing configuration; Entering a right click on
either entity allows editing configuration. Likewise, selecting CLK, PPS,TOD
and GPS entities allows viewing configuration and entering a right click on each
entity allows editing configuration.
Communications
Static Routes, Static ARP Entries, IPv6 Static Routes, IPv6 Static Neighbor
Entries, IPv6 Static ProxyND Entries and Source Address Configuration are
viewed by selecting the Communications entity and selecting the associated
tab. Static Routes, Static ARP, IPv6 Static Routes, IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries
and IPv6 Static ProxyND Entries may be added or deleted, and Source Address
Configuration may be edited by entering a right click on the Communications
entity.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Communities, Target
Addresses, Target Parameters, USM User entries and SNMP Dying Gasp are
viewed by selecting the SNMP entity and selecting the associated tab in the
Details Pane. These entities are provisioned by entering a right click on SNMP
in the selection tree and selecting the applicable menu option.
Administration
Users, Remote Authentication, Security Policy and Key Generation are viewed
by expanding the Administration entity and selecting the entity in the selection
tree. These entities are provisioned by expanding the Administration entity,
entering a right click on the desired entity in the selection tree and selecting the
applicable menu option.
Maintenance View
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
System
Selecting the System entity allows viewing of System Identification, Conditions
List and ECPA Streams. Entering a right click provides menu options for editing
ECPA Streams.
Protection Groups
By expanding the Protection Groups entity, the NE-1 entity and selecting the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
NTE11x entity, the protection group configuration and current status is dis-
played. If a protection group is configured, entering a right click on the entity
allows protection switch operation and release functions. The operations avail-
able are:
• Manual From Working
• Forced From Working
• Manual From Protect
• Forced From Protect
• Lockout From Protect
By selecting the ERP entities, the configuration is displayed. Entering a right
click on an ERP entity allows protection switch operation and release functions.
The operations available are:
• Forced
• Manual
• Ring Port 0
• Ring Port 1
LAG
By expanding the LAG entity and selecting the desired LAG entity identifier, the
operations status is displayed. If a LAG is configured, entering a right click on
the entity allows loopback operation and release functions.
Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH)
By expanding the Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S/NTE114SH entities and
selecting SYNC/TIME CLOCK entity, the configuration and status are displayed
in separate tabs for the corresponding entity; Entering a right click on either
entity allows Reference Switch operations functions. The operations available
are:
• Forced Switch
• Manual Switch
• Lock Out
• Clear Wait To Restore
• Clear Lock Out
• Clear Switch
Communications
Selecting the Communications entity allows viewing of the Routing Table, ARP
Table, IPv6 Routing Table, IPv6 NDP Table, the results of the last ping com-
mand, and the results of the last trace route command. Ping, Trace Route, Flush
ARP Cache and Flush NDP Cache options are available when a right click is
entered on the Communications entity.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Alarm Attributes
By expanding the Alarm Attributes and selecting a listed entity the current alarm
attribute settings for that entity are displayed. Entering a right click on the entity
allows editing the alarm severity of each listed condition. The NE entities avail-
able are:
• 10MHz (CLK) Port
• 3G USB Modem
• Access Port
• BITS In Port
• BITS Out Port
• CFM MEP
• CFM QOS Shaper
• DCN Port
• ERP Group
• GPS Port
• LAG
• NTE11x Card
• NTE11x Shelf
• Network Port
• Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port
• PSE Group
• PSE Port
• Power Supply
• SOOC
• Synchronization
• System
• Telecom Slave
• Time Of Day (TOD) Port
Administration
Expanding the Administration entity reveals the Software, Database and Config-
uration Files entities. The following maintenance functions are available:
• Administration - Right clicking on the Administration entity allows selection
of Restore System Defaults or Restore Factory Defaults. See Restore Sys-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
tem Defaults on p. 372 and Restore Factory Defaults on p. 374 for explana-
tions of these operations and the difference between them.
• Upgrade - Selecting the Upgrade entity displays the current Active and
Standby software versions along with the File Services mode and status
and the Validation Timer status. Entering a right click on the Upgrade entity
allows selection of Transfer, Install, Activate and Validate options.
• Database - Selecting the Database entity displays the current Active and
Standby database versions along with the File Services mode and status.
Entering a right click on the Database entity allows selection of database
backup and restore functions: Backup Database, Copy to Remote, Copy
from Remote, Restore Database and Activate Database.
• Default Database - Entering a right click on the Default Database entity
allows selection of the Save (create a new default database), Copy to
Remote, Copy from Remote, and New (revert the default database back to
factory defaults).
• Default Settings - Selecting the Default Settings entity allows the copying of
a remote default value file to the FSP 150CC via Web, FTP, SCP or SFTP.
• Configuration Files - Selecting the Configuration Files entity displays the
current list and status of the configuration files resident on the unit. Entering
a right click on the Configuration File entity allows the user to Create a new
configuration file, or Copy from Remote. Entering a right click on a configu-
ration file in the table in the details pane yields a list of configuration file
options including: Save, Edit Description, Copy to Remote, Restart with File
and Remove.
• Last Reset Cause - Selecting the Last Reset Cause entity displays the Last
Reset Type and Last Reset Cause information along with identifiers for up
to three debug files if any exist. Entering a right click on the Last Reset
Cause entity allows the user to Copy to Remote the debug file(s).
• Transfer Log - Entering a right click on the Transfer Log entity allows the
user to select the desired log (Alarm, Audit or Security) to transfer.
• Diagnostic Files - Selecting the Diagnostic Files entity displays the status
and Mode of diagnostic files
A Conditions List is also present for the NE-1 entity (see Figure 105).
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Editing Alarm Attributes
An Edit Alarm Attributes pane is accessed in Maintenance view by entering a
right click on an entity under Alarms Attributes and selecting Edit Alarm Attri-
butes (see Figure 106). Notification Codes can be edited for a given Condition
Type by selecting the desired Notification Code in the drop down menu, select-
ing the desired Notification Code, then selecting Apply or OK.
Notification Codes available for selection are:
• Critical (CR)
• Major (MJ)
• Minor (MN)
• Not Alarmed (NA)
• Not Reported (NR)
Loopbacks
Entering a right click on a Network Port or Access Port under the NTE11x entity,
or LAG entity under the LAG/NE-1 entity and selecting Loopbacks provides a
Loopback view. From this view, the Network Port, Access Port or LAG entity can
be placed in the Maintenance state, and a loopback can be performed.
See Figure 107 for an example of a loopback view. For loopback procedures,
see Chapter 6, Etherjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring on
p. 459.
When using eVision, to remove a loopback, click on the drop-down list for Loop-
back Configuration and select “None”, then click on “OK”.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Etherjack® Diagnostics
Etherjack® Diagnostics enable the user to perform tests on the Ethernet facility
and the attached cable for a copper (non-SFP) port, in order to detect and iso-
late faults on:
• the Ethernet port
• the connecting cable
• the far-end equipment
This feature is accessed by right clicking on a copper Access Port under the
NTE11x entity and selecting “Diagnostic Test”.
See Figure 108 for an example of an Etherjack® Diagnostic Test Result view.
For Etherjack® diagnostic procedures, see Chapter 6,Etherjack Test Proce-
dures and Performance Monitoring on p. 459.
Operations Provisioning
Introduction
This chapter contains system provisioning details for the FSP 150CC-GE11x
and provides a recommended work flow for new installations. The procedures
can also be used for incorporating provisioning changes to existing systems.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Clear all alarms (see Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing on p. 535)
• Database and Configuration Files on p. 356
• Test the FSP 150CC on p. 397:
o
Loopbacks
o
Etherjack® Diagnostics
o
Cable Length Benchmarks
o
Etherjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring
o
ESA Provisioning and Operation
o
CFM Provisioning and Operation
o
Service Activation Testing
Activation causes the NE to reset, which temporarily interrupts traffic and can-
cels all active user sessions.
If the user wants to see the status conditions dynamically while using
the Upgrade or Database detail views, edit the Notification Codes for
PS
SWDL and Data Base Condition Types to Not Alarmed. This causes
the conditions to display in the Alarm Pane at the bottom of the GUI
Note window. See Table 20.
Also, eVision does not show the settings for Scheduled Activation or
Validation Timer once these settings are made. However, the data is
included in the Audit Log, which is viewable from the System Details
Pane in the Configuration View. Below is a sample of these
messages - this example indicates the activation is scheduled for
January 17, 2012 at 12:10, with the validation timer set for 1 hour.
The following procedure includes steps for performing the software upgrade
process using the eVision tool. It is also possible to perform this process using
CLI. See the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference Guide for
details. The following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the
NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the
FSP 150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port, on Page 5-402.)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 5 Enter the path to the proper image file (.img file extension) or use the
“browse” button to search for the file location and select it, then select
“OK”.
The file transfer will begin, and a screen similar to Figure 111 dis-
plays.
Step 6 Go to Step 9.
Step 7 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the
FTP and SFTP file transfer view is identical.)
Step 8 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP or SCP
server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
and file name of the software file to transfer.
Note
The file transfer will begin, and a screen similar to the following dis-
plays:
Step 9 When the “Status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, right click
on “Upgrade” in the selection tree pane and select “Install”. The fol-
lowing screen displays:
Step 10 Click OK, and the screen shows a progress bar similar to Figure 111.
When the install completes (when the “Status” changes from “In prog-
ress” to “Success”), right click on “Upgrade” in the selection tree
pane, then select “Activate”. An Activate Upgrade screen displays, as
shown in the following figure:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PS
load if the timer should expire. The validation timer should be set for a
long enough period to allow reconnection to the NE and verification
Note
that it is functioning properly. Once this “sanity test” is done, the user
accepts or cancels the upgrade (see Step 15).
Failure to use the validation timer option can result in loss of contact
with the NE and interruption of customer traffic should the software or
database become corrupted during the upgrade process. The
validation timer option permits the NE to “roll back” to the previous
CAUTION
software and database without user intervention.
After selecting and setting the desired activation and validation set-
tings, select OK.
Step 12 When activation occurs (now or when scheduled) the NE resets, and
the eVision session is interrupted. After a few seconds the STA LED
will begin to flash.
Wait for 2 or 3 minutes (or when the STA LED has finished flashing
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
and becomes solid green), then reconnect to the NE. Once logged
back in, verify that the NE is behaving normally.
If unable to login, the validation timer will eventually time out and the
NE will revert to the previous load, and after that NE reset,
PS
Step 15 To accept the upgrade, ensure the radio button next to “Accept
Upgrade” is selected.
To cancel the upgrade, ensure the radio button next to “Cancel
Upgrade” is selected.
Click on OK.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Step 16 Click on “Upgrade” in the selection tree pane, then select “Activate”.
An Activate Upgrade screen displays, as shown in the following fig-
ure.
Step 17 Select the “Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation” radio button and
Click OK.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Sys-
tem and the following screen displays:
Step 2 The user can change the system level CLI prompt prefix, set Provi- FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
sioning Mode, Management Traffic Bridging, Management Traffic
Bridging Security, Proxy ARP, Proxy NDP, IPv6 Forwarding, Date,
Time, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL Cipher Strength, SCP, Serial Port,
Serial Port Auto Log Off, SFTP, SSH, Telnet, Authentication Traps,
CLI Security Prompt and SNMP Engine ID. For information on these
system options see System Configuration on p. 619.
The System identity information that is not available for editing on this
screen (Name, Description, Location, Contact), is the same identity
PS
information that displays in the NE-1 view and is editable on the NE-1
Note “Edit Configuration” display.
Step 3 Check that the information entered in Step 2 is what is desired and
click on OK. The display will change to reflect the entered data.
End of Procedure
Configure Logs
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision.
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Security Log and the following screen displays:
Step 4 For Syslog, select “Enabled” to include Alarm Log messages in the
Syslog or “Disabled” to not include Alarm Log messages in the Sys-
log; for Local Logging, select “Enabled” or “Disabled” to Enable or
Disable sending Alarm messages to the local log (Alarm Log tab) and
click on OK.
Step 5 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Audit Log and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 119: Edit Audit Log View
Step 6 For Syslog, select “Enabled” to include Audit Log messages in the
Syslog or “Disabled” to not include Audit Log messages in the Syslog;
for Local Logging, select “Enabled” or “Disabled” to Enable or Disable
sending Alarm messages to the local log (Alarm Log tab) and click on
OK.
Step 7 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Sys-
log and the following screen displays:
Step 8 Select the desired Log Server Method - User Defined, or DHCP.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 9 Enter Syslog Server information (IPv4/IPv6 Address and Port) for up
to 3 servers (the default port number is 514) if Log Server Method is
User Defined.
Click on OK.
End of Procedure
Configure ACL
The Access Control List (ACL) allows the user to limit access to the NE via the
DCN or management tunnels to specific IP addresses or IP address ranges
(subnetworks). Up to ten entries can be made, and each entry can be individu-
ally enabled or disabled.
Enabling ACL filtering will “permit” the corresponding management traffic. Dis-
abling the ACL filtering will “deny” the corresponding management traffic.
Enabled entries apply to all management interfaces and may be provisioned for
specific IP addresses, or an IP address range (subnetwork).
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision.
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit ACL
and the following screen displays:
Step 2 The Access Control List contains 10 entries. Each entry consists of IP
version and corresponding IP data options; an IPv4 Address and net-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
work Mask are configurable if IP Version is IPv4; an IPv6 address and
Prefix are configurable if IP Version is IPv6. Edit the Control status to
Enable/Disable each entry.
Step 3 Click on OK. The display will change to reflect the entered data.
End of Procedure
Configure LLDP
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision.
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit
LLDP and the following screen displays:
Step 2 Enter the following data to configure system LLDP options (see
Table 56 on p. 713 for options and rules details):
Transmission Interval - 5 - 3600 seconds, default as 30
Hold Time Multiplier - 2 - 10, default as 4
Re-initialization Delay - 1 - 10 seconds, default as 2
Notification Interval - 5 - 3600 seconds, default as 30
Maximum Tx Credit - 1 - 100, default as 5
Message Fast Tx - 1 - 3600 seconds, default as 1
Tx Fast Init - 1 - 8, default as 4
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Ban-
ner and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 The Banner is displayed for each CLI or GUI login. The banner can be
edited to contain a customized message of up to 1024 characters.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Sys-
tem Time of Day.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 5 Enter the appropriate time in (hh:mm:ss) and select OK.
Step 6 Select the System Time Of Day tab to view the local entry.
End of Procedure
Select the IP version and enter the corresponding IP address for Pri-
mary Server and, if applicable, the Backup Server if NTP Server
Method is User Defined
If both a Primary and Backup Server are configured, either one can
be made Active by selecting the desired Active server.
Select OK.
The display updates to show the edited information
End of Procedure
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Expand the System entity, right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree
pane and select Edit Configuration. The following screen displays:
End of Procedure
Configure NTE11x
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision.
Procedure
Step 1 If a “+” sign appears next to NE-1 in the selection tree pane, click on it
to expand the NE view, then click on the “+” sign next to NTE11x to
expand it.
Right click on “NTE11x” in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Configuration and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
If both a 180W (or 60W) and 24W PSU are installed in the same
Note system, the 24W PSU is disabled automatically.
To verify whether a particular PSU is a 24W or 180W (or 60 Watts)
unit, the part number is printed on the PSU label and is retrievable via
all user interfaces. Part numbers and descriptions are found in
Equipment Part Numbers in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical
Descriptions document.
Procedure
Step 1 If a “+” sign appears next to NE-1 in the selection tree pane, click on it
to expand the NE view. Right click on “PSU-1” in the selection tree
pane and select Edit Configuration and the Edit PSU screen displays.
See Figure 130 Edit PSU.
Step 2 The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value)
and Management. (See Entity State Descriptions on p. 599.)
An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of the PSU.
After editing the PSU information, click on OK. The display updates.
Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for PSU-2.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Secure Access involves several different aspects:
• The FSP 150CC accommodates various methods of access to the system
including serial port, telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SFTP and SCP.
These are viewable and editable from the System and Edit System view
respectively (see Configure System on p. 228).
• Access via SSH and SSL based protocols, uses certificates and keys that
are user configurable. (see Configure Security Keys on p. 243).
• The local user access security policy can be configured for low, medium or
high security levels. (see Configure Security Policy on p. 246).
• Access can be restricted by using the Access Control List (ACL) where only
designated IP addresses or subnetworks are permitted to access the sys-
tem (see Configure ACL on p. 231).
• Access to the system can be limited by use of locally defined users includ-
ing user ID, password and access level (superuser, provisioning, mainte-
nance or monitoring). See Configure Local Users on p. 247.
• Access to the system can be restricted by using remote authentication with
an externally defined and controlled user set. See Configure Remote
Authentication on p. 251.
PS
Changing the security keys may interrupt any current secure sessions
that have used the existing keys for authentication.
Note
Procedure
Step 1 Left click on “Key Generation” in the selection tree pane and the fol-
lowing screen displays to show the current SSL Certificate and SSH
Key information:
Step 2 To regenerate the SSL Certificate or SSH Key, right click on “Key
Generation” in the selection tree pane and select Regenerate Keys
and the following screen displays (see Figure 133):
Step 3 To regenerate the SSL Certificate, select the “Regenerate SSL Certif-
icate radio button, click OK for the message pop-up and the following
screen displays (see Figure 133):
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
restarted and web access will be unavailable during this time (approx-
PS
imately 15 seconds).
Note
Step 5 To regenerate the SSH Key, select the radio button next to “Regener-
ate SSH Key”, click OK on the message pop-up and the following
screen displays:
When an SSH Key is generated, all SSH users will be logged off.
PS
Note
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “Security Policy” in the selection tree pane and select
Edit Policy, and the following screen displays to show the current Pol-
icy Strength setting and a description of the policy rules:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 To change the Policy Strength, select the desired setting from the
Strength drop-down list, then click on OK.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Expand the System, Administration, Users and Local entities in the
selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.
Step 2 Determine the next step.
privilege.
Note
Step 3 Right click on “Local” in the selection tree pane and select Add User
and the following screen displays:
Step 4 Enter the required data to establish a new user. Details on the func-
tion and rules for each data entry is located at Administration on
p. 646.
After editing the user information, click on OK. The display will update
to show the edited information.
End of Procedure
Editing user data other than the user’s own password can only be
PS
Step 5 Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane
and select Edit User and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Edit the required data for this user. Details on the function and rules
for each data entry is located at Administration on p. 646.
After editing the user information, click on OK. The display will update
to show the edited information.
End of Procedure
Editing the user password can be done by the user or a user with
PS
superuser privilege.
Note
Step 7 Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane
and select Edit Password and the following screen displays:
Step 8 Edit the password for this user. Details on the function and rules for
each data entry is located at Administration on p. 646.
After editing the password, click on OK. The display will update to
show the edited information.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
PS
Step 9 Right click on the User Name to be deleted, select Delete User, and
the following screen displays:
Step 10 Verify that the selected user is the one to be deleted. Click on OK.
The display will update to show the deleted information.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PS
Step 11 Right click on the User Name that is locked, select Remove Lock, and
the following screen displays:
Step 12 Verify that the selected user is the one from whom the lock-out is to
be removed. Click on OK. The display updates.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Expand the System and Administration entities in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each
view.
Step 2 Right click on “Remote Authentication” in the selection tree pane and
select Edit Remote Authentication and the following screen displays:
Step 3 Enter the required data for the Remote Authentication Protocol Sys-
tem Level Configuration including Authentication Protocol, Authenti-
cation Type, TACACS Privilege Control, TACACS Default Privilege,
NAS IP Address (RADIUS only), Accounting, and Access Order.
Details on the function and rules for each entry is located at Adminis-
tration on p. 646 and User Management and Security in FSP 150CC
GE11x R6.1 Installation and Operations Manual document.
Step 4 Enter the required data for each Remote Authentication Server (1, 2
and 3) including Server Status, Priority, IP Address, Server Secret,
Step 5 Verify that all data is entered properly, then click on OK.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
SNMP information is contained in the FSP 150CC-GE11x SNMP Reference
Guide.
Data on setting for SNMP settings are located at SNMP on p. 643 and SNMP
Support in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Installation and Operations Manual docu-
ment.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Mainte-
nance from the Application Menu. Expand the System, Administration
and Software Licensing entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking
on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.
Step 2 Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature.
An Edit Feature Management screen displays
Step 3 Select Enabled from the Status dropdown list associated with the
desired feature.
A License Warning window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for each additional desired feature.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that no other entities are associated with Port 2 (1+1 protec-
tion, LAG, management tunnel, flow, etc.), otherwise, delete them
first.
Step 2 Select Configuration view. Expand the System, NE-1, NTE entities in
the Selection Tree, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity.
Step 3 Enter a right click on the Port 2 (E1000-N-2 or E1000-A-2) entity and
select “Switch to ACC” (or “Switch to NET”).
Step 4 Select OK.
A confirmation window appears
Step 5 Select OK.
A system warm reboot occurs
Step 6 After approximately 2 minutes a login screen appears. Log back onto
the system.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
For GE112
The GE112 supports four Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for
copper (10/100/1000 BaseT) or optical (100BaseFX/1000BaseX). Port 1 is fixed
and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a flexible port) may be config-
ured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. Ports 3 and 4 are
dedicated Access ports. The FSP 150CC-GE112 is a version of the product that
does not include Sync-E capability.
For GE114x
The GE114/GE114S/GE114H/GE114SH/GE114PH support six Ethernet combi-
nation ports that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000 BaseT) or optical
(100BaseFX/1000BaseX). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network
port. Port 2 (a flexible port) may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protec-
tion, or as an Access port. Ports 3 through 6 are dedicated Access ports.
Procedure
Step 1 Observe the current Service Type. The status will be used in the fol-
lowing steps.
a) Select Configuration view.
b) Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE entities in the Selection Tree,
by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
c) Select the desired Access Port facility in the Selection Tree.
The Access Port facility status window is displayed and the Con-
figuration Tab is selected
d) Observe the current Service Type.
Step 2 Right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.
An Edit Configuration window appears
Step 4 If not already in the unassigned state, set the Administrative State to
Unassigned and click on Apply.
The screen will update
Set the Service Type to EPL
Click on OK.
Step 5 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configu-
ration.
An Edit Configuration window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Enter the Access Port facility changes:
Identification
a) Enter an Alias, as required
State
b) Leave the Administrative State “Unassigned”
Port
c) Select the desired Media Type (GE112 Ports 3-4, GE114x Ports
3-6). Port 2 is available if not used as a Network Protection port.
d) Enter the desired MTU size
e) Select the Configured Speed option
f) Select the Port MDIX option (copper ports)
g) Enable/Disable Auto Diagnostic
h) Enable/Disable Drop Eligibility Indicator
Service
i) Select the desired AFP option
j) Enable/Disable Q in Q EtherType Override
Step 8 Enter the EPL Flow facility changes: (see Access Port Configuration
Options and Rules on p. 666 for details and rules).
Connection
a) Edit the Circuit Name.
b) Select a Network Port Interface and an Access Interface.
c) Set Policing to Enabled or Disabled; if enabled, select the desired
Policing Control mode.
d) Select the desired COS (Class Of Service).
e) Enable/Disable Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB) Frames.
When enabled, incoming PBB frames are allowed to enter the
Access Port, they are dropped otherwise.
GE114S/GE114SH.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
h) Set the desired Frame Loss Threshold.
i) Enable/Disable Independent N2A Rate Limiting (if Enabled is
selected, N2A Settings appear below the A2N Settings).
Learning Attributes
j) Set the Interface Learning Control, Protected Learning Control
and Max Forwarding Table Entries for Network Port and Access
Port respectively.
Table Entry.
An Add Forwarding Table Entry window appears
d) Enter a right click on one FDB entry and select the desired opera-
tions from the menu: View Configuration, Edit Configuration or
Delete FDB Entry.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 10 Enter a right click on the EPL flow facility and select the desired oper-
ations from the menu: Flush FDB, or Clear Blocked State.
Step 11 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit CPD Fil-
ters.
An Edit CPD Filters window appears
c) Click on OK.
Step 13 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit
EFM-OAM.
An Edit EFM-OAM window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 14 Enable or Disable EFM-OAM as required.
If Enabled, select the desired Local Configuration Mode.
Click on OK.
Step 15 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit N2A
Shapers.
An Edit N2A Shapers window appears
Step 17 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configu-
ration.
An Edit Configuration window appears
When setting the Service State to IS (In Service) and an error mes-
sage appears, the most likely problem is that the flow settings are
incompatible with each other, the port settings, or there is a conflict
PS
Step 19 For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to
the following notes:
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on Access
Note
Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group on p. 292.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The GE11x supports SHG on Access Ports. SHG and LAG cannot
both be provisioned on the same Access Ports. Use the above steps
PS
Step 20 Repeat the above steps for EPL services on other Ethernet Ports on
the system. Also repeat these steps for creating the appropriate
flow(s) supporting a Transparent Clock or Telecom Slave, as
required.
Step 21 Configure all intermediate devices appropriately for carrying traffic
from this FSP 150CC to the far end FSP 150CC.
Step 22 Repeat above steps for each EPL service to be created at the far end
FSP 150CC.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Observe the current Service Type. The status will be used in the fol-
lowing steps.
a) Select Configuration view
b) Expand the System, NE-1, NTE and desired Access Port facility
entities in the Selection Tree.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The Access Port facility status window is displayed and the Con-
figuration Tab is selected
c) Observe the current Service Type.
Step 2 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configu-
ration.
An Edit Configuration window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 3 Determine the next step.
Current Status Then
Is the current Service Type set to Go to Step 5.
EVPL?
Is the Service Type set to EPL? Continue with the next
step.
Step 4 If not already in the unassigned state, set the Administrative State to
Unassigned and click on Apply.
The screen will update
Set the Service Type to EVPL.
Click on OK.
Step 5 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configu-
ration.
An Edit Configuration window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
r) Enable/Disable N2A Pop Port VID
Link Loss Forwarding
s) Enable/Disable Port LLF Status
t) Enter the desired Delay value
u) Select the desired TX Action
v) Enter the desired Local Link ID
w) Select the desired Trigger Events
x) Select the desired Remote Link IDs
LLDP Destination MAC Address
y) Select the desired destination MAC address types. By default, the
Nearest Bridge is selected. System will create a separate tab in
the Edit LLDP Details Pane for the port.
Click on OK.
Step 7 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit CPD Fil-
ters.
An Edit CPD Filters window appears
Step 8 Select Discard, Pass Thru or Use Group Setting for each protocol or
group as desired.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click on OK.
Step 9 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit
EFM-OAM.
An Edit EFM-OAM window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 10 Enable or Disable EFM-OAM as required.
If Enabled, select the desired Local Configuration Mode.
Click on OK.
Step 11 Determine the next step.
Current Status Then
Is Priority Map Mode set to None or are Go to Step 14.
the default priorities acceptable?
Does the priority mapping require Continue with the next
editing? step.
Step 12 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Priority
Mapping.
An Edit Priority Mapping window appears
For 802.1P and IP-TOS, there are 8 priority levels, but IP-DSCP has
PS
64 levels.
Note
Click on OK.
Step 14 Right click on the Access Port facility and select Create Flow.
A Create Flow window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 15 Enter the EVPL Flow attributes: (see Ethernet Virtual Private Line
(EVPL) Service Provisioning on p. 679 for details and rules)
Identification
a) Select the desired Flow ID from the drop-down list
Connection
b) Enter a Circuit Name
c) Select the EVC Type (Regular or Default)
d) Select desired Network Interface and Access Interface
e) Enable/Disable Policing and Set Policing Control if Policing is
enabled
f) Select the desired COS (Class Of Service)
g) Enable/Disable Multi-COS (if Enabled is selected, the display
changes - see Figure 161
h) Select the N2A COS Priority (if Multi-COS = Enabled)
i) Enable/Disable Untagged Frames
A2N Shaping and N2A Shaping are automatically set to Port Based
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
A2N Policer Settings are editable: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, CF
and QID. Information regarding each item (full name and entry
type) is available by placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit
the desired items by clicking in the box under the item name.
ag) Enter A2N Shaper settings (BS). If Port-based A2N shaping is
used, it is entered in the A2N Shaper page of the selected Net-
work Port. If Flow-based A2N shaping is used, it is entered in the
A2N Setting box of the EVC. If Multi-COS is Enabled, the
Shapers whose QIDs match to the Active Policers are editable.
A2N Shaper QID BS settings are editable if the QID for a given
PS
Policer ID is changed.
Note
N2A Settings
ah) Enter N2A Policer settings (CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, CF) if N2A
Rate Limiting is Enabled. If Multi-COS is Enabled, select the
desired Policers by clicking the appropriate “active” boxes. Only
“active” Policers are editable. (N2A Shaper(s) are edited else-
where and are covered later in this procedure)
VLAN Members
ai) Enter a desired VLAN ID (or range) and Priority, then click on
“Add”. Repeat for each additional VLAN entry.
Click on OK.
PS
not in the Unassigned state.
Note
Step 16 Expand the Access Port facility entity and select the newly created
flow to verify the entry.
Step 17 To enter additional Flows, repeat Step 14 to Step 16.
Step 18 Enter a right click on an EVPL flow facility and select Add Forwarding
Table Entry.
An Add Forwarding Table Entry window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click on OK.
c) Select the FDB tab to view the existing Forwarding Table Entries.
d) Enter a right click on one FDB entry and select the desired opera-
tions from the menu: View Configuration, Edit Configuration or
Delete FDB Entry.
Step 19 Enter a right click on the EPL flow facility and select the desired oper-
ations from the menu: Flush FDB, or Clear Blocked State.
Step 20 Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit N2A
Shapers.
An Edit N2A Shapers window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
When setting the Service State to IS (In Service) and an error mes-
sage appears, the most likely problem is that the flow settings are
incompatible with each other, the port settings, or there is a conflict
PS
with C-Tags or S-Tags assigned to other flows on other Access Ports.
Compare settings to the details and rules (see Ethernet Virtual Private
Note
Line (EVPL) Service Provisioning on p. 679), resolve these issues,
and repeat Step 18
Step 24 For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to
the following notes:
For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration on
PS
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on Access
Note
Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group on p. 292.
The GE11x supports SHG on Access Ports. SHG and LAG cannot
both be provisioned on the same Access Ports. Use the above steps
PS
Step 25 Repeat the above steps for EPL services on other Ethernet Ports on
the system. Also repeat these steps for creating the appropriate
flow(s) supporting a Transparent Clock or Telecom Slave, as
required.
Step 26 Configure all intermediate devices appropriately for carrying traffic
from this FSP 150CC to the far end FSP 150CC.
Step 27 Repeat above steps for each EPL service to be created at the far end
FSP 150CC.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 6 Select from the drop-down menu to Enable or Disable the Non-Stan-
dard Powered Devices (PD).
Step 7 Click the “+” to open the PSE.
Step 8 Right Click a Port entity in the tree and select Edit Configuration from
the pop-up menu. An Edit Configuration screen is displayed.See
Figure 168 on p. 284.
Step 9 Enter Administrative state for the Port.
Step 10 Enter Power Pair configuration for the Port.
Step 11 (Optional) Enter a description in the PSE Port Type text box. Usually,
it is used to indicate the type of Powered Device connected to this
port.
Step 12 Select an Power Level form on the Available Power Level
Drop-down Menu.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 4 An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular
interface.
The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value)
Maintenance, Management and Unassigned. See Entity State
Descriptions on p. 599 for details.
Various Port, Service and LLF data can be edited. For details on each
editable item see Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on
p. 661.
After editing the interface information, click on OK. The display will
update to show the edited information.
Step 5 Right click on the E1000-N-1 interface and select “Edit EFM OAM”
and the details pane displays:
Step 6 The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After
selecting the desired settings, click on OK.
Step 7 Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and
select Edit CPD Filters and the following screen displays:
Step 8 If LAG is (or will be) also configured on Access Ports, then Bridge
Group Protocols “LACP” and “LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard”
on the Network Port.
All other CPD Filter setting should be set as desired.
Click on OK.
Step 9 For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to
the following notes:
For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration on
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Protocol (PTP) (GE114S/GE114SH) on p. 310. For a description of
PTP functionality, see the FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 Technical
Descriptions document.
For configuration of Sync-E functionality, see Provision Synchronous
Ethernet (Sync-E) (GE114S/GE114SH) on p. 337. For a description
PS
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on
Note
Network Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group on p. 292.
The GE11x supports SHG on Network Ports. SHG and LAG cannot
both be provisioned on the same Network Ports. Use the above steps
PS
Click on OK.
The NE display will update.
The E1000-N-2 interface is placed in service (IS) - the LK and RT
LEDs indicate activity if the fiber is connected. (See Entity State
Descriptions on p. 599).l
Step 6 If a “+” sign appears next to NE-1 in the selection tree pane under
“System”, click on it to expand the NE view, then click on the “+” sign
next to NTE11x to expand it.
Step 7 Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and
select Edit Configuration and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 8 An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular
interface.
The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value)
Maintenance, Management and Unassigned. See Entity State
Descriptions on p. 599 for details.
Various Port, Service and LLF data can be edited. For details on each
editable item, see Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on
p. 661.
After editing the interface information, click on OK. The display will
update to show the edited information.
Step 9 Right click on the E1000-N-1 interface and select “Edit EFM OAM”
and the details pane displays:
Step 10 The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After
selecting the desired settings, click on OK.
Step 11 If 1+1 or Dual Active Receive protection has been configured, repeat
Step 7 through Step 10 for E1000-N-2.
Step 12 Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and
select Edit CPD Filters and the following screen displays:
End of Procedure
a
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PS
group, with each Access Port being used only once. (The GE112
Note supports one Access Port LAG Group.)
Procedure
Step 7 The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
selecting the desired settings, click on OK.
Step 8 Right click on E1000-N-1 (or an Access Port) interface in the selection
tree pane and select Edit CPD Filters and the following screen dis-
plays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
applications that require a conversion from unprotected
port to an active-standby LAG. For configurations where
LACP-Control is disabled, the LACP protocol information
may not align with the actual selection state of the
active-standby LAG. Collecting & distributing information
is derived from the LACP protocol. Active/Standby status
WARNING is derived from the port selection process.
Active-standby LAG is expected to be a bidirectional
protection mechanism and relies on the LACP protocol
for coordinating the active link determination between 2
partner systems. For configurations where LACP-Control
is disabled, the 2 partner systems could experience a
mismatch of active and standby ports causing traffic
outage.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Expand the System and SHG entities in the Selection Tree.
Step 2 Enter a right click on NE-1 and select Create SHG and the following
screen displays:
Step 3 Select the desired SHG index and enter the desired Alias.
Step 4 Select the first Port Member entry and select Add. Repeat for other
ports on the SHG. (To delete a member from the list, select the entity
in the Members list and select Delete.)
Click on OK.
Step 5 The new SHG appears in the SHG Configuration entity list of the
Details Pane.
Step 6 Enter a right click on the new SHG entity in the details pane and
select View Configuration to verify provisioning entry.
Step 7 To edit an SHG, enter a right click on a desired SHG entity in the
Details Pane and select Edit Configuration. To delete an existing
SHG, enter a right click on the desired SHG entity in the Details Pane
and select Delete.
Step 8 Repeat above steps at the far end node.
Step 9 Very end-to-end connectivity for the SHG services. To view Forward-
ing Database entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG entity in
the Details Pane and select View FDB Entries. To flush all the FDB
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG entity in the Details
Pane and select Flush FDB.
End of Procedure
Procedure
There can be only one RPL owner in a ring. A ring node config-
ured as the RPL-Owner link in a G.8032 Ring should be config-
ured with the largest Node ID of all the nodes in the ring. A
non-owner node configured as the highest priority ring node may
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
i) Click on OK.
The ERP configuration displays
Step 8 Enter the Pass-through Flow details: (see Pass-Through Flow Config-
uration Options and Rules on p. 652 for details and rules)
Identification
a) Select a desired Passthrough Flow EID from the drop-down list
b) Enter a Circuit Name
AdminState
c) Select the desired Administrative State
Connection
d) Select the desired EVC Type
e) Enable/disable Policing
pass-through flows.
Note
N2N Settings
k) Enable/disable Auto Bandwidth (if Multi COS is disabled)
l) Enter the desired Auto CIR Bandwidth Percentage (if Auto Band-
width is enabled)
m) If Multi COS is Disabled: the following N2N Policer Settings are
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
editable: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM and CF; BS is editable for N2N
Shaper Settings (if Shaping Type is Flow Based). Information
regarding each item (full name and entry type) is available by
placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit the desired item by
clicking in the box under the item name.
n) If Multi COS is Enabled: There are Policer and Shaper entries for
each COS. Select the desired COS by clicking in the Active box.
For each box selected, the following N2N Policer Settings are
editable: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, TF and QID. Information
regarding each item (full name and entry type) is available by
placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit the desired items by
clicking in the box under the item name.
o) Enter N2N Shaper settings (BS). If Multi-COS is Enabled, the
Shapers whose QIDs match to the Active Policers are editable.
VLAN Members
p) Enter a desired VLAN ID (or range) and Priority; then click on
Add. Repeat for each additional VLAN entry.
Click on OK.
Step 9 Select the Flows entity (under PT Flow) in the Selection Tree.
The newly created Pass-through flow Entity ID appears in the Details
Pane.
Step 10 Right click on the pass-through flow entity ID and select View Config-
uration.
Step 11 Verify the Pass-through flow entry. If changes are required, select the
configuration tab, enter a right click on the Pass-through Flow Entity
ID and click Edit Configuration.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 12 Repeat Step 7 through Step 11 for each additional Pass-through Flow
for this node.
Step 13 Configure Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) mainte-
nance endpoints (MEPs). Perform the procedure CFM Provisioning
and Operation on p. 502.
port to be Down MEP facing the neighbor unit. This way the CFM
Note connectivity is established by pairs of MEPs facing each other.
the ring protection link (RPL) owner blocks the RPL port and
sends R-APS NR and R-APS RPL (R-APS NR, RB) messages.
Note
These messages cause all other nodes, other than the RPL
owner in the ring, to unblock all blocked ports. The Ethernet Ring
Protection (ERP) protocol works for both unidirectional failure and
multiple link failure scenarios in a ring topology.
Step 14 Enter a right click on the ERP entity in the Selection Tree Pane and
select Edit. The following screen displays.
Step 15 Select the desired MEP for Ring Port 0 and Ring Port1. Then click on
OK.
The ERP configuration changes are displayed in the Details Pane.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 19 Observe the Node State. Refer to the following table describing the
three Node States.
The Node State should indicate Idle
Step 20 If the Node State is not the expected result, troubleshoot and rectify
the trouble accordingly. Select the Statistics Tab to view ERP Statis-
tics to observe transmission and receive statistics. See the following
figure and table:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 23 Select Protection Switch Action of Manual and select the desired
Blocking Ring Port. Then select OK.
Step 24 Verify that the protection switch action did not introduce any
unwanted results.
Step 25 Enter a right click on the ERP entity and select Release Protection
Switch.
A Release Protection Switch window is displayed
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
If Low Touch Provisioning (LTP) is not used, delete the default LTP
PS
management tunnel.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting
A single Telecom Slave may be created for the system. The Telecom Slave and
associated timing functions are created in the following order:
• Enable Software Licensing for PTP
• Create a flow on the associated port (must be in-service)
• Create a Telecom Slave
o
Create/Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)
o
Create/Edit a PTP Flow Point (PTP FP)
o
Create/Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port
• Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting
The TS, once provisioned and locked (the OCS Port State changes to Slave
state), may be:
• selected as a sync reference to the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1)
• selected as the Timing Source of Boundary Clock (These entities should be
disabled until the OC-S has achieved lock [OCS Port State=Slave].)
• selected as an output reference for the 10MHz Clock (CLK-1-1-1-1), PPS
(PPS-1-1-1-1), or Time of Day (TOD-1-1-1-1) output ports. (These outputs
should be disabled until the OC-S has achieved lock. The output should be
disabled if the OC-S state is not LOCKED or HOLD-OVER.)
• selected as the Source TOD Clock of System Time of Day (ToD)
A Master Clock and a Boundary Clock cannot co-exist. Either a single Master
Clock or a single Boundary Clock may be provisioned per system, wherein the
Master Clock feature is only available in GE114SH. The Boundary clock is cre-
ated in the following order:
• Enable Software Licensing for PTP and PTP-MC/BC
• Created a fully provisioned TS
• Create a Boundary Clock -- using TS as Timing Source
• Create/Edit a Master Clock Interface
• Create/Edit a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)
• Create/Edit a Master Virtual Port
• Create/Edit a Static Slave or Edit/Delete a Dynamic Slave
The provisioning steps described in this section are performed using the PTP
application (located in the tool bar or selected via the Application menu) once
the licenses of this feature has been turned on.
Refer to PTP Configuration Options and Rules (GE114S/GE114SH) on p. 763
to determine the default values, value ranges and rules for each option in the
following procedure.
Procedure
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on with at least a
Provisioning level user permission using eVision.
Step 3 Select Enable Status by PTP and PTP-MC/BC and select OK.
The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates they are
in Enabled state
Step 4 Determine the next step
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Desired Function Then
Create a Transparent Clock? Go to Step 5.
Delete a Transparent Clock? Go to Step 14.
Create a Telecom Slave? Go to Step 18.
Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry? Go to Step 35
Add a Telecom Slave to a Sync Reference? See Add a Sync Reference
on p. 346.
Associate the Telecom Slave to the Clock Go to Step 39.
Output?
Associate the Telecom Slave to the PPS Go to Step 44.
Output?
Associate the Telecom Slave to the ToD Go to Step 49.
Output?
Associate the Telecom Slave to the System Go to Step 54.
ToD?
Create a Boundary Clock? Go to Step 59
Edit the Time Clock? Go to Step 76
Add a Time Clock Reference? Go to Step 81
Operate Reference Switch on Time Clock? Go to Step 86
Create a Master Clock? Go to Step 90
All PTP provisioning is completed? End of Procedure
PS
Clock source(s) must already have been created and In Service, and
the Master Clock device has been provisioned and tested.
Note
Step 5 Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the
Application Menu. Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selec-
tion tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.
Step 6 Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create Transparent
Clock.
A Create Transparent Clock window displays
Step 8 Expand the newly created TC entity and select the TC entity and each
TC port to view configuration details and associated LAG, Network
and/or Access port Flow Point EIDs.
Step 9 Expand the associated LAG, Ethernet Access and/or Network ports in
the selection tree pane.
A TC entity appears under the associated ports in the selection tree
pane
Figure 196: Network and Access Port PTP Flow Point in Selection Tree Pane
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 10 Select the Configuration tab in the associated Transparent Clock
Ports and PTP flow points to view configuration details.
Step 11 Select the Statistics and Summary tabs for the associated PTP flow
points.
Current PTP statistics are displayed (see the next two figures)
Step 12 Repeat Step 5 through Step 11 for each Transparent Clock to be cre-
ated
Step 13 Go to Step 4.
selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.
Step 15 Enter a right click on the TC-1-x entity and select Delete.
A Delete Transparent Clock window displays
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 16 Set the Administrative State to Management and select OK.
Step 17 Go to Step 4.
Clock source(s) must already have been created and In Service, and
the Master Clock device has been provisioned and tested.
Note
Step 18 Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the
Application Menu. Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selec-
tion tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.
Step 19 Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create Telecom
Slave.
A Create Telecom Slave window displays
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 23 Enter the following SOOC options:
a) Enter the desired Alias
b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the Identifier of the flow used for receiving PTP frames
d) Enter the Slave IP address and subnet mask
e) Enter an Interface Name (mandatory)
f) Enable/disable Unicast Message Negotiation
g) Enter the desired Unicast Timeout and Unicast Restart Timer
h) Select the desired Priority Mode and enter the desired Priority
i) Select the Master Delay Mechanism
j) Enter the Master Priority
k) Select the Master Protocol type and enter the Master Clock IP
Address
l) Select the desired Master Clock Message Rates/Duration options
m) Select OK.
An SOOC entity appears below the Telecom Slave entity in the selec-
tion tree pane
Step 24 Select the SOOC entity to view configuration details.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
c) Select OK.
An OCS PORT entity appears below the associated SOOC entity in
the selection tree pane
Step 30 Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port
State.
The OC-S recovered clock will achieve lock to the selected Master
Clock within 25 minutes. If no messages have been received, the Port
State is Listening. Once messages have been received from the Mas-
PS
ter Clock the Port State changes to Uncalibrated. When the system
Note determines it is able to calibrate time, then the Port State changes to
Slave (Locked).
Step 31 Select the PTP Flow Point entity and Statistics tab to view PM data.
Ensure that messages are being received, otherwise troubleshoot
accordingly.
Step 32 Select the SOOC entity and Statistics tab to view PM data. If required,
select the Raw PTP Messages tab to view raw PTP messages. See
the next two figures.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 33 Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port
State. Wait until the Port Status changes to Slave (Locked) if it is in
Uncalibrated state.
Step 34 Go to Step 4.
Step 37 Enter the desired Delay Asymmetry value in nanoseconds and select
OK.
Step 38 Go to Step 4.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 41 Enter the following 10MHz Clock options:
a) Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative
state
b) Select the desired Frequency Source EID
c) Select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options
d) Select OK
Step 42 Select the CLK-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.
Step 43 Go to Step 4.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
b) Select the desired Time of Day Source EID
c) Select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options
d) Select OK
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 63 Enter a right click on the PTP BC-1-1 entity and select Edit to modify
the configuration of the BC as appropriate.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 68 Enter the following Master Virtual Port options:
a) Enter a desired Master Virtual Port Index and Alias
b) Select the desired PTP Flow Point
c) Select OK
A MASTER VIRTUAL PORT entity appears below the associated
MCI entity in the Selection Tree Pane
Step 69 Select the MASTER VIRTUAL PORT entity to view configuration
details. Enter a right click and select Edit to change the Alias as
needed.
Step 75 Click the Dynamic Slave entity and Statistics tab to view PM data.
Ensure the messages are being transmitted and received, otherwise
troubleshoot accordingly.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PS
active time reference from the GPS signal input. Thus, it is required
that the Time Clock has GPS provisioned (see Edit GPS Port on
Note
p. 344) before all other associated provisioning.
Step 76 Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configu-
ration from the Application Menu. Expand the System, Synchroniza-
tion, NE-1 and NTE114SH entities in the selection tree pane by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.
Step 77 Enter a right click on the Time Clock entity and select Edit Time
Clock.
An Edit Time Clock window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
c) Select the desired Time Clock Reference Source
d) Click on OK
Step 84 Select the Time Clock entity and select the Status tab to verify refer-
ence configuration and status.
Step 85 Go to Step 4.
Step 87 Select the desired Request and Target for switch. Then click on OK.
Step 88 Select the Status tab in the Detail pane to check the state associated
with the Time Ref Eid which is just switched.
Step 89 Go to Step 4
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 92 Enter/select the following Master Clock options:
a) Enter a desired Master Clock Index and Alias.
b) Change Clock Identify as required.
c) Select the desired Administrative State.
d) Enter the desired PTP Domain Number, Priority 1 and Priority 2,
and select a desired Timing Clock Eid.
e) Select OK.
A PTP Master Clock entity appears below the NTE entity in the Selec-
tion Tree Pane
Step 93 Select the PTP MASTER CLOCK-1-1 entity to view the configuration.
Step 94 For the next provisioning steps, refer to Step 63 to Step 75.
End of Procedure
The unit supports both SDH (Option 1) and SONET (Option 2) synchronization
capability. The default is SDH (Option1). For both SDH and SONET, the BITS
interfaces support T1, E1 and 2048 kHz options. For Synchronization provision-
ing rules, see Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH) on p. 630
While the BITS-IN and BITS-OUT interfaces can be individually enabled and
configured, they share basic configuration settings, so that changing the line
type or code of one simultaneously changes the same settings on the other.
Sync-E is enabled on a per Ethernet Port basis. The Sync-E mode attribute sup-
ports the values of enabled or disabled (default for all ports is disabled). If a port
working at a specific Configured Speed and Media Type has Sync-E mode
enabled, then it can be selected as a reference source for the System Clock. If
Sync-E mode is disabled for that port, it is not shown in the drop-down list for the
System Clock references.
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and configured the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on with at least a
Provisioning level user permissions using eVision.
All steps in the following procedure are performed in the Configuration Applica-
tion based on a GE114S product, which are also applicable to GE114SH.
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S and
BITS-1 entities in the Selection Tree Pane, by clicking on the “+” sign
next to each entity to expand each view.
Step 2 Determine the next step.
Changing the Network Clock Type changes the options available for
Sync-E functions on BITS-IN, BITS-OUT, Access Ports and Network
PS
d) Select OK
Step 5 Go to Step 1.
Edit BITS-IN
Step 6 Right click on BITS-IN and select Edit Configuration. The following
screen display.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
a) Enter a desired Alias
b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the desired configuration setting, starting from Line Type,
as the Line Type option changes Line Code, Frame Formate, SA
Bit and QL mode.
Line type, line code, frame format and SA bit settings for BITS-IN and
BITS-OUT are shared. Changing one changes the other.
For SDH (Option-1), if QL Mode is Disabled, Assumed QL must be
PS
d) Click OK
Step 8 Select the BITS-IN entity to view configuration details.
Step 9 Go to Step 1.
Edit BITS-OUT
Step 10 Right click on BITS-OUT and select Edit Configuration. The following
screen displays:
Line type, line code, frame format and SA bit settings for BITS-IN and
BITS-OUT are shared. Changing one changes the other.
Squelch QL setting means if the reference clock drops below this
PS
d) Click OK
Step 12 Select the BITS-OUT entity to view configuration details.
Step 13 Go to Step 1.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
c) Select Signal Direction (Output only), Frequency Source Eid,
Squelch Control and Squelch QL (if Squelch QL is selected)
d) Click on OK
Step 16 Select the CLK-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.
Step 17 Go to Step 1.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
d) Click on OK
Step 24 Select the TOD-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.
Step 25 Go to Step 1.
Step 31 Select the desired Configuration settings for Sync-E Mode, QL Mode,
Assumed QL and Expected QL.
Step 32 Click on OK
Step 33 Go to Step 1.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 35 Enter/select the following options for sync reference:
a) Enter an Alias, if desired
b) Select the desired Priority value from the drop-down list.
c) Select the desired Sync Reference Source identifier from the
drop-down list
PS
(PN: 1061705879-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN) cannot be
used as sync reference, or a Frequency Offset alarm will be raised.
Note
Click on OK
Step 36 Repeat Step 34 and Step 35 for each additional Sync entity.
Step 37 For Network Ports / Access Ports, Telecom Slave, BITS-IN: Select
the System Sync Domain entity (SYNC-1-1-1-1) and the Status tab.
The Synchronization Reference List appears, showing the status of
each Sync Reference Eid
Step 38 Go to Step 1.
Step 40 Select the radio button for the sync source to edit, then select the
desired Priority from the drop-down list and enter an Alias if desired.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click on OK
Step 41 Go to Step 1.
Step 46 Select the desired Request and Target for switch. Then click on OK.
Step 47 Select the Status tab in the Detail pane to check the state associated
with the Sync Ref Eid which is just switched.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on with at least a
Provisioning level user permission using eVision.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configu-
ration via the application menu.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The number of tabs displayed in the Details Pane is depended on the
Destination MAC Address types selected in Port configuration
provisioning. If more than one LLDP Destination MAC Address types
PS
Step 6 Enter/Select the following data to configure LLDP settings for this
port:
Edit LLDP
a) Select the desired LLDP Admin Status for this port
b) Enable/Disable SNMP Notification
c) Select desired Basic Optional TLVs
Management Address Transmitted
Enter a right click under the Management ADDR table title and select
the desired operation from the selection menu. (see Figure 241 on
p. 353)
d) If add is selected, an ADD LLDP ACC PORT CONFIG tab will
appear next to the Management ADDR tab (see Figure 242 on
p. 353)
• Select the desired Management Interface and Enable/Dis-
able the Control to transmit the select management address
in LLDP frame.
• Click on OK.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 3 Select the desired options for: Alarm Type, Notification Code, Alarm
Input Mode and Alarm Hold Off
Enter the desired Alarm Description
Step 4 Select OK
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Default Settings File. This is an XML based file that changes the default settings
applied when a new entity (such as an EVPL Flow) is created. This file is down-
loaded and applied to the unit if the factory default values are determined to be
not applicable or unacceptable to the user’s application. See Default Settings
Value File on p. 387.
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Desired Activity Then
Set the current database as the System Default Continue with the next
Database? step.
Copy the System Default Database to a remote Go to Step 5.
site?
Copy a Default Database from a remote site? Go to Step 10.
Reset the Default Database to Factory Go to Step 15.
Defaults?
End of Procedure
Step 7 Click on “OK”, then click on the underlined “here” for HTTP File Trans-
fer.
You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to
save the file.
The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name (backupdb.bin) to the user’s download folder.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up
PS
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 8 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the
FTP and SFTP views are identical.)
Step 9 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the software file to transfer.
Note
The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following
displays.
When the “Status” changes from “Progress” to “Success”, the file has been
transferred.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to Step 13.
Step 12 Enter the path to the file to restore, or browse to the file location, then
click on “OK”.
The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane
will indicate when the file transfer is 100% complete.
End of Procedure
Step 13 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the following figure: (The figure shows the SCP view, the
FTP and SFTP views are identical.)
Step 14 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the database file to transfer.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following.
The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane
will indicate when the file transfer is 100% complete.
End of Procedure
Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and
erase all communications and user settings, including the loss of the
eVision connection to the NE. When using the “New” option selection,
any user uploaded “Default Settings” will be erased. This operation
CAUTION should not be performed lightly. It may be advisable to backup the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
current database so that it can be restored later.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 3 Click on OK, wait a few seconds, then click on “Database” in the
selection tree pane and the Details Pane will show the results of the
Back Up operation. See the following figure:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 5 Determine the next step.
Step 6 Click on “OK”, then click on the underlined “here” for HTTP File Trans-
fer.
You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to
save the file.
The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name (backupdb.bin) to the computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up
PS blocking enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully
downloaded to the system. With this configuration, the system logs
Note
may indicate successful file download, when the browser has not
properly saved the file. The file may be successfully downloaded and
saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or
disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s pop-up override
capability to allow the file save to complete.
End of Procedure
Step 7 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 8 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the software file to transfer.
Note
The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following
displays.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 9 When the “Status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, the file
has been transferred.
End of Procedure
Restore Database
Restoring the database is a multi-step process:
• First, the database file has to be transferred from an external repository to a
temporary location on the NE. The NE supports transfer via HTTP (Web),
FTP, SFTP and SCP protocols.
• Second, the database file must be transferred to standby memory on the
NE.
• Third, the database is activated, which causes the NE to reset and tempo-
rarily interrupt traffic and cancel active user sessions.
The following procedure includes steps for performing the database restore pro-
cess using the eVision tool. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI.
See the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference Guide for
details. The following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the
NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the
FSP 150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on
using eVision.
Procedure
Step 4 Enter the path to the file to restore, or browse to the file location, then
click on “OK”.
The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane
will indicate when the file transfer is 100% complete.
Step 5 Go to Step 8.
Step 6 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the
FTP and SFTP views are identical.)
Step 7 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the database file to transfer.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following.
Step 8 When the “Status” changes from “Progress” to “Success”, right click
on “Database” in the selection tree pane and select “Restore Data-
base”. The following screen displays:
Step 9 Click OK, and the screen shows a progress bar. When the restore
completes, right click on “Database” in the selection tree pane, then
select “Activate Database”. An Activate Standby Database” screen
displays, as shown in the following figure:
PS
preserved so the configured USM auth and priv keys remain valid. If
Note the snmpEngineId is edited, the USM auth and priv keys
automatically reset to “ChgMeNOW’ and need to be edited.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
data. This is normally only done only when a system is decommis-
sioned and moved to a new location or when the software or data-
base is corrupted. It is advisable to backup the database before
CAUTION performing this procedure.
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision
in Configuration view.
Procedure
Resetting the database to system defaults may drop all traffic and
erase all communications and user settings, including the loss of the
eVision connection to the NE. This operation should not be performed
lightly. It may be advisable to backup the current database so that it
CAUTION
can be restored later.
Step 2 To reset the current database to the system defaults, select OK.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the FSP 150CC
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using eVision
in Configuration view.
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the
application drop-down list. Right click on “Administration” in the selec-
tion tree pane and select “Restore Factory Defaults” and the following
screen displays:
Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and
erase all communications and user settings, including the loss of the
eVision connection to the NE. This operation should not be performed
lightly. It may be advisable to backup the current database so that it
CAUTION
can be restored later.
Step 2 To reset the current database to the factory defaults, select OK.
End of Procedure
The CLI Configuration File contain most configurations, but there some excep-
tions.
• Loopback Configurations
• Local user and SNMP USM user Configurations
• ESA Schedule Configurations
• Secret information for the Remote Authentication Server
CLI configuration files, when executed (Load function), modify the active data-
base one line item at a time. These files are managed using CLI commands,
eVision or SNMP. These, or edited versions of these files on an external server,
are used to configure newly installed systems to transition from an installation
network to the traffic-carrying network or to reprovision a system following a
database reset to System or Factory Defaults. The CLI commands for managing
configuration files are:
• Description
• List
• Load
• Remove
• Restart-with-configfile
• Save
• Show
• Transfer File
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
and this line should never be edited, or the file will not be run.
ADVA:config-file--> show configfile configfile4
File Name : configfile4
Description :
Context : below
#
#CLI:ESA PROBE-1-1-1-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa
add probe esa_probe-1-1-1-1 "probe1" icmp-echo
access-1-1-1-5 12.112.12.3 255.255.255.0 12.112.12.5 10min 15
15min 24
configure probe esa_probe-1-1-1-1
vlan-control enabled
vlan-tag 3-4
priority-map dscp
priority 3
packet-per-sample 200
dead-interval 60
response-timeout 10
#
#CLI:ESA REFLECTOR-1-1-1-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa
add reflector esa_reflector-1-1-1-1 "ref1" access-1-1-1-5
121.12.0.5 255.255.255.0 dscp 1
#
#CLI:ESA REFLECTOR-1-1-1-2 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa
add reflector esa_reflector-1-1-1-2 "ref2" access-1-1-1-4
123.12.12.12 255.255.255.0 tos 4
#
#CLI:CFM N2A PORT SHAPER-1-1-1-4-1 Edit
#
home
configure cfm
configure cfm-n2a-port-shaper access-1-1-1-4
cfm_n2a_port_shaper-1-1-1-4-1
cir 320000
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
buffersize 1
#end
home
admin config-file
ADVA:config-file-->
Transfer File
To export or import a configuration file, use the “transfer-file” command:
From the highest level prompt, all configuration file commands are accessed by
entering “admin config-file”. The configuration file “transfer-file” command under
“config-file” is:
ADVA:config-file--> transfer-file <ftp,scp,sftp>
<get,put> <user-name> <password> <ipaddr>
<filename>
This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a configuration
file to (put) or from (get) a remote server.
List
To list all configuration files, use the “list” command, as in:
ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|--------------------------------|----------------|
|configfile2 |psu and root
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |
ADVA:config-file-->
The command response shows the filename and the description for the file. The
description can be edited using the “description” command.
Restart-with-configfile
The “restart-with-configfile” command is used to force an immediate system
reset, then execute the designated configfile against the system Default. The
basic command is:
ADVA:config-file--> restart-with-configfile
configfile4 yes
ADVA:config-file-->
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Note
default database. The Load command doesn’t.
• The Restart-with-configfile command applies the configuration
against system-default setting. The Load command applies con-
figuration against current setting.
Load
To run a configuration file now, use the “load” command, as in:
ADVA:config-file--> load configfile4
ADVA:config-file-->
Show
To view the contents of a configuration file, use the “show ConfigFile” command,
as in:
ADVA:config-file--> show configfile configfile4
File Name : configfile4
Description :
Context : below
#
#CLI:ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6 Edit
#
home
network-element ne-1
#
#CLI:FLOW-1-1-1-6-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte NTE114-1-1-1
configure access-port access-1-1-1-6
add flow flow-1-1-1-6-1 "testing123"
regular-evc disabled disabled disabled 0 disabled
push 1-0 enabled push 1-0 "2001-*" 1024000
0
#end
home
admin config-file
ADVA:config-file-->
Description
To enter or edit the description of a configuration file, use the “description” com-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
mand, as in:
description <configfile-name> <description>
The description can be up to 128 characters long, ASCII with no spaces (unless
in quotes) or question marks. Example:
ADVA:config-file--> description configfile4 "set access6 to EVPL
and create a flow"
ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|-------------------------|----------------------------------|
|configfile2 |psu and root
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |set access6 to EVPL and create a flow
ADVA:config-file-->
Remove
To delete a configuration file, use the “remove” command, as in:
remove <configfile-name>
Example:
ADVA:config-file--> remove configfile2
ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|-------------------------|----------------------------------|
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |set access6 to EVPL and create a flow
ADVA:config-file-->
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Create a new configuration file Continue with the next step.
Update an existing configuration file Go to Step 4.
List/check status of the configuration files Go to Step 6.
Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to Step 8.
Import/export a configuration file Go to Step 10.
Run (Load) a configuration file now Go to Step 12.
View the contents of a configuration file Go to Step 14.
Edit the description of a configuration file Go to Step 16.
Delete a configuration file Go to Step 18.
Done working with configuration files Go to Step 20.
save <configfile-name>
Where “configfile-name” is an existing configfile.
The configfile will contain the delta between the default database and
the current active database and will overwrite the existing file.
Step 5 Go to Step 1.
Step 6 Enter the following command:
list
Step 7 Go to Step 1.
Step 8 Enter the following command:
restart-with-configfile <configfile-name> yes
Where “configfile-name” is the an existing configfile.
This will result in an immediate reboot of the system followed by an
execution of the designated configfile.
Step 9 Go to Step 1.
Step 10 Enter the following command:
transfer-file <ftp,scp,sftp> <get,put> <user-name>
<password> <ipaddr> <filename>
This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a con-
figuration file to (put) or from (get) a remote server. The IP address of
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
List/check status of the configuration files Go to Step 8.
Edit the description of a configuration file Go to Step 10.
Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to Step 13.
Import a configuration file Go to Step 15.
Export a configuration file Go to Step 18.
Delete a configuration file Go to Step 21.
Done working with configuration files Go to Step 24.
Step 2 Right click on “Configuration Files” and select “Create”. The following
screen displays:
Step 5 Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside
the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane.
The following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 269: Configuration Files - Edit Description
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 15 Right click on “Configuration Files” and select “Copy From Remote”.
The following screen displays:
Step 16 Select the desired protocol and enter the configuration file name:
The selected file transfer protocol is used to move a configuration file
from (get) a remote server. The IP address of the server, a valid user-
name, password, and configfile-name are required if using FTP,
SFTP or SCP protocols.
Step 17 Go to Step 1.
Step 18 Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside
the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane.
The following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Follow the instructions in the detail pane to move the selected config-
uration file to the remote location using the selected transfer protocol.
Step 20 Go to Step 1.
Step 21 Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside
the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane.
The following screen displays:
Step 23 Go to Step 1.
Step 24 If configuration changes were implemented using this procedure, ver-
ify the changes, then save the configuration using the procedure Cre-
ate a Database Backup on p. 364.
End of Procedure
The following procedure includes steps for performing applying a new Default
Settings file using the eVision tool. It is also possible to perform this process
using CLI. See the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference
Guide for details. The following procedure also assumes that the user has con-
figured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see
Set Up the FSP 150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is
logged on using eVision.
Procedure
Figure 274: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - Web View
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 4 Enter the path to the file to copy, or browse to the file location, then
click on “OK”.
The file is copied from the source location and the Detail Pane indi-
cates when the file transfer is 100% complete.
End of Procedure
Step 5 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the following figure: (The figure shows the SCP view, the
FTP and SFTP views are identical.)
Figure 275: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - SCP View
Step 6 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the database file to transfer.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The file transfer begins, and show a screen similar to the following
displays:
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 277: Transfer Log View
The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name to the computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up
PS blocking enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully
downloaded to the system. With this configuration, the system logs
Note
may indicate successful file download, when the browser has not
properly saved the file. The file may be successfully downloaded and
saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or
disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s pop-up override
capability to allow the file save to complete.
End of Procedure
Step 5 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.
It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
PS
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the software file to transfer.
Note
The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following
displays.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 7 When the “Status” changes from “In Progress” to “Success”, the file
has been transferred.
End of Procedure
Diagnostics Files
The diagnostics files, including all system inventory information, all system Field
Replaceable Units (including Power Supply Units), current versions of software,
hardware, FPGA and CPLD, running config file output, current database, cur-
rent alarms and conditions, alarm log, audit log and security log generated or
preserved since system initialization, can be saved as a ZIP file and copied to a
remote repository. The NE supports transferring the diagnostics files via HTTPS
(Web), FTP, SFTP and SCP protocols. Transferring the diagnostics files
requires the user to have Superuser access.
The following procedure includes steps for performing saving the diagnostics
files at a specific time stamp and copying the saved diagnostics file to a remote
repository using the eVision tool. It is also possible to perform this process using
CLI. See the FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 Command Line Interface Reference
Guide for details. The following procedure also assumes that the user has con-
figured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see
Set Up the FSP 150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is
logged on using eVision.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the maintenance icon, or select Maintenance from the appli-
cation drop-down list.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 4 When the Diagnostics File is saved successfully (see Figure 4),
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 5 Click Diagnostics Files in Selection Tree pane to view the Status and
Date of Existing Diagnostics Files in the Detail pane.
Step 6 Enter a right click on Diagnostics Files in Selection Tree pane and
select Copy to Remote.
A Transfer Diagnostics Files screen displays
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name to the computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up
PS
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 9 For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the
drop-down list.
The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view,
shown in the figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP
and SFTP views are identical.)
Step 10 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server and begin the file transfer process (See the following fig-
ure on how the required data for SCP transfer are correctly provi-
sioned.), and click on OK.
Step 11 When the “Status” changes from “In Progress” to “Success”, the file
has been transferred.
End of Procedure
Communications Provisioning
Introduction
This Chapter contains communications provisioning information and procedures
for the FSP 150CC-GE11x. An example scenario of GNE to SNE communica-
tions is provided along with provisioning details. This section contains the fol-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Provision Communications
The FSP 150CC supports several management configurations and options.
This section does not provide typical deployment scenarios of the FSP 150CC
in common IP network configurations as there are simply too many different net-
work configurations in common use as to be practical.
Additionally, most entities deploying the product have network administrators
who either do the provisioning or provide work orders with provisioning details.
This section also does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP network-
ing concepts.
The factory default settings for the FSP 150CC provide for connecting the
MGMT LAN (DCN) RJ45 connector to the local/remote DCN. This interface
(eth0) is preconfigured by factory defaults with DHCP in client mode and the
DHCP disabled.
The user can ascertain quickly the status of the DCN by using the RS-232 serial
port to query the NE for the DCN settings. This same interface can be used to
enable DHCP or set the IP address of the eth0 interface if DHCP is not used on
the DCN.
The user has the option of deploying the unit with settings other than the factory
defaults and/or establishing a system default database (see Database and Con-
figuration Files on p. 356) with user specified DCN settings or configuring a
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
management tunnel on one or more Network or Access Ports.
The system also supports Management Traffic Bridging, which implements an
Ethernet Bridge between the Management LAN (eth0) and all configured Man-
agement Tunnels. This allows having only a single IP address for all manage-
ment interfaces on the system and eliminates the need for static routes, routing
protocols or proxy ARP in an SNE/GNE configuration. The Ethernet Bridge
functionality supports MAC learning and flooding of un-learned MAC addresses.
If Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled (see Table 42 System Configuration
Settings on p. 619), management tunnels do not support provisioning for IP
Address, Subnet Mask, DHCP or RIP. Another system level option, Manage-
ment Traffic Bridging Security, limits acceptance of DCN packets to those with
source MACs containing an ADVA Optical Networking OUI. Management Traffic
Bridging also facilitates the use of a Hot Sparing configuration.
loaded (192.168.0.2 / 24), the default is the same for each unit. To ensure a reli-
able connection to the FSP 150CC, the IP address of the Management LAN
Interface should first be configured to a unique address compatible with the net-
work it is on. This is usually performed automatically by using DHCP or manu-
ally by making a serial connection to the FSP 150CC and performing IP
Configuration during installation. See Serial Connection on p. 402 for further
details.
When using the local password file for user authentication a login
account is locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login
attempts.
Serial Connection
Information on using CLI commands utilizing the serial port are found in the FSP
150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
Procedure
To make a serial connection to the FSP 150CC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Ensure that a physical serial connection from a PC or Laptop to the
FSP 150CC RS-232 connector has been established (see Serial Con-
sole Port Connection on p. 158).
Step 2 Start a serial terminal emulation program (e.g. Tera Term Web) to
establish a connection.
Step 3 Select the outgoing communication port.
Step 4 Set the communication settings of the terminal emulation program to
the following:
• 9600 baud
• 8 data bits
• no parity bit
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 5 Save these settings for future use.
The following Login prompt should be displayed:
Login:
Step 6 Login with the following details:
• Account name - root (or as appropriate, see Provision Secure
Access on p. 242)
• Password - ChgMeNOW (or as appropriate).
A Security Banner displays on the screen.
Step 7 Enter “Y” to continue.
The following prompt is displayed:
ADVA-->
End of Procedure
CLI command structure. (For more information on the CLI command structure,
see the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line Interface Reference Guide.)
You will need the following items for this procedure:
• PC with a serial communications port (e.g., COM1 or COM2)
• 2 Category 5 LAN Cables (with RJ-45 connectors)
• DB-9 to RJ-45 converter (ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035-01 or
1036904035, see Table 13 RJ-45 (RS-232 Serial Console Port) and DB9
Adapter Pin Assignments on p. 184)
• A communications program, like TeraTerm Pro Web (a free software termi-
nal emulator for MS-Windows)
• An Internet browser [e.g. Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater (IE 8.0 recom-
mended) or Firefox 2.0 or greater (Firefox 3.6 recommended), etc.] This
procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used
as a stand-alone procedure.
This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or
used as a stand-alone procedure.
The default DHCP setting for the FSP 150CC DCN port is disabled and as a
DHCP client.
This procedure is offered as the best way to set up the FSP 150CC IP address
using the CLI command structure by connecting to the RS-232 Serial Console
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Port (RS 232 on the GE11x) and your PC. If a DHCP server is not available for
the DCN port, then DHCP must be disabled. Note that by default, DHCP is dis-
abled on the DCN, and as a DHCP client.
The IP addresses and Subnet Masks entries shown in these procedures are for
example purposes only. The information you enter should be determined from
local sources.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a serial cable between the FSP 150CC RS-232 Serial Port
and a PC and logon using procedure: Serial Connection on p. 402.
Step 2 Enter the show ip-interface eth0 command to view the current DHCP
setting for the DCN interface on the FSP 150CC. See the following
example:
ADVA--> show ip-interface eth0
Name : eth0
IP Address : 0.0.0.0
Netmask : 255.255.255.255
DHCP Role : dhcp-client
DHCP : enabled
DHCP Client ID : FSP150CC-GE114
RIPv2 : disabled
MTU (bytes) : 1500
MAC Address : 00:80:ea:02:62:01
System Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
state of Disabled?
Is the eth0 port DHCP status set to the desired Go to Step 23.
state of Enabled?
Step 11 Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS
are enabled.
Step 12 Determine the next step.
Step 13 Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP
and HTTPS.
ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> http enabled
ADVA:system--> https enabled
Step 14 Go to Step 11
Step 15 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ-45 connector to
the network DCN.
Step 16 Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access
the NE.
Step 17 Determine the next step.
Step 18 Enter a valid login User ID and Password. The default login and pass-
word are ‘root’ and ‘ChgMeNOW,’ respectively. The security banner
will then be displayed.
Step 19 Click on the “Continue” button, and a display similar to the following
will appear.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 20 From the “File” menu, select “Logout”, and verify that the browser
shows the Login screen.
Step 21 Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit. See the
following example
ADVA:comms--> quit
Logged Out
Login:
Step 22 Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the FSP
150CC.
End of Procedure
Step 23 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ-45 connector to
the network DCN.
Step 24 Enter the show ip-interface eth0 command to view the current DHCP
setting for the DCN interface on the FSP 150CC. See the following
example:
ADVA--> show eth0
Name : eth0
IP Address : 172.17.11.33
Netmask : 255.255.255.0
DHCP Role : dhcp-client
DHCP : enabled
DHCP Client ID : FSP150CC-GE114
RIPv2 : disabled
MTU (bytes) : 1500
Physical Address : 00:80:ea:02:62:01
System Default Gateway : 172.17.22.1
Step 26 Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS
are enabled.
Step 27 Determine the next step.
Step 28 Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP
and HTTPS.
ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> http enabled
ADVA:system--> https enabled
Step 29 Go to Step 26
Step 30 Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access
the NE.
Step 32 Enter a valid login User ID and Password. The default login and pass-
word are ‘root’ and ‘ChgMeNOW,’ respectively. The warning banner
will then be displayed.
Step 33 Click on the “Continue” button, and a display similar to Figure 288
appears.
Step 34 From the “File” menu, select “Logout”, and verify that the browser
shows the Login screen.
Step 35 Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit. See the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
following example
ADVA:comms--> quit
Logged Out
login:
Step 36 Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the FSP
150CC.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a serial cable between the FSP 150CC RS-232 Serial Port
and a PC and logon using procedure: Serial Connection on p. 402.
Step 2 Navigated to the 3G Modem Command Level.
ADVA--> network-element ne-1
ADVA-NE-1--> configure nte nte114-1-1-1
ADVA-NE-1:nte114-1-1-1--> configure usb
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1-->
Step 3 Determine the next step.
Set a wireless connection with a PIN-authentication enabled Continue with the next step.
3G Modem
Set a wireless connection with a PIN-authentication disabled Go to Step 5.
3G Modem.
Disable Pin Authentication Go to Step 14.
Unlock the SIM card Go to Step 16.
Change the PIN Go to Step 18.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ADVA:comms:3g-dcn--> show 3g-dcn
MTU : 1500
IP Address : 172.21.66.94
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.255
Primary DNS : 210.21.196.6
Secondary DNS : 221.5.88.88
Step 10 Connect to the device with the IP address on CLI, SNMP or GUI.
Step 11 Go to Step 3.
Step 12 Run enable-pin command to enable pin authentication. once pin
authentication is enabled, user has to run pin-aunthenticaion to
access the 3G Modem.
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state in-service
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> enable-pin ****
Step 13 Go to Step 3.
Step 14 Run disable-pin command to disable pin authentication. once pin
authentication is disabled, the user doesn’t have to run
pin-aunthenticaion to access the 3G Modem.
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state in-service
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> enable-pin ****
Step 15 Go to Step 3.
Step 16 Run unlock-pin command to unlock the SIM and set a New PIN. This
command must be ran in the cases where the PIN has been mistak-
enly entered 3 times.
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> unlock-pin ******* ****
****
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1-->
Step 17 Go to Step 3.
Step 18 Change the PIN
ADVA-NE-1:3g_dcn-1-1-1-1--> change-pin **** ****
****
End of Procedure
Browser-based IP Connection
This procedure details the steps used to access a web-accessible FSP 150CC
(HTTP and/or HTTPS enabled) using a web browser on a PC with connectivity
to the DCN or 3G modem the FSP 150CC is connected to.
Procedure
To make an Ethernet DCN connection to the FSP 150CC, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Ensure that a unique IP address has been configured for the FSP
150CC’s Management Interface or 3G modem, See Set Up the FSP
150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402 or Set Up the
3G Modem Using the Serial Port on p. 408.
Step 2 Ensure that a physical Ethernet connection from the DCN PC to the
FSP 150CC has been established or the 3G modem is provisioned
and operational.
Step 3 Verify the user’s PC IP address and netmask match the values pro-
vided by the Network Administrator, so that it has access to the net-
work the FSP 150CC is on.
Step 4 Establish a connection to the FSP 150CC Management Interface or
3G modem via an Internet browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater
c) Press Continue.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The Web Interface FSP 150CC Main Menu will be displayed, as
described in Chapter 3, eVision Web Browser Management Tool
on p. 189.
the Web Interface is not possible, check that the INTERNET browser
Note is configured to accept such cookies.
End of Procedure
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the FSP
150CC DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 402) and is logged on using
eVision. For more information on the configuration settings and rules, see DCN
(eth0) (Edit Configuration) on p. 640.
From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:
Procedure
Step 1 Right click on “DCN (eth0)” and select Edit Configuration. The follow-
ing “Edit DCN (eth0)” screen displays.
Step 2 Select IP Mode - IPv4 only, IPv6 only or IPv4 and IPv6.
Step 3 Determine the next step.
Enable/Disable RIPv2
Click on OK
In order for the new IP Address and DHCP server function (IP
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Select DHCPv6 - Enabled
Select DHCPv6 Role - DHCP Server
Enter the desired IPv6 Unicast Address
Enable/Disable RIPng
Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled
Enter the desired IPv6 RA Prefix if IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled is Enabled
Select the checkbox next to Edit System Default and Enter the Gate-
way IPv6 Address
Click on OK
Step 6 Go to Step 3
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 9 Go to Step 3
End of Procedure
End of Procedure
End of Procedure
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 3 Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under “Management
Tunnels”, select Create Tunnel and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
for PPP)
Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled (not applicable for PPP)
Enter a desired IPv6 Unicast Address when DHCPv6 and Stateless
Address Auto Configuration are both Disabled (not applicable for
PPP)
Enter a desired IPv6 RA Prefix for IPv6 Route Advertise when IPv6
RA Prefix Enabled is Enabled (not applicable for PPP)
IPv6 System Default Gateway (not applicable for PPP)
Select the checkbox next to Edit System Default Gateway when either
or both of DHCPv6 and Stateless Address Auto Configuration is Dis-
abled
Enter a desired Gateway IPv6 Address if Edit System Default Gate-
way is checked.
Layer 2 Configuration
Tunnel Mode - Select from VLAN Based, Mac-based, and
I-Tag-based. (I-Tag-based is only supported on Network Port)
C-TAG VLAN Enabled/Disabled
C-TAG VLAN Id - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095
I-TAG - Enabled/Disabled (only applicable when the Tunnel Mode is
set to I-Tag-based)
I-SID - 256 - 16777214. (only applicable when the Tunnel Mode is set
to I-Tag-based)
S-Tag VLAN - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled
Click on OK
Step 5 Expand the NE-1 entity under Management Tunnels, left click on the
management tunnel ID and verify the data entered. (see Figure 292
on p. 422)
Step 6 If anything in the Configuration, RIP or Bandwidth data requires modi-
fication, right click on the management tunnel ID and select Edit Con-
figuration (see Figure 293 on p. 423)
Edit the data as appropriate.
Click on OK.
Step 7 Go to Step 1.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Step 10 Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under “Management
Tunnels”, select Create Tunnel and the following screen displays:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 12 Expand the NE-1 entity under Management Tunnels, left click on the
management tunnel ID and verify the data entered. (see figure below)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 297: Edit Management Tunnel - Bridging
End of Procedure
Procedure
step.
Display an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel? Go to Step 6.
Delete an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel? Go to Step 7
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.
Step 2 Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under IPv6 over IPv4
Tunnels, select “Create Tunnel” and the following screen displays:
Step 3 Enter/Select the following data to configure the IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel:
(see IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules on
p. 707 for details on each item.)
Identification
IPv6 over v4 Tunnel Index - 1, default and unique value.
IPv6 over v4 Tunnel Name - a string up to15 alphanumeric characters
Associated IPv4 Interface - select from drown-down list - one IPv4
management interface
Tunnel
Mode - select a desired tunnel mode - Configured, Auto 6o4, IPv4
Compatible, or ISATAP
Tunnel Address (options vary according to different Tunnel Mode)
Destination IPv4 Address - valid IPv4 destination address (applicable
to Configured Mode)
IPv4 Unicast Address - valid IPv6 unicast address (applicable to Con-
figured Tunnel Mode)
Step 4 Potential Router - valid IPv4 address (applicable to ISATAP Tunnel
Mode)
Click on OK.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 5 Go to Step 1.
Step 6 Expand the NE-1 entity under IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels, click on the
IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel ID and verify the data entered.
Step 7 To delete an IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel, right click on the tunnel ID and
select Delete.
Click on OK.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 Enter/select the following data to configure Source Address:
Address Type - Select “System IP Address” or “Outgoing Interface IP”
Source Address Interface Name:
If Address Type is “System IP Address”, select the desired
Source Address Interface Name from the drop-down list.
If Address Type is “Outgoing Interface IP”, Source Address Inter-
face Name is fixed as “eth0” (Management LAN)
SNMP v1 Interface Name:
Select the desired interface name from the drop-down list.
Click on OK
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 2 Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select
Add Static Route and the following screen displays (see the following
figure):
Step 4 Go to Step 1
Step 5 Left click on “Communications” and select the “Static Routes” tab.
(see Figure 303)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Go to Step1
Step 7 To delete a Static Route, right click on Communications and select
“Delete Static Route” (see the following figure):
Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each route to be
deleted.
Click on OK.
Step 8 Go to Step 1.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select
Add Static Route and the following screen displays (see the following
figure):
PS
Interface Name. To enable Management Traffic Bridging, refer to
Table 42 System Configuration Settings on p. 619.
Note
Step 4 Go to Step 1.
Step 5 Left click on “Communications” and select the “Static ARP Entry” tab.
(see the following figure)
Step 6 Go to Step 1.
Step 7 To delete a Static ARP Entry, right click on Communications and
select “Delete Static ARP Entry” (see the following figure):
Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each ARP entry to be
deleted.
Click on OK.
Step 8 Go to Step 1.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
step.
Display IPv6 Static Routes? Go to Step 5.
Delete IPv6 Static Routes? Go to Step 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.
Step 2 Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select
Add IPv6 Static Route and the following screen displays (see the fol-
lowing figure):
Step 3 Enter/select the following data to create a static route: (see IPv6
Static Route (Add IPv6 Static Route) on p. 639 for details on each
item.)
Destination IPv6 Address - valid IPv6 unicast address
Gateway IP Address - valid IPv6 address of Gateway
Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down
list, by default the management interface in IPv6 mode will automati-
cally appear for selection.
Metric - 0 to 65535, default is 1
Advertise Route - select “Disabled or Enabled”
Click on OK
Step 4 Go to Step 1
Step 5 Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static Routes”
tab. (see Figure 309)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 6 Go to Step1
Step 7 To delete an IPv6 Static Route, right click on Communications and
select “Delete IPv6 Static Route” (see the following figure):
Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 route to be
deleted.
Click on OK.
Step 8 Go to Step 1.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 2 Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select
Add IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry and the following screen displays (see
the following figure):
Step 4 Go to Step 1.
Step 5 Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static Neighbor
Entry” tab. (see the following figure)
Step 6 Go to Step 1. FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 static
neighbor entry to be deleted.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click on OK.
Step 8 Go to Step 1.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select
Add IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry and the following screen displays (see
the following figure):
Step 4 Go to Step 1.
Step 5 Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static ProxyND
Entry” tab. (see the following figure)
Step 6 Go to Step 1.
Step 7 To delete an IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, right click on Communica-
tions and select “Delete IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry” (see the following
figure):
Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 static proxy
ND entry to be deleted.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Click on OK.
Step 8 Go to Step 1.
End of Procedure
commands.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Configuration view. Expand the System Name, NE-1 and
NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.
Step 2 Determine the next step.
Desired Function Description Then
Edit 3G modem Provision or edit 3G Modem Configuration. Continue with the
configuration next step.
Observe current 3G Observe current 3G modem configuration and Go to Step 5.
modem configuration SIM status to determine appropriate action
and SIM status
Enable PIN Requires entry using a PIN. (Can be applied if Go to Step 7.
PIN/PUK status = Disabled.) When the PIN is
Enabled, if the 3G Modem is unplugged or the
system reboots, the 3G Modem SIM must be
unlocked by entering the PIN.
Disable PIN Allows access without entering a PIN. (Can be Go to Step 10.
applied if PIN/PUK status = OK.)
Change PIN Change existing PIN. (Can be applied if Go to Step 13.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 3 Right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Edit Configuration. The
following screen displays.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 4 Fill in the Alias as appropriate. Select “IS” for Administrative State.
The Modem information and Physical Configuration information will
display automatically once the 3G modem is plugged in. Enter the 3G
Dial-Up Configuration. Click on OK.
Step 5 Left click on “3G Modem” under NTE11x. Verify the data entered and
observe the SIM status by selecting the corresponding tab (see the
following two figures). Refer to Table 23 for SIM status result descrip-
tions. The SIM status will be used in the next step.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
automatically according to the actual
signal strength.
Not Available SIM is removed
Step 6 Use the SIM status information from the previous step to determine
the next step.
Desired Function Then
Enable PIN? Continue with the next
(Can be applied if PIN/PUK status = Disabled.) step.
When the PIN is Enabled, if the 3G Modem is
unplugged or the system reboots, the 3G
Modem SIM must be unlocked by entering the
PIN.
Disable PIN? Allows access without entering Go to Step 10.
PIN authentication. Once the PIN is disabled,
operations such as Change PIN, PIN
Authentication, Unlock with PUK are disabled.
(Can be applied if PIN/PUK status = OK.)
PIN authentication required (PIN/PUK status = Go to Step 16.
input PIN)?
Unlock with PUK required (PIN/PUK status = Go to Step 19.
Input PUK)?
Provisioning is complete - Verify 3G Go to Step 21.
Networking Connection?
Step 7 To enable 3G Modem PIN, right click on the 3G Modem entity and
select “Enable PIN”. The following screen displays.
3G Modem SIM will not be locked if the PIN is disabled. Once the PIN
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Unlock with PUK are disabled.
Note
Step 14 Enter the current PIN and the new PIN; then repeat the new PIN to
confirm the input. Click OK.
The new PIN will take effect in the next time when PIN input is
PS
required.
Note
to authenticate PIN, the 3G Modem SIM will still be locked - and the
SIM will need to be unlocked by entering PUK and a new PIN
Note (Step 19).
Step 19 If a user fails to unlock the SIM via PIN after three failed attempts, the
SIM needs to be unlocked with PUK. Enter a right click on the 3G
Modem entity and select “Unlock with PUK”. The following screen dis-
plays.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 20 Input PUK and the New PIN; then repeat the new PIN to confirm the
input. Click OK.
If PUK input fails to unlock SIM after 10 attempts, contact the wireless
PS
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
GNE
FSP 150CC #1
Network Port
Management Tunnel
MGMT LAN Port VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100
Layer 2 Protocol = Ethernet
IP Address = 192.168.2.2
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
DHCP = disabled
Netmask = 255.255.255.0
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
DHCP = disabled
IP Address = 10.10.10.4
RIPv2 = disabled
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Proxy ARP = enabled
Default Router = 192.168.2.1 Network Port
Static Route Not Required
Management Tunnel
LAN Segment A VLAN Based, VLAN ID = 100
Layer 2 Protocol = Ethernet
DHCP = disabled
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
IP Address = 10.10.10.5 SNE
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 FSP 150CC #2
PS
in all RIP learned routes being withdrawn from the routing table. On
Note the GNE, this will have the affect of losing the route to the SNE.
Procedure
You should currently be logged onto the FSP 150CC #2’s RS232
PS
Step 2 Provision the eth0 (system) IP address using the following CLI com-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
mand entry
ADVA--> configure communication
ADVA:comms--> configure eth0 ip-address 192.168.2.3
255.255.255.0
ADVA:comms-->
Step 3 Provision the management tunnel using the following CLI command.
ADVA:comms--> add mgmttnl 1 phoenix1 ethernet
vlan-based 100 disabled 10.10.10.5 255.255.255.0
network-1-1-1-1
According to the example in Figure 326, the FSP 150CC #2’s man-
agement tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol, VLAN
PS
based with the VLAN ID set to 100, DHCP disabled, the IP address
should be set to 10.10.10.5 with a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0,
Note
and RIPv2 should be set to enabled.
Step 4 To edit the management tunnel to enable RIPv2 packets, enter the
following CLI command.
ADVA:comms--> configure mgmttnl mgmt_tnl-1
ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> rip2Pkts-control enabled
Step 5 Set the Management LAN Port’s (eth0) Admin state to unassigned
using the following CLI command.
ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> home
ADVA--> network-element ne-1
ADVA-NE-1--> configure nte nte114-1-1-1
ADVA-NE-1:NTE114-1-1-1--> configure dcn
ADVA-NE-1:dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state unassigned
ADVA-NE-1:dcn-1-1-1-1--> home
Step 6 Add a static route to point to the management tunnel on FSP 150CC
#1 using the following CLI command
ADVA--> configure communication
ADVA:comms--> add ip-route nexthop 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
10.10.10.4 phoenix1 1 disabled
Step 7 Enter a “show system” and verify that Proxy ARP is disabled. If Proxy
ARP is enabled, enter the following command, otherwise continue to
the next step
ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> proxy-arp disabled
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the FSP 150CC.
If two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or FSP 150CCs are
connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to
the same LAN segment, then only one of the them should have the
Proxy ARP option enabled. Otherwise, there will be multiple ARP
CAUTION responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP
address from each NE/FSP 150CC in the same LAN that has Proxy
ARP enabled.
Step 8 Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables (Ether-
net cable and/or console cable) from the FSP 150CC front panel con-
nectors, as required.
Step 9 Connect the optical cables to the FSP 150CC Network Port front
panel connectors if they are not already connected.
Perform the following at FSP 150CC #1 (GNE):
Step 10 At FSP 150CC #1, perform the procedures Connect Power Cables
and Apply Power on p. 167 and Serial Connection on p. 402.
You should currently be logged onto the FSP 150CC #1’s RS232
PS
According to the example in Figure 326, the FSP 150CC #1’s man-
agement tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol, VLAN
PS
based with the VLAN ID set to 100, DHCP disabled, the IP address
should be set to 10.10.10.4 with a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0,
Note
and RIPv2 should be set to enabled.
ADVA:comms-->home
Step 14 Enable Proxy ARP by entering the following CLI command.
.ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> proxy-arp enabled
Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the FSP 150CC.
If two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or FSP 150CCs are
connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to
the same LAN segment, then only one of the them should have the
Proxy ARP option enabled. Otherwise, there will be multiple ARP
CAUTION responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP
address from each NE/FSP 150CC in the same LAN that has Proxy
ARP enabled.
Step 15 Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables (Ether-
net cable and/or console cable) from the FSP 150CC front panel con-
nectors, as required.
Step 16 Ensure the DCN connection for LAN Segment A is connected to the
MGMT LAN (eth0) port.
Step 17 Connect the optical cables to the FSP 150CC Network Port front
panel connectors if they are not already connected.
Step 18 Observe the Network Port Net and Act LEDs on the front panel. They
should be lit green. If the LEDs are not lit green, then troubleshoot the
connections between FSP 150CC #1 and FSP 150CC #2.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Introduction
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
This chapter contains information and procedures for the following Etherjack®
testing features.
• Loopbacks
• Etherjack® Diagnostics
• Cable Length Benchmarks
• Performance Monitoring
• ESA Provisioning and Operation
• CFM Provisioning and Operation
• Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer
• Service Activation Testing
Loopbacks
To assist with Ethernet service fault isolation and to support Service Level
Agreement (SLA) conformance verification, the system supports Port, VLAN,
ITAG (not applicable in GE114S/GE114SH) and EFM-OAM message loopback
modes on all Ethernet traffic carrying ports (see Note). The Loopbacks allow the
user to setup an Ethernet test set at a central location to inject traffic into the net-
work.
PS
performing a loopback on port can cause undesired protection
switching.
Note
As shown in the example in following figure, traffic is looped back into the net-
work and back to the test-set. The test-set can look for any anomalies such as
frame loss or out-of-sequence frames. The loopback eliminates the need to con-
nect a test-set in the field or at the customer premise to verify round-trip service.
CO Based
Test Head
Loopback Loopback
Test Pattern 2 Test Pattern 1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Customer Premise Central Office Customer Premise
Four basic types of loopback are available: Port, VLAN, I-Tag, and Ethernet
First Mile (EFM)-Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM). The follow-
ing loopback functions are available:
• EFM-OAM Remote
• EFM-OAM Remote Timed
• Facility Port
• Facility Port Timed
• Facility VLAN
• Terminal Port
• Terminal Port Timed
• Terminal VLAN
• Facility I-Tag Port (not applicable to GE114S/GE114SH)
• Terminal I-Tag (not applicable to GE114S/GE114SH)
As a sub-function, JDSU loopback responder function is supported and man-
aged on a per-port basis, wherein the device only reacts and responds to a
JDSU loopback control request frame. There is no support for initializing request
messages. Fore more information on JDSU loopback, see FSP1500CC GE11x
R6.1 Technical Descriptions document.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Etherjack® Diagnostics
Transmission Media Analysis
This diagnostics feature provides a means of monitoring and diagnosing copper
link conditions using Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. TDR tech-
nology operates by sending individual signal pulses down the transmission
medium and analyzing the return energy.
On a terminated cable, the energy of the signal pulse is absorbed by the termi-
nating device. Little or no energy is reflected back to the originating transceiver.
This means the length of a terminated cable cannot be determined.
However, if the cable is not terminated, when the signal pulse is transmitted the
energy is reflected back towards the transmitter from the point of the open cir-
cuit. By measuring the phase variation between the transmitted and reflected
pulses, the system can determine the distance from the transmitter to the open
circuit fault to within 1 meter.
Similarly, a short circuit between any of the wires in a loop can be detected. In
this case, it is also possible to measure the distance from the transmitter to the
short circuit fault to within 1 meter by analyzing phase delay characteristics.
Before starting Diagnostic Test at one end of a link, make sure Auto
PS
Diagnostic is disabled at the other end. Otherwise the test results
are incorrect.
Note
PS
Tests are started automatically on detection of a link fault, but they can also be
started manually using the eVision web browser management tool. Refer to the
following figure for an example Etherjack® Diagnostic Test result using eVision.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The diagnostic operation consists of the following phases:
1 Ethernet Cable Test. Cable faults can be isolated to within +/- 1 meter reso-
lution along the cables length, for each cable pair. The test can detect the
presence of:
o open circuits
o short circuits
o impedance mismatches
The capabilities of the Ethernet Cable Test can be enhanced by using
PS
2 Ethernet Auto-Negotiation Test. During this phase, the speed and duplicity
of the Ethernet link is negotiated. This test also performs auto-MDIX for
crossover detection and adaptation.
3 Ethernet EFM Loopback Test. On this phase the far-end is placed on EFM
loopback mode to perform traffic testing over the link. As with the Ethernet
Port loopback, test packets are injected into the Tx data path and are moni-
tored at the receiver. Missing or faulty packets detected at the Rx monitor
point, indicates a failure at the Tx output driver or the receiver input.
Auto-negotiation test is not done unless the port is configured for auto-nego-
tiation.
• Etherjack® Diagnostics are service affecting. This includes management
traffic. Therefore, during the testing, management connectivity may be lost.
The following test results are possible:
• Ethernet Port - Device FAIL. Through internal loopback testing, the Ethernet
port has been found to be faulty. This is an equipment fault.
• Ethernet Port - Device PASS. Through internal loopback testing, the Ethernet
port has been found to be good.
• No Cable Detected. A cable has not been detected on the Ethernet port.
• Un-Terminated Cable Detected Length: <n> meters. An open circuit condition
was detected on the cable at a distance of n meters from the physical port.
• Cable Short Circuit at <n> meters. a short circuit condition was detected on
the cable at a distance of n meters from the physical port.
• Impedance Mismatch. The terminating impedance is higher or lower than the
line impedance, causing a reflected signal that does not match either the
open or shorted conditions.
• EFM Communication Failure. EFM packets sent were not returned.
• Cable OK. A valid termination was detected on the cable.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Enter or edit the cable benchmarks for the desired copper interface.
eVision
Select Maintenance view
Right click on the desired access port in the selection tree
Select Edit Cable Benchmarks
An Edit Cable Benchmarks entry screen displays
Select Enabled for each Point for which data is to be entered
Enter the cable length (in meters) for each enabled Point, and a description
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
name for each enabled cable segment (up to 64 characters) in the Descrip-
tion field
Select Apply
An Operation Complete popup window appears
Select OK
End of Procedure
Performance Monitoring
Overview
The Performance Monitoring (PM) feature enables in-service, non-intrusive sys-
tem monitoring to aid in diagnosing and isolating issues that may occur during
operation. PM enables users to detect and react to potential failures prior to a
customer outage. In addition to providing traditional SNMP MIB Etherstats,
Etherjack® provides Performance Parameters (PPs) and features similar to
those found in traditional services. This allows Etherjack Service Assurance to
be integrated into a carrier’s existing service assurance infrastructure.
Performance Monitoring view allows you to view performance monitoring counts
and view PM thresholds. Performance monitoring thresholds can be edited, and
registers can be initialized (for users with proper user access permission level).
This chapter contains the following step by step procedures:
• Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values on p. 473
• Initializing PM and Distribution Registers on p. 478
• Editing PM Thresholds on p. 481
For PM commands using CLI, refer to the FSP 150CC-GE11x Command Line
Interface Reference Guide.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Etherjack® PM Features
The following features are provided:
• retrievable performance data for each managed entity, so the user can
determine past and current system operation. PM data collection is per-
formed via a polling mechanism, were primitives are gathered into accumu-
lated counts. After a defined interval, (e.g., 15 minutes or 1 day), the counts
are binned and stored in a database.
• the checking of PM counts against a threshold to see if the threshold has
been crossed. If so, a Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) is reported, so that
corrective actions can be taken.
Etherjack® PM supports:
• threshold setting and automatic TCA message generation
• Current and History PM bins provide a continuous record of service perfor-
mance, allowing for accurate SLA conformance statements.
PM counts can be displayed as a summary or in tabular format in the eVision
web browser management tool, can be filtered and/or refreshed and allows
exporting data as Excel spreadsheets.
Performance Parameters
There are several categories of Performance Parameters (PPs) that are col-
lected, as follows:
• equipment presence and type [e.g., Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP)
Interface type and presence, module type and presence]
• physical Layer monitoring (e.g., optical power, temperature)
• Ethernet Statistics (e.g., the number of Ethernet packets received/transmit-
ted)
• Protocol Statistics (e.g., the number of protocol dependent packets
received/transmitted)
The following entities are monitored for performance data which is accumulated
into PPs:
• Ethernet Network ports
• Ethernet Access ports
• Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs)
• Quality of Service (QoS) Access to Network and Network to Access queues
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Each PP can be defined by the attributes outlined in the following table.
Bins and Bin The following performance bin periods will exist:
Periods • 1 x Current 15-Minute Bin
• 1 x Current 1-Day (24-Hour) Bin
• 32 x Historical 15-Minute Bins
• 1 x Historical 1-Day (24-Hour) Bin
(1) The 32 Historical 15-Minute Bins provide the most recent 8 hours
of performance data.
PS
(2) The Historical 1-Day Bin provides the performance data from the
Note previous day starting from 12:00am (i.e., midnight, 00:00).
Rollover For Ethernet managed entities only, a Rollover Counter is provided. This gives
Counter the current performance data since monitoring began. The counter accumulates
until it reaches its maximum size (64 bits). When this happens the counter will
‘roll over’ to zero and begin again.
Unlike Bins, the Rollover Counter is not related to the time of day, but to system
uptime.
PS
that entity.
Note
Each Network Port, Access Port, Flow and ESA Probe entity type has default
thresholds for its PPs, which are used when an entity is provisioned. The default
thresholds are configurable.
A TCA is only reported once during a bins time period unless it is initialized and
then is crossed again.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Variance (OPT-VAR) and Optical Power Received Variance (OPR-VAR) (higher
or lower). The target value and the acceptable variance is configurable by the
user.
In other words, Optical Power Received / Transmit Variance (+/- dBm) rep-
resents the variance from the configured OPR / OPT thresholds where the mea-
sured value will not result in the generation of a TCA. For example: with an OPR
threshold of -80 and an OPR-VAR of 4, no TCA is generated if the measured
OPR is -76 to -84.
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
All or Deselect All buttons. Then select OK. History data may be hid-
den or displayed by de-selecting/selecting the History option. An
asterisk in the Time column indicates data that is suspect.
Thresholds tab: Thresholds are displayed by entity type.
Step 5 If desired, 15 Minute and 1 Day counts can be exported to an Excel
spreadsheet by selecting the Export button.
An export file pane appears (see Figure 335).
Step 6 Choose the desired application to open, or select the Save File
option. A filename associated with the entity and date is created in the
selected application (Excel is the default application - see
Figure 336). Edit or save the exported file as desired.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 335: Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Select the desired Probe ID and the Thresholds tab.
The Thresholds data pane appears (see Figure 337)
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Initializing PM and Distribution Registers
The following descriptions and procedures are provided for the following enti-
ties/applications:
• Initializing Network Port, Access Port, Flow and LAG Registers on p. 478
• Initializing ESA Probe PM Registers on p. 479
• Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers on p. 480
(Bin Index=1) or one of the historical bins (Bin Index = 2 to 32), with 32 being the
oldest bin.
Procedure
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Init. PM Regis-
ters.
The Initialize PM Registers pane appears (see Figure 339)
Step 3 Select the desired bin: current, All History, or specific interval.
Step 4 For a layer-2 probe, select the desired CoS(s), Select All or Deselect
All.
Step 5 Select OK.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers
For ESA Probes, each Distribution register may be initialized within the ESA
application.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Init. Dist. Regis-
ters.
The Initialize Distribution pane appears (see Figure 340)
Step 3 Select the desired history distribution register: All History Data, or
specific history data.
Step 4 For a layer-2 probe, select the desired CoS(s), Select All or Deselect
All.
End of Procedure
Editing PM Thresholds
Each Network Port, Access Port, Flow, LAG and ESA Probe entity type has
default thresholds for its PPs. These thresholds are provisionable. The following
procedures are provided for the following entities/applications:
• Edit Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG PM Registers on p. 481
• Edit ESA Probe PM Registers on p. 483
entity.
Note
Procedure
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Edit Thresholds.
The Edit Thresholds pane appears (see Figure 342)
Step 3 Select the desired history distribution register: All History Data, or
specific history data.
Step 4 Edit the desired thresholds for the desired Monitored Type. Select
OK.
Step 5 Select OK.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The first step in creating an ESA test is to establish a probe at one FSP 150CC.
This procedure provides steps for creating a Layer-3 Probe. To edit an existing
Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and select Edit Probe.
To delete an existing Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and
select Delete Probe.
Refer to ESA Options and Rules on p. 746 to determine the default values,
value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applica-
tions menu and expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Port
that is targeted to create the Layer-3 Probe.
Step 3 Enter a right click on the Probes entity and select Create Probe.
A Create Probe pane appears
Probe Information
c) Protocol – the type of protocol to use (UDP Echo or ICMP Echo for
General and Round Trip Delay count reporting, ICMP Timestamp
for General, Round Trip Delay, One-Way Delay and Jitter count
reporting.
d) Source Port – Select the Access Port this probe is assigned to
from the drop-down list.
Service End Points
e) Probe IP Address and Mask – the IP address and subnet mask of
the probe to which echo replies will be sent.
The IP address must not overlap with any non-ESA related subnet
PS
If more than one Probe IP address resides on the same subnet, they
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
f) Reflector IP Address – the IP address of the reflector to which
echo replies (and optionally, timestamp) will be reflected back.
Traffic Parameters
g) Packet Type – specifies whether the service is VLAN Tagged or
Untagged. To test a specific FID on an existing Flow VLAN ser-
vice, the VLAN ID and Priority entry should be set to VLAN
Tagged.
h) VLAN ID and Priority – the VLAN ID and Priority to be used for test
traffic frames. To test a specific FID on an existing Flow VLAN
service, the VLAN ID and Priority entry should be a member of
that FID. Only applicable if the Packet Type is VLAN Tagged.
i) Priority Map Mode and Priority – identifies the priority classifica-
tion mechanism for ESA traffic. To test a specific FID on an exist-
ing Flow VLAN service, the Priority Map Mode should match the
actual service.
j) Packet Size – the number of bytes for each test frame.
k) Packets Per Sample – the number of test packets to send in a
sample burst.
l) Packet Interval – the interval between packets in a sample burst in
milliseconds.
m) Dead Interval – the settling time to wait after a sample burst is
complete before starting the next sample in seconds.
n) Response Timeout – wait time for a response in seconds. Packets
received after this time-out are considered lost.
History Configuration
End of Procedure
To delete an existing Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and
select Delete Probe.
Refer to ESA Options and Rules on p. 746 to determine the default values,
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Ports
that are targeted for Layer-2 ESA testing.
Step 2 Create a CFM MD, MANET, MACOMP and MEP for the desired ports
at both NEs (see CFM Provisioning and Operation on p. 502).
Step 3 Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applica-
tions menu and expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 4 Enter a right click on the Probes entity and select Create Probe.
A Layer-3 Create Probe pane (default) appears (see Figure 343)
Step 5 Select Protocol type Y.1731 LM/DM from the drop down list.
A Layer-2 Create Probe pane appears (see Figure 344)
Y.1731 uses CFM MEPs as the end points and thus does not require
a reflector. This also means that the related MD, MANET, MACOMP
and MEPs must already exist on the same interface as this probe in
PS
a) Probe Index – Unique EID for the probe. Options available are 1 to
255.
b) Probe ID – a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces and
must contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the probe
(required).
Probe Information
c) Protocol – (Y.1731 LM/DM should already be selected)
d) Source Port – Select the Access Port this probe is assigned to
from the drop-down list.
Service End Points
e) Source MEP – drop-down-list of available MEP numbers.
f) Destination MEP Type – MAC address or MEP ID.
g) Destination MAC Address – the MAC address if Destination Type
is MAC Address.
Service Parameters
h) Multi COS – If Multi-COS is disabled, only 1 COS can be selected;
if enabled, each COS can be individually selected as active using
a check box.
i) COS - If Multi COS is disabled, one COS can be selected from a
drop-down list; if Multi COS is enabled, the desired COS are
selected by clicking on the Active check box next to each COS.
j) Frame Size - the packet size in bytes. The default frame size is
128 bytes.
k) Interval – interval between messages. The options are, 10 msec,
100 msec, 1 second, 10 seconds and 1 minute.
History Configuration
l) History Bins – the number of bins of history results to keep. The
default is 8.
m) History Interval – drop-down list - the number of minutes in a sin-
gle interval. The default is 15 minutes.
n) History Distribution Bins – the number of distribution history bins
to keep. The default is 8.
o) History Distribution Interval – drop-down list - the number of min-
utes in a distribution history bin. The default is 15 minutes.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Provision a Reflector
The next step in creating a Layer-3 ESA test is to establish a reflector at one
FSP 150CC.
PS
Y.1731 protocol probes do not require a reflector.
Note
To edit an existing Reflector, enter a right click on the desired Reflector entity
and select Edit Reflector. To delete an existing Reflector, enter a right click on
the desired Reflector entity and select Suspend Reflector, then enter a right
click and select Delete Reflector.
Once a Reflector has been created, the Reflector identifier appears under the
Reflector identifier in the selection tree. You can view Reflector details and sta-
tus by selecting the specific Reflector entity.
Entering a right click on an existing Reflector identifier will provide menu selec-
tions for the specific Reflector. Menu selections available for Reflector identifiers
are:
• Edit Reflector - (only Priority Map Mode and Priority are editable)
• Delete Reflector - To delete a reflector.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applica-
tions menu. Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the
Selection Tree.
Step 2 Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Port
that is targeted to create the Reflector.
Step 3 Enter a right click on the Reflectors entity and select Create Reflector.
A Create Reflector pane appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
must contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the reflector
(required).
IP Information
c) Source Port - the port on which the reflector operates - select
from drop-down list
Reflector Information
d) Reflector IP Address, Mask – the IP address and subnet mask of
the reflector. (The IP address must not overlap with any non-ESA
related subnet provisioned within the FSP 150CC.)
e) Priority Map Mode, Priority - select the priority map mode and pri-
ority assigned to the associated reflector.
Although it is possible for an FSP 150CC to contain both Reflectors
and Probes, it is not possible for a Probe-Reflector pair to be on the
PS
same FSP 150CC. This is determined by the subnet of the Probe and
Note Reflector IP Address.
End of Procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applica-
tions menu.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.
Enter a right click on Schedules and select Create Schedule.
A Create Schedule pane appears
Schedule Parameters
c) Schedule Type - Select either One Shot (continuous) or Periodic
(intervals).
d) Duration - If One Shot is selected: Select either Forever or Fixed.
If Periodic is selected: Only Fixed is applicable.
e) (secs) - If Fixed duration was selected: Enter the number of sec-
onds for the One Shot or Periodic test. If Schedule Type of One
Shot is selected, valid entries are 0 (continuous) through 9999
(seconds). If Schedule Type of Periodic is selected, valid entries
are 60 through 9999 (seconds).
f) Start Time - Select Now to execute an immediate ESA or select
Future for a scheduled ESA.
g) Start Time Entry Windows (yyyy-mm-dd) and (hh:mm:ss) - This
option is only applicable if Future start time is selected. When cur-
sor is placed in the yyyy-mm-dd data entry window and a mouse
click is entered, a calendar selection appears, allowing date
selection. When cursor is placed in data entry window and mouse
click is entered, a start time drop down selectable menu appears,
in 15 minute segments. Entry selection must be greater than the
current time.
h) Periodic Interval - If Schedule Type of Periodic is selected, spec-
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ify the interval between subsequent runs (in seconds). Range is 1
to 2147483647 (seconds).
Schedule Probes
i) Select the checkbox next to the desired probes this schedule is
assigned to.
Step 4 Select OK.
Step 5 Expand the Schedules entity and select the Schedule identifier to ver-
ify entry.
Step 6 Once a scheduled ESA has been activated, status results may be dis-
played: If required, expand the Probe entity in the Selection Tree. To
display ESA test results, select the desired active Probe and select
the Statistics tab.
Counts available are dependant upon which Protocol type has been
entered when creating the Probe and which report Group has been
selected from the Groups selection list (see Table 26).
Step 7 Select the desired display type of Table or Chart. See Figure 350 for
an example of ESA counts displayed in tabular format, and see
Figure 351 and Figure 352 for examples of ESA counts displayed in
chart format.
Step 8 Select the desired Counters to be displayed: General, Distribution,
Delay or Jitter. If Distribution is selected, also select the desired Distri-
bution Type to be displayed.
Counters may also be filtered by selecting the Filter button (see
Figure 353). Select or de-select individual counter or click the Select
All or Deselect All button in respective counter types to filter the dis-
End of Procedure
Probe Protocol
Report Group Count
Type
Probe to Reflector Packets
Reflector to Probe Packets
Probe to Reflector Errored Packets
Reflector to Probe Errored Packets
Lost Packets
Late Packets
General
Number of Gaps in Sequence Numbers
UDP Echo, Out of Sequence Errors
ICMP Echo,
Probe to Reflector Lost Packets
ICMP Timestamp
Y.1731 Reflector to Probe Lost Packets
Probe to Reflector Sync Errors
Reflector to Probe Sync Errors
Minimum Round Trip Delay
Maximum Round Trip Delay
Round Trip Delay Average Round Trip Delay
Sum of Round Trip Delays
Sum of Square of Round Trip Delays
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Data Frames
Y.1731 Reflector to Probe Data Frames
Y.1731 Y.1731
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Negative Loss Occurrences
Y.1731 Reflector to Probe Negative Loss Occurrences
Table 26: ESA Counts/Thresholds By Protocol Type and Report Group (Continued)
Probe Protocol
Report Group Count
Type
Probe to Reflector Minimum One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Maximum One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Average One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Sum of One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of One Way Delays
One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Minimum One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Maximum One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Average One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Sum of One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of One Way Delays
Probe to Reflector Minimum Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Maximum Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Number of Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Positive Jitters
ICMP Timestamp Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Positive Jitters
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Minimum Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Maximum Negative Jitters
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Probe to Reflector Number of Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Negative Jitters
Jitter
Reflector to Probe Minimum Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Maximum Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Number of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Minimum Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Maximum Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Number of Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Negative Jitters
Figure 352: ESA Round Trip Delay Distributed Statistics Results in Chart Format
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Figure 354: Exporting ESA Probe Statistics to Excel
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
required to support configuration of a Y.1731 ESA Probe.
Note
Procedure
MIPs are not created explicitly via eVision. For information on MIP
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 13 Enter/select the following MANET options:
Enter the desired MANET Index (1-64)
Select the desired name Format Type (Primary VID, String, Integer,
VPN ID, ICC Format)
Enter the MA Name contents (See Note)
Select the desired CCM Interval (3.3 Milliseconds, 10 Milliseconds,
100 Milliseconds, 1 Second, 10 Seconds, 1 Minute, 10 Minutes)
Enter the Maintenance Association MEP list by entering the first ID
number and select Add. Enter additional ID members and select Add,
as required. To delete an ID member, select the ID member to be
removed, and then select Delete.
Step 14 Select OK
PS
are: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, and _@#$%^*-+=:;.?(){}[]|? Spaces are not
allowed.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Level.
Configuration (ESA)
Select the desired LM and DM settings for LM In-Profile Only, LM TX
Count All Priorities, Dual-ended Count All Priorities, LM RX Count All
Priorities
Step 25 Select OK
Although the MEP Index appears above the MANET ID in the GUI
PS
CFM LLF triggers only work if the ports associated with the MEP are
configured to support LLF. If using RDI as a trigger, ensure the
Remote MEP’s fault priority is set higher than MAC STATUS (default
value) or the port may not recover from an RDI triggered deactivation
CAUTION
without intervention.
Step 26 Expand the associated Maintenance End Point entity interface in the
selection tree.
The new MEP is present in the selection tree
Step 27 Select the new MEP and verify the entry.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
VLAN Entry.
A Create VLAN Entry screen displays
To edit the Default MD Level and/or the MIP Creation Control, right
Note click on the access port and select “Edit Default MD Level”, then
select the desired MD Level and/or MIP Creation Control settings
from the drop-down lists and select OK.
Step 33 Select the access port associated with the VLAN entry in the selection
tree.
The VLAN data is displayed
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
a) If the VLAN data requires editing, right click on the interface and
select Edit VLAN Entry, click the “Edit” radio button for the VLAN
entry to edit and edit the VLAN data, then select OK.
b) To delete the VLAN entry, right click on the interface and select
Delete VLAN Entry and then select the delete button for the
desired entry and select OK.
c) To display the Default MD Level, click on the Default MD Level
tab. (see note at step 18)
The Default MD data is displayed
d) To edit the Default MD Level, right click on the access port and
select Edit Default MD Level, then select the desired MD Level
and MIP Creation Control setting and click on OK.
e) To display the CFM N2A Shaper data, click on the Shaper tab.
The CFM N2A Shaper data is displayed
f) To edit the Shaper data, right click on the access port and select
Edit Shaper, then enter the desired values for CIR and Buffer
Size and click on OK.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Edit Alarm Attributes, select the desired Notification Code(s) and then
select OK. Repeat for CFM QOS Shaper.
Step 38 Repeat Step through Step 37 for each node to be set up for Connec-
tivity Fault Management.
Step 39 Determine the next step.
Current Status Then
Do you wish to initiate a Loop Back Continue with the next step.
Message (LBM)?
Do you wish to initiate a Link Trace Go to Step .
Message (LTM)?
Is no further action required at this End of Procedure
time?
MEP is IS.
Note
Step 44 Go to Step 39
Step 46 Right click on the associated MEP interface in the selection tree and
select Linktrace
An Linktrace screen displays
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 47 Enter/select the following options for Link Trace:
Select the desired Destination Type (Drop-down list)
Select the desired Destination ID (Drop-down list)
Enter the desired TTL
Enable/Disable Use FDB Only (Drop-down list)
Edit the Egress ID if desired
Step 48 Select Start Linktrace.
MEP is IS.
Note
Step 49 Select the MEP Configuration tab and verify the status
For LTM, click on the LTR Database tab to view the Link Trace Reply
database.
End of Procedure
ECPA upstream injection (e.g., network port as the source port and
injecting in the N2A direction) with the source port of a LAG Member
Port is not expected to function properly when injecting untagged
frames and LAG protocols enabled. The injection of untagged frames
blocks LACP (because they are untagged) and causes the removal of
CAUTION
the port from the LAG function. The removal of the port from the LAG
also blocks all non-LACP frames from being forwarded on that port.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
mance Analyzer (ECPA) routine on an Access facility:
• Run Untagged ECPA Test on an Access Facility
• Run VLAN ECPA Test on an Access Facility
ECPA setup and execution options are available by entering a right click on the
NTE entity and selecting Run ECPA. An ECPA test setup window walks you
through the steps for selecting ECPA setup and execution options, and perform-
ing ECPA diagnostics. You can place a facility in the maintenance state, select
the desired tests to perform, execute diagnostics, view test results, and restore
the facility from this window. See Figure 364 for the ECPA test setup window
provided after the facility has been placed in the maintenance state.
The desired Source Port, Injector and Monitor direction, Test Type (and Dura-
tion or Frames as appropriate) and ECPA test stream assignments are also
selected and edited from this window.
The next step in the ECPA Test Process is running the test, which is invoked by
selecting the Run button from the ECPA test setup window. The ECPA test
results window will appear, displaying the current ECPA test status and results.
If multiple test streams are run, scroll down to review each ECPA test stream.
The screen refreshes itself when the test completes or is stopped. The test can
be canceled by selecting the Stop Test button.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The first ECPA test frame can be viewed by selecting the ECPA First Frame but-
tons located at the top of the ECPA view. See Figure 365 for the location of the
ECPA First Frame buttons. See Figure 366 for an example of ECPA First Frame
results.
The ECPA First Frame windows provide first frame result details, including
frame header, packet details and raw frame content for each ECPA test stream.
If more than one ECPA test stream was run, use the tabs to view the ECPA First
Frame for the desired ECPA test stream. To toggle back to the ECPA Test
Results window, select the ECPA Results button located at the top of the ECPA
First Frame results view. See Figure 366.
Procedure
Step 1 Create a remote loopback at the far end of the facility to be tested or
create a local loopback if internal testing is desired.
Step 2 Select Maintenance view, right click on “System” in the selection tree
and select Edit ECPA Streams.
An Edit ECPA Streams window appears
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The maintenance status window appears
Step 5 Select the ECPA Streams tab to verify ECPA Stream entry.
Step 6 Place the Access facility in the Maintenance state.
Step 7 Right click on the NTE entity (NTE11x) in the selection tree and select
Run ECPA.
An ECPA Status window appears
Step 8 Select the “Set Configuration” button.
An ECPA Set Configuration window appears
Step 9 Select the desired Source Port
Select “Maintenance” for the Administrative State
Select the desired Injector Type
Select the desired Monitor Type
Select the desired Test Type
If applicable, verify or edit the Test Duration
If applicable, verify or edit the Test Frames
Select the desired Test Stream for Test Stream A (Stream-1 was con-
figured in step 2)
Step 10 Select OK
An ECPA Status window appears
Step 11 Verify the Administrative State of the facility is in the Maintenance
state.
Step 12 Select the “Start Test” button to start the ECPA test.
ECPA Test Status changes to “In Progress”
Step 13 Observe the test status.
Step 14 Select Stop Test when desired, or wait until the test has completed.
Step 15 View completed ECPA test results
Step 16 Select “Set Configuration” and select “IS” for the Administrative State.
Select Apply
The Administrative State changes to IS
Step 17 Verify the restoration of the facility. Select OK
The ECPA status window appears
Step 18 Review the ECPA test results.
Step 19 If desired, retrieve the first frame received by selecting the desired
ECPA First Frame tab
The ECPA first frame received data is displayed
Step 20 Remove the local or remote loopback.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 1 Create a remote loopback at the far end of the facility to be tested or
create a local loopback if internal testing is desired.
Step 2 For Flow VLAN facility, create the appropriate VLAN member(s) that
will be used when creating ECPA test streams in the next step.
(Defaults for all 12 streams are: Outer VLAN, Inner VLAN1 and Inner
VLAN2: EtherType = 8100 (hex), Tag = 4094-1)
Step 3 Select Maintenance view, right click on “System” in the selection tree
and select Edit ECPA Streams.
An Edit Streams window appears
Step 4 Select the desired ECPA Stream and enter/select the following con-
figuration options:
Name
Edit the Name if desired
Configuration
Select the desired Payload Type
Enter the Frame Size (in Bytes)
Enter the desired Rate (in bps)
Enter the MAC Source Address
The rate should not exceed the facility/path rate, including overhead
PS
bytes.
Note
ensure that the packet reaches the proper destination, the destination
MAC address must be supplied here, and destination/source address
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Note
swapping must be requested as part of the loopback at the other end.
End of Procedure
Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 2 Right click on a desired Access Port and provision a flow (EPL or
EVPL) (see Provision Access Port Services on p. 255). Set the
Administrative State to IS. Click OK to save the settings.
The SAT Test Stream will use local MEP’s MAC address as its source
PS
MAC address. The local MEP is used to negotiate with the remote
SAT Responder and run delay measurement.
Note
Perform the following step at Site B (SAT Responder End): FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Make sure that the CFM settings at Site A and Site B are the same
PS
The destination MEP at Site B is created for the test stream and is
PS
used to negotiate with the local MEP and run delay measurement.
Note
Step 5 Connect the E1000-N-1 ports at Site A and Site B with a cable.
When SAT Control works in “One Way” mode, the SAT Responder
Control option should be Enabled (see Table 83 on p. 758) in
PS
c) Enter the CIR Test Step Duration, CIR Test Step Number, Test
Duration and Performance Test Duration.
d) Select desired Test Procedures by ticking the checkboxes
Click on OK.
Step 9 Expand the newly created SAT Control entity in the Selection Tree
and select the Configuration tab in the Detail Pane to view the SAT
Control settings.
Step 10 Right click on SAT Control and select Edit to make changes as
needed.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 11 From the SAT application, expand the System and SAC Profile enti-
ties.
Step 12 Right click on a SAT Profile ID and select Edit.
An Edit SAC Profile screen displays
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
One Local MEP and one Destination MEP can apply to all the four
PS
Test Streams.
Note
Step 20 Enter a right click on the SAT Control entity and select Run to start the
tests of all available streams.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Step 21 Scroll down the page and click on Start Test to run the test stream, or
click on Set Configuration to change the test stream settings.
The Status part in Run SAT Test Stream screen displays the test
progress, details and result associated with the test stream
The Run SAT Control screen displays the general test status, prog-
ress and overall result of each test stream
Only the test result of green packets will be compared against Service
PS
Frame Loss Ratio (FLR), Max Frame Transmission Delay (Max FTD)
and Max Frame Delay Variance (Max FDV) will be compared against
PS
the FLR, FTD and FDV set in SAC Profile. If any one of these
Note parameters cannot match with SAC criteria, a test will fail.
Step 24 Troubleshoot the parameter settings in flows, test streams and CFM
entities if a test fails.
There is a possibility that the FLR and FL Count for yellow packets
show extremely large values in EIR or Policing test result when Color
Mode is set to Color Aware. This is because the Responder end
PS
received more yellow packets than what the Control end sent. User
Note can troubleshoot this problem by balancing the CIR settings in the
test stream and the associated flow.
Step 25 Click on Export to save the test result as a .csv file to a specified
directory.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
End of Procedure
Introduction
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Procedure
Step 3 Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms, and record the
alarm severity. See Getting Familiar with eVision on p. 197 for an
overview of the eVision web browser management tool components
and the location of the Alarm Window.
Step 4 Determine which current alarm has the greatest service effect, and
record the alarm. Service-affecting (SA) critical alarms should be
cleared first, followed by Major SA alarms, and then Minor SA alarms.
Then any remaining non-service-affecting (NSA) major alarms should
be cleared, followed by any minor alarms.
Step 5 Locate the appropriate alarm indication description and suggested
troubleshooting techniques for the specific problem.
Step 6 Refer to Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing on
p. 537 for identifying, interpreting, and troubleshooting alarms.
Step 7 Refer to Connector and LED Descriptions on p. 114 for descriptions
of connectors and front-panel LED indications.
Step 8 After performing suggested trouble clearing actions, did the alarm or
status condition clear?
a) If YES:
Record the time the alarm was cleared, and continue with the
next step.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
b) If NO:
Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance (see
below).
Step 9 Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for all alarms.
Step 10 Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms. Have all alarm
conditions been cleared?
a) If YES:
Go to the next step.
b) If NO:
Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance (see
below).
Step 11 Log off all FSP 150CCs when finished.
End of Procedure
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
probable cause, default Notification Code and suggested trouble clearing proce-
dure. System components include the following subsystems:
• System
• Network Element
• PSE (GE114H/GE114PH)
• Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH)
• Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Alarms (GE114S/GE114SH)
• Network Port and Access Port Alarms
• CFM Maintenance End Point Alarms
• CFM QoS Shaper Alarms
• LAG Alarms
• SAT Responder Session Alarms
• ERP Alarms (GE114x)
Backup NTP Attempt to connect to the Backup 1) Verify that the IP address can be
Server Failed NTP Server failed.1 reached (respond to pings) by performing
both a ping and a trace route from the
management tunnel’s IP address.
2) Verify management communication
configuration. Minor N/A N/A
a) Target IP address connectivity a) Repair IP address connectivity or
or routing problem. routing problem.
b) No NTP server / NTP server b) Switch to Primary NTP Server. Repair
down. NTP server.
Data Base - File Database file transfer is in No action required.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
3G USB Modem
Link Down Link Down is generated when a Perform an Etherjack Diagnostic test.
physical connection is lost on the Repair the port using test results. N/A N/A N/A
port.
No SIM Card No SIM card is detected. Unplug the 3G modem, insert the SIM
card into the modem, and re-insert the N/A N/A N/A
3G modem into the USB port.
Modem is not The modem is not qualified by Install an ADVA Optical Networking
N/A N/A N/A
qualified ADVA Optical Networking. qualified 3G modem.
Modem 3G modem is removed from the Re-insert ADVA Optical Networking
N/A N/A N/A
Removed USB port. qualified 3G modem.
DCN Port
Link Down Cable disconnected, cable fault, Check physical cabling, MDIX is not
improper configuration. supported on DCN port. Check settings
on system to match DCN network Not
N/A N/A
requirements. Alarmed
NTE11x Shelf
Installation and Operations Manual
Over Equipment has exceeded the Check ambient temperature and adjust.
Temperature temperature limit (>= 90 C). Verify that airflow requirements are met.
Status
See Air Flow Requirement in FSP 150CC Minor N/A
Red
GE11x R6.1 Technical Descriptions
document.
Under System temperature has dropped Check ambient temperature and adjust.
Temperature below the minimum temperature Status
Minor N/A
threshold Red
(<= -50 C).
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PSE Group
pse-power-thres PSE Power Threshold Exceeded Check the PoE power budget and
Major N/A N/A
hold-exceeded s consumption for GE114PH.
pse-power-fail PSE power chip Communication Check the hardware of PSE sub-module.
Major N/A N/A
failed
PSE Port
pse-poweroff-ov PSE power off due to over current Check the maximum power allowed by POE
ercurrent the Port/interface. Major N/A Status
RED
pse-poweroff-ov PSE power off due to over voltage Check the hardware of pluggable PSU. POE
ervoltage Major N/A Status
RED
pse-poweroff-ov PSE power off due to over load Check the PoE port output power POE
er classification/allocation of PD. Major N/A Status
RED
pse-poweroff-ov PSE power off due to over Check the hardware of PSE sub-module. POE
ertemp temperature Major N/A Status
RED
pse-poweroff-sh PSE power off due to short circuit 1 Check the cable between PSE port
Installation and Operations Manual
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
10MHz (CLK) Port/Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port/Time Of Day (TOD) Port
QL Squelch Quality Level Squelch. The port is Verify and troubleshoot clock reference.
squelched due to the system's QL Make sure the system’s QL is higher than
being lower than the port's the port QL.
configured Squelch QL attribute.
The port's QL Mode attribute must Minor N/A N/A
be configured as enabled and the
Squelch QL attribute must be
configured as anything besides
None for this condition to exist.
BITS In Port
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
out”.
Time Reference Time Reference is not available. Verify and troubleshoot time reference.
Minor N/A N/A
Unavailable
Time Reference Time Reference is available and No action necessary.
Unavailable Wtr enters Wait-to-Restore state Minor N/A N/A
before recovery.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
address assigned to the management tunnel, and not the system IP address.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Refer to the following table for Precision Time Protocol (PTP) alarm conditions and their associated probable cause,
default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Sync Reference A Sync Reference has been restored and is No Action Required.
Minor N/A N/A
Wait To Restore in WTR timing.
Telecom Slave Telecom Slave in Freerun. The recovered Verify and troubleshoot clock
Not
in Freerun clock is the same as the internal oscillator reference and provisioning. N/A N/A
Reported
and the Telecom Slave is in freerun.
Telecom Slave Telecom Slave in Holdover. The recovered Verify and troubleshoot clock
Not
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Link Down - Link Down is generated when a Test and repair far end
Facility
Auto-Negotiation physical connection is lost on a good equipment.
Red
Failed link on the Ethernet interface port
Minor Critical
(Access or Network). Auto negotiation
Link/Rate
fault indicates the Far End is not
Off
advertising its auto negotiation rate.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Receiving Jabber The total number of packets received Verify the signal leaving the far
were longer than the MTU size, and end NID, through any inter-
had either a bad Frame Check mediate equipment, and at the
Facility
Sequence (FCS) with an integral near end. Probable Cause: Minor Major
Red
number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad Network problem, or possibly a
FCS with a non-integral number of bad cable. Repair faulty
octets (Alignment Error). equipment or cable.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
LAG Alarms
Refer to the following table for LAG alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and
suggested trouble clearing procedure.
Link Control Link control protocol failed. Check the configuration of the
Protocol Fail lag-based management tunnel
(Encapsulation Type PPP) and N/A Critical N/A
ensure it functions well; or
delete the management tunnel.
Link Control Link control protocol detected loopback. Remove loopback to clear
Protocol alarm. N/A Critical N/A
Loopback
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Alarm Masking
Refer to the following tables for alarm masking, where certain alarms or conditions may mask the raising of an underlying
condition, and until the “masking” alarms are cleared, the underlying alarms may not be seen.
System level alarms are not masked.
Table 36: Alarm Masking Rules
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
10MHz (CLK) Port / Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port / Time Of Day (TOD) Port
qlsqlch Output Squelch qlsqlch (no masking)
3G USB Modem
lnkdn Link Down linkdn Removed, not Nonqualified, not nosim
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
BITS Out
qlsqlch QL Squelch qlsqlch (no masking)
CFM MEP
ais Alarm Indication Signal ais (no masking)
erroneousccm Erroneous CCM erroneousccm and not crossconnectccm or ais
somemacstatus Some MAC Status somemacstatus and not crossconnectccm or erroneousccm or
someremotemepccm or ais
somerdi Some RDI somerdi and not crossconnectccm or erroneousccm or someremotemepccm or
somemacstatus or ais
someremotemepccm Some Remote MEP CCM someremotemepccm and not crossconnectccm or erroneousccm or ais
crossconnectccm Cross Connect CCM crossconnectccm and not ais
CFM QoS Shaper
Alarm Masking
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
Ethernet Port (Access Port and Network Port)
autonegunknown Duplex Mode of Farend autonegunknown and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
Device Unknown lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or
lnkdeactivated or rxjabber or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or
dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
bwexceedednegspeed Bandwidth Exceeds bwexceedednegspeed (no masking)
Negotiated Speed
dyinggasp Dying Gasp Received dyinggasp (no masking)
efmfail EFM OAM - Failure efmfail and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved
or lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or
sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrce EFM OAM - Remote Critical efmrce and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved
Event or lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or
sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrld EFM OAM - Remote Link efmrld and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved or
Down lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or
sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrls EFM OAM - Remote Link efmrls and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved or
Status lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or
sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
elmi-notoper ELMI Not Operating elminotoperational and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkflt or lnkdncbltstflt
Installation and Operations Manual
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
lcpfail Link Control Protocol Fail lcpfail and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkfault or lnkdncabletestfault or
lnkdncableremoved or lnkdncablefault or lnkdnautonegfailed or
lnkdnmasterslavecfg or lnkdeactivated or sgeomea or sgeoflt or sgeounplug or
sfprmv or sfpinserted or sfptxfault or sfpmea or dgasp
lcploopback Link Control Protocol lcploopback and not lcpfail or lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkfault or
Loopback lnkdncabletestfault or lnkdncableremoved or lnkdncablefault or
lnkdnautonegfailed or lnkdnmasterslavecfg or lnkdeactivated or sgeomea or
sgeoflt or sgeounplug or sfprmv or sfpinserted or sfptxfault or sfpmea or dgasp
lnkdeactivated Link Down - De-activated lnkdeactivated and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or
dyinggasp
lnkdn Link Down lnkdn and not lnkdeactivated
lnkdownautonegfailed Link Down - lnkdownautonegfailed and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault
Auto-Negotiation Failed or dyinggasp or lnkdeactivated or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
Alarm Masking
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
rmtefmlpbkfail EFM OAM - Remote rmtefmlpbkfail and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
Loopback Failed 1 lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or
sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
rxjabber Receiving Jabber rxjabber and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved
or lnkdowncablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or lnkdeactivated or SGEO or
sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
sfpmismatch SFP - Provisioning sfpmismatch and not sfpremoved or SGEO
Mismatch
sfpnonqualified SFP is not qualified sfpnonqualified, (no masking)
sfpremoved SFP - Removed sfpremoved and not SGEO
sfptxfault SFP - Transmit Fault sfptxfault and not sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or SGEO or dyinggasp
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
syncreffrc Sync Reference Forced syncreffrc (no masking)
Switch
syncreflck Sync Reference Locked Out syncreflck (no masking)
syncrefman Sync Reference Manual syncrefman (no masking)
Switch
syncrefwtr Sync Reference Wait To syncrefwtr (no masking)
Restore
testalarm Test Alarm testalarm, (no masking)
Installation and Operations Manual
GPS
gps-antenna-alarm-indi GPS Antenna Alarm (no masking)
cation Indication
timeref-degraded Time Reference Degraded (no masking)
timeref-degraded-wtr Time Reference Degraded (no masking)
Wtr
timeref-locked-out Time Reference Locked Out (no masking)
timeref-unavailable Time Reference Unavailable (no masking)
timeref-unavailable-wtr Time Reference Unavailable (no masking)
Wtr
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
LAG
lcpfail Link Control Protocol Fail lcpfail and not lnkdn or lnkdeactivated
lcploopback Link Control Protocol lcploopback and not lcpfail or lnkdn or lnkdeactivated
Loopback
lnkdeactivated Link Down - Deactivated lnkdeactivated (no masking)
lnkdn Link Down lnkdn and not lnkdeactivated
NTE Card
ctneqpt Communication Failure ctneqpt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
eqptflt Equipment Fault eqptflt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
mismatch Equipment Does Not Match mismatch and not eqptremoved
Provisioning
eqptremoved Equipment Provisioned But eqptremoved (no masking)
Alarm Masking
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
pse-power-fail PSE power chip no masking
Communication failed
PSE Port
pse-poweroff-overcurre PSE power off due to over no masking
nt current
pse-poweroff-overvolta PSE power off due to over no masking
ge voltage
pse-poweroff-over PSE power off due to over no masking
load
pse-poweroff-overtemp PSE power off due to over no masking
temperature
pse-poweroff-short PSE power off due to short no masking
circuit
SAT Responder Session
remote-initiated-sat Remote Initiated SAT remote-initiated-sat (no masking)
SOOC
ptsflossofannounce PTSF - Loss Announce ptsflossofannounce (no masking)
ptsflossofsync PTSF - Loss Sync ptsflossofsync (no masking)
ptsfunusable PTSF - Unusable ptsfunusable (no masking)
Synchronization
Installation and Operations Manual
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
losloc Sys Clock Mode - Loss of losloc (no masking)
Lock
System
bckupntpsvrFailed Backup NTP Server Failed bckupntpsvrFailed (no masking)
db-ftip Database - File Transfer In db-ftip (no masking)
Progress
dbdowngradeip DB Downgrade dbdowngradeip (no masking)
gen-filexfer-ip File Transfer In Progress gen-filexfer-ip (no masking)
gen-oper-ip Operation In Progress gen-oper-ip (no masking)
ipaddrconflict IP Address Conflict ipaddrconflict (no masking)
IPv6 Address Conflict (no masking)
ltpFailure LTP failure ltpFailure(no masking)
Alarm Masking
Condition Type
Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name
qlinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid (no masking)
qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not qlinvalid
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
syncreffrc Sync Reference Forced syncreffrc (no masking)
Switch
syncreflck Sync Reference Locked Out syncreflck (no masking)
syncrefman Sync Reference Manual syncrefman (no masking)
Switch
syncrefwtr Sync Reference Wait To syncrefwtr (no masking)
Restore
tsfreerun Telecom Slave In Freerun tsfreerun (no masking)
tsholdover Telecom Slave In Holdover tsholdover (no masking)
ts-in-time-freerun Telecom Slave In Time (no masking)
Freerun
ts-in-time-hldovr Telecom Slave In Time (no masking)
Holdover
tsholdoverfrqnotready Recovered Clock Not Hold- tsholdoverfrqnotready (no masking)
over Quality
Time Clock
time-clock-not-locked Time Clock Not Locked (no masking)
Installation and Operations Manual
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Chapter 7 Alarms, Events and Probable Causes, Error Codes
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Delete denied: _why_
Edit denied: _why_
Retrieve denied: _why_
Action denied: _why_
Where Why is:
System in Db Maintenance Mode
269 Operation denied: _why_
Create denied: _why_
Delete denied: _why_
Edit denied: _why_
Retrieve denied: _why_
Action denied: _why_
Where Why is:
Object is transient
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Cannot disable both Stag and Ctag for VLAN-based Tunnel
Cannot edit Network port 2
Cannot edit Protecting Port attributes
Cannot enable both Stag and Ctag for ITAG-based Tunnel
Cannot enable ITAG for Non ITAG BASED Tunnel
Cannot enable QL mode if Admin Sate is set to unassigned
Cannot enable QL Mode unless SyncE Mode is also enabled
Cannot enable SyncE on a port with speed of 10Mbps
Cannot enable SyncE if any network port has speed of 10Mbps
Cannot have both Primary and Backup server's IP addresses set to zero
Cannot modify A2N shaping type if the flow is not in UNASSIGNED state
Cannot modify A2N shaping type if the flow is not port-based
Cannot not suspend an active reflector
Cannot resume a reflector that is not suspended
Cannot resume a schedule that is not suspended
Cannot start non-suspended schedule
Cannot stop non-active schedule
Cannot suspend non-active schedule
Cannot unassign a port if the port is provisioned as Ring Port 0 ""or Ring Port 1
of an ERP instance
Can't reopen System Default Db
Can’t set DHCP option enable when DHCP is disable
Card (xxx) found in slot
Changing Service Type and Admin State is not allowed in one operation. Admin
State must first be changed to Unassigned
Chosen DMM Packet Interval consumes (xxx)
CIR and EIR cannot both be 0
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ITAG is not allowed when Access Interface Learning Confront is enabled
ITAG is not allowed when Network Interface Learning Control is enabled
(itagctrltype) is not supported
ITAG ID of (xxx) conflicts with ITAG ID of (yyy)
ITAG ID (*) of (xxx) conflicts with ITAG ID (*) of (yyy)
JDSU Loopback Control cannot be enabled when the port is in (xxx)
JDSU Loopback Control is enabled on (xxx)
LAG member (xxx) does not belong to unit
LLF Trigger has duplicate values
LLF triggers are not supported on service based down MEP
Bridging Security is enabled
Loopback already exists
Loopback is active on Port
(loopbackconfig) is not available when a Management Tunnel is on the port and
Management Traffic Bridging is enabled
(loopbacktype) is not available when a Management Tunnel is on (xxx) whose
working path is (yyy) and Management Traffic Bridging is enabled
MAC address is Broadcast
MAC address is NULL
MA COMP's (eid) Primary VID (xxx) cannot be in VID list
Management port (portid) (name) cannot be in (xx) state when Management
Traffic Bridging is enabled
Management Traffic Bridging must be enabled when Management Traffic
Management Traffic Bridging cannot be enabled when Proxy ARP is enabled
MA name is too long
MA NET Name should be set when changing the MA NET format
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Operation not allowed in current state
Out of range. Enter a 2 byte integer
PBB frame is not applicable when JDSU loopback is enabled on (xxx)
PBB frame is not applicable when Network Interface Learning Control is
enabled
PBB frame is not applicable when Access Interface Learning Control is enabled
Port speed of 10 Mbps requires SyncE to be disabled on all network ports
Preserve STag properties is allowed only if STag Control is SWAPVID
Proxy ARP cannot be enabled when Management Traffic Bridging is enabled
Please point out which port should be switched
Port based Down MEP with more than 1 remote MEP is not supported
Port based Up MEP is now allowed on network ports
Port does not exist for (xxx)
Port is a FROM PORT of Network Element (xxx)
Port (xxx) is SHG member
Port (xxx) is provisioned as SYNCREF
Port OAM is enabled
Port QL Mode is enabled
Port Rx Pause is enabled
Port based Up MEP is not allowed on access ports
Port Level Up MEP and VID level Up MEP cannot exist together on the same
port
Primary vid [xxx] found in the VID list of [eid]
Primary VID cannot be in the VID list
Primary VID MANET name is not same as MACOMP primary VID (xxx)
Probe source IP and destination IP cannot be same
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
There is already one Ipv6OverIpv4 Tunnel in the system
The Shaping Type of the flow is PORT-BASED
The static default route already exists
The Untagged flag must be Disabled, when Vlan is set
This entity has an active ESA Probe (xxx)
There has been a zero prefix length address in other interface, only allow one
VID member (xxx)
VID member (xxx) is used by (yyy)
VID list cannot be empty
This will cause MIPs limit to exceed
This object cannot be deleted
Tunnel already exists on (xxx)
Tunnel index must be from 1 to 255
Tunnel IP address is being used as system source IP address
Tunnel IP address is being used by SNMP v1 trap PDU
VLAN member (xxx) already exists at position (xxx)
VLAN member (xxx) does not exist
VPN OUI out of range (0 .. 0xFFFFFF)
When A2N PBB Frames is enabled, th combination of CTAG control and STAG
control are just allowed (NONE, NONE) and (PUSH, PUSH)
When A2N PBB Frames is enabled, the Untagged Frames must be enabled.
When ITAG control is set, ITAG ID must be provisioned with a non-zero value.
When the Flow has pushed S-Tag, the Outer Vlan Ethertype must be 0x88a8
When the Flow has pushed C-Tag, the Outer Vlan Ethertype must be ox8100
Two vlan entries cannot have the same VID list for the same port
USM Security Name used by Target Parameter
Valid Until date is in the past
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
(xxx) not supported for Service Mode (yyy) (IPort Mode)
(xxx) not supported for UNTAGGED frames
(xxx) not supported on CP unit
(xxx) Out Of Range (xxx MIN...yyy MAX)
(xxx) requires valid address/mask
(xxx) speed not supported on (yyy)
(xxx) state is not supported
A port in the reference selector list cannot be unassigned
A Reference entity must Access, Network or BitsIn port
Address cannot be broadcast, multicast, or begin with 0.
Address cannot be (xxx)
Address cannot be broadcast
Address cannot be broadcast, mutlicast or all 0's.
Address cannot be experimental address
Address cannot be Loopback
Address cannot be loopback, broadcast, multicast, or begin with 0
Address cannot be multicast
Address cannot begin with 0
An Ethernet port in the reference selector list cannot be configured as (xxx)
Attribute missing - authentication key
Attribute missing - authentication protocol
Because Service type is in (xxx) mode
Bin index = (xxx) not in range
Cannot be empty
Cannot configure (xxx) loopback type
Cannot create (xxx) flow
Cannot create (xxx) flow with VLAN members
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Not a valid IP mask
NTP is disabled
Only (xxx) can be created
Only (xxx) IP route can be created
Only 1 (xxx) Flow may exist on Port
Only 1 is allowed as MA COMP index
Only InService and Management states are valid
Out of Range (0...7)
Out of Range (1...100)
Out of Range (xxx MAX)
Out of Range (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)
Password cannot be “password” or “passw0rd”
Password contains character sequence
Password same as username
Password too long
Password too short
Pathname is empty
Periodic schedule cannot have forever duration
Port belongs to different unit.
Port disposition is set to (xxx) or (yyy)
Port does not exist for (xxx)
Port must be Network Port 1
Port service type is (xxx)
Port shaping is disabled
Port speed of 10 Mbps requires SyncE to be disabled
Priority Out Of Range (xxx MIN… yyy MAX)
Probe's Source MEP
Protocol cannot be none
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Password is same as username
520 Invalid IP Address.
521 Invalid Network Mask.
522 Outer VLAN Tag Control must be enabled to enable Inner VLAN Tag Control.
523 _entityname_ does not exist.
524 Attribute cannot be set _why_
Where Why is:
Because maximum (xxx) number of MEP members has been reached
Because Service type is in (xxx) mode
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
829 Transfer execute failed
830 Error string returned
831 Bad archive file
832 Error syncing with scu
833 Error processing topology change event
834 SCU push failed
835 Flash erase failed
836 Flash partition sync failed
837 Install Failed
838 Activate Failed
839 Cancel Activate Failed
840 Validate Failed
841 Revert Failed
842 Operation not allowed in current state
843 Invalid Validation Time
844 Invalid Reboot Time
845 Operation not allowed: Database upload in progress
846 Operation not allowed: Database download in progress
847 Operation not allowed: Database backup in progress
848 Operation not allowed: Database restore in progress
849 Operation not allowed: Software download in progress
850 Operation not allowed: Software install in progress
851 Operation not allowed: Software upgrade in progress
852 Operation not allowed: Software validate in progress
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Provisioning Rules
Introduction
This chapter provides technical data for the FSP 150CC-GE11x serials. The fol-
lowing is provided:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Administration State
There are a number of rules related to the behavior of the Administrative state
as it relates to the parent/child relationship of objects. For example, there are
certain states for a child that are 'invalid' if the parent state is not already in that
state. The administrative state model consists of the following states:
• IS (in-service) - this is the 'normal' state for an entity that is configured to be
fully operational.
• Management - this is referred to as the “Out of Service” state. In this state,
all alarms for the entity will be squelched. Any Standing Alarm will be
cleared and re-raised as a non-alarmed (NA) condition. The intended use of
this state is to squelch alarms that the user is not interested in. In addition,
for any 'traffic affecting' provisioning change, the entity should be put into
this state (although there is no enforcement of this requirement). The addi-
tional characteristics associated with this state are that the user data and
management traffic will continue to flow.
• Maintenance - this is ALSO an “Out of Service” state (i.e., it inherits the
properties described above). The additional characteristic associated with
this state is that 'maintenance' operations are allowed to be performed
against an entity in this state which may affect user data or management
data. Maintenance state operations include things like Loopback, Etherjack
diagnostic, etc.
• Disabled - this is ALSO an “Out of Service” state (i.e., it inherits the proper-
ties described above). The additional characteristic associated with an
entity in this state is that no user data traffic will pass. The intended use of
this state is to allow the user traffic to be 'disabled' while still preserving
management connectivity with the entity.
• Unassigned - this state is essentially equivalent to an entity being 'deleted'.
An entity in this state is not factored into any of the rules checking and will
not be alarmed or carry traffic. The Administrative State must first be set to
Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type of a Network Port or
Access Port.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ALL members of the “Out-Of-Service” (OOS) state. An entity transitional
between any of these three states does not have any impact on it's Parent or
Child entities.
• The equipment Administrative state model will only utilize the In-service and
Management states
• When in the Management or Maintenance state, all alarms against that
entity will be suppressed. The entity will otherwise function as normal.
• When in the Disabled state, user data traffic is suppressed.
• In order to perform maintenance actions on an entity (e.g., Loopback, Diag-
nostics, etc.) the entity must first be put into the Maintenance state.
• An entity in the Disabled state will not pass user data traffic. Management
traffic (i.e. Management Tunnel traffic and EFM OAM) will continue to pass
in this state.
• The Operational State of an entity can be either:
o Normal
o Outage
• The facility Administrative state model will utilize all states described above.
The exception to this is the following: The Disabled State only applies to
Access Ports. Network Ports do not support the Disabled state. In regards
to Network Ports, the Unassigned State does not apply to the working Net-
work port. The working Network port cannot be Unassigned.
• The DCN facility Administrative state model is limited to the following states:
o In-service
o Management
o Unassigned
way that it affects the Port's Administration state, the above rules will
apply such that the effect is propagated to the Port's child entities
Note
also.
Due to the many-to-one relationship between Port entities and EVCs (Flows),
the following behaviors will be implemented:
• editing a Port entity from Management, Maintenance or Disabled to In-Ser-
vice will result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being
changed from Management to In-Service. If an EVC was Unassigned prior
to the edit of the Port state, it will remain Unassigned.
• editing a Port entity from Unassigned to Management, Maintenance or Dis-
abled will result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
changed to Management.
• editing a Port entity from Unassigned to In-Service will result in ALL EVCs
(Flows) that are children of that Port being changed to In-Service.
This effect will also occur as a result of an edit of the EVC's parent
entity. For example, if the Port entity state is edited in such a way that
PS
it affects the EVC's Admin state, the above rules will apply such that
Note the effect is propagated to the EVC's child entities also.
Operational State
This attribute contains the current actual state of the entity. It is based on the
provisioned state plus the actual physical state of the entity.
Secondary State
This attribute refines or provides added information regarding the Operational
State of the entity.
Refer to the following table for state values and their definitions.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Current State Database Download Database download.
Database Restore Database restore.
Database Upload Database upload.
Idle Idle.
Rebooting Rebooting.
Software Cancel Upgrade Software cancel upgrade.
Software Download Software download.
Software Install Software install.
Software Upgrade Software upgrade.
Software Validate Software validate.
Software Revert Software revert.
Protection Group FORCED PROTECT Forced to Protect.
Status FORCED WORKING Forced to Working.
LOCKOUT PROTECT Lockout to Protect.
MANUAL PROTECT Manual to Protect.
MANUAL WORKING Manual to Working.
NO OUTSTANDING REQUEST There is no outstanding request.
SD PROTECT Signal Degrade on Protect.
SD WORKING Signal Degrade on Working.
SF PROTECT Signal Failure on Protect.
SF WORKING Signal Failure on Working.
WAIT TO RESTORE Wait to restore.
tion regarding navigating and using the eVision, see Chapter 3: eVision Web
Browser Management Tool.
This section provides the following configuration settings information:
• Factory Default Parameters and Maximum Bandwidth on p. 606
• System Configuration Options and Rules on p. 618
• Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options and Rules on p. 652
• LAG Configuration Rules on p. 656
• Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on p. 661
• Access Port Configuration Options and Rules on p. 666
• Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules on p. 701
• IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules on p. 707
• CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709
• LLDP Configuration Settings on p. 713
• Loopback Settings on p. 714
• Environmental Alarms Settings - GE114H/GE114PH on p. 717
• Performance Monitoring Settings on p. 717
• ESA Options and Rules on p. 746
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Scheduled ESA Activity Settings on p. 750
• CFM Configuration Options and Rules on p. 752
• PTP Configuration Options and Rules (GE114S/GE114SH) on p. 763
• SAT Configuration Options and Rules on p. 783
HTTPS Enabled
FTP Disabled
SFTP Enabled
System SCP Enabled
Authentication Traps Disabled
SSL Cipher Strength Low
CLI Security Prompt Disabled
SNMP Engine ID (variable)
Management Traffic Disabled
Bridging
Mgmt Traffic Bridging Disabled
Security
Security Log Syslog Disabled
Syslog Disabled
Alarm Log
Local Logging Enabled
Syslog Disabled
Audit Log
Local Logging Enabled
Log Server Method User Defined
Log Server 1, 2, 3 IPv4 0.0.0.0
Syslog
IP Address
Log Server 1, 2, 3 Port 514
IP Version IPv4
Access Control IPv4 Address 0.0.0.0
List (ACL)
Network Mask 255.255.255.255
(entries 1-10)
Control Disabled
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
CLI Prefix NE-1
MEF BWP Line Rate
Administrative State IS
NTE11x Alias (blank)
Configuration Administrative State IS
(e.g., SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled
NTE114H-1-1-1)
Alias (blank)
Administrative State E1000-N-1 = IS
E1000-N-2 = Unassigned
Network Element Media Type Copper
MTU 9612
MDIX Auto
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
ELMI Control Disabled
T392 Timeout 15
N393 Count 4
Async Status Enabled
Min Async Status 1
Interval
Alias (blank)
Administrative State Unassigned
Network Element Media Type Copper
(Continued) MTU Size 9600
MDIX Auto
Configured Speed Auto
Auto Diagnostic Enabled
Drop Eligibility Indicator Enabled
Service Type EPL
Ethernet Access
Port Facility AFP AFP ALL
Q in Q Ethertype 0 (hex)
Q in Q Ethertype Disabled
Override
802.3 Pause RX Disabled
802.3 Pause TX Disabled
Port Shaping Disabled
Port Shaped Speed 0
Link Loss Forwarding Disabled
Port LLF Status
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Basic Optional TLVs Port Descriptions, System
Name, System Description,
System Capabilities
ELMI Configuration
ELMI Control Disabled
T392 Timeout 15
N393 Count 4
Async Status Enabled
Network Element Min Async Status 1
(Continued) Interval
Alias (blank)
Administrative State IS
DCN (eth0)
Configured Speed Auto
MDIX Auto
Alias (blank)
Administrative State IS
APN N/A
3G Modem Dial # N/A
Redial Timer 10
User Name N/A
Password =**
Alias (blank)
PSU
Administrative State IS
PT Flow PT FLOW-1-1 (PT Flow not created at
factory default)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Squelch QL QL-NONE
Alias (blank)
Administrative Unassigned
PPS generation 3SATS
GPS-1-1-1-1
condition
Antenna Cable Length, 5
m
IP Address 192.168.0.1
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP Disabled
eth0 (DCN) DHCP Role DHCP Client
RIPv2 false
DHCP Client ID Control false
DHCP Client ID FSP150CC-GE112/GE114/G
E114H/ GE114PH
Entity ID 1
Communications
Tunnel Name LTP
Associated Port NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
Encapsulation Type Ethernet
Mgmt Tunnel-1
IP Mode IPv4 Only
(E1000-N-1)
IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
DHCP Enabled
DHCP Log Server Disabled
Control
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Engine ID local
Security Name PROVISION
Security Level No Authentication
User Access Type Read/Write
Authentication Protocol None
Privacy Protocol None
SNMP Dying Gasp SNMP Dying Gasp (no target addresses are
provisioned, thus this option
is disabled)
Local User netadmin
Login netadmin
Password ChgMeNOW
Privilege Provisioning (3)
CLI Paging Enabled (1)
Comment Default User
Local Users Login Timeout 15 (minutes)
Administration
Local User root
Login root
Password ChgMeNOW
Privilege Superuser (4)
CLI Paging Enabled (1)
Comment Default User
Login Timeout 15 (minutes)
All maximum values shown in the above table are indicative of a port
without a management tunnel, which utilizes a configurable amount of
PS
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
System configuration options and rules consist of the following entities, which
are provided in Table 42:
• System Configuration
• Network Element (NE-1) Configuration
• NTE11x Configuration
• PT Flows (GE114x)
• Protection Groups (NE-1)
• Power Supply Equipment (GE114PH)
• LAG
• SHG
• Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH)
• Communications
• SNMP
• Administration
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
can be used for file transfer.
HTTP Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol Enabled
access to the system. If enabled, the user can access Disabled
the GUI interface using HTTP. Note: HTTP is an
unsecured protocol. Using this protocol to access the
system could compromise the security of the system.
HTTPS Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol Enabled
Secure access to the system. If enabled, the user can Disabled
access the GUI interface using HTTPS.
SSL Cipher Sets the strength of the SSL cipher. Encryption Low
Strength strength is measured in key length — number of bits in Medium
the key. To decipher an SSL communication, one High
needs to generate the correct decoding key. Mathe-
matically speaking, 2n possible values exist for an
n-bit key. Thus, 40-bit encryption (low) involves 240
possible values, 56-bit encryption (medium) involves
256 combinations, and 128-bit encryption (high) 2128
possible combinations.
Changing the SSL strength setting results in
disconnecting all active web access users, requiring
them to re-login.
SCP Enables or disables Secure Copy Protocol access to Enabled
the system. If enabled, SCP can be used for file Disabled
transfer.
Serial Port Enables or disables RS-232 serial port access to the Enabled
system. Disabled
************************************************************
*
This is a private system. Unauthorized access or
use may lead to prosecution.
************************************************************
*
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Network Mask Network Mask for the user/subnet IP address allowed
to access the GE11x. Up to 10 user/subnetwork IP
255.255.255.255
address and Network Mask combinations can be
entered (ACL ID 1-10).
Control Each Network Address/Network Mask combination Enabled
can be Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.
Disabling the ACL filtering will “deny” the
corresponding management traffic. Enabled entries Disabled
apply to all management interfaces.
Security Banner (Edit Banner)
Banner Defines a custom security banner (a text string of up This is a private
to 2000 characters in length) which is displayed when system. Unauthorized
a user logs onto the system. This banner is displayed access or use may
on CLI and web browser logins. lead to prosecution.
System Time of Day (Edit System Time of Day)
System Time of Selects the desired system Time of Day mode. Local
Day NTP
• Local: the Time of Day is based on the local oscil-
lator.
• NTP: the Time of Day is updated based on an PTP
external NTP server. (GE114S/GE114SH)
•
If System Time of Day is set to Local:
NE-1 (Edit)
Name This is a text string containing a meaningful
description of the NE. The NE Name must start with a up to 256 characters
letter, end with a letter or digit, and have as interior FSP150CC-GE112/
characters only letters, digits, and hyphens. GE114/ GE114H/
Maximum length is 256 characters. Upper and lower GE114PH
case characters are allowed.
Location This is a text string entry that should specify where
the system is located with enough detail so that up to 256 characters
operations personnel can easily locate the device. (blank)
Maximum length is 256 characters.
Contact This is a text string entry that should specify the
name and contact information of the individual up to 256 characters
responsible for the administration of the system. (blank)
Maximum length is 256 characters.
CLI Prefix When using CLI, this string is displayed when
navigating to the Network Element level menu. This up to 64 characters
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters NE-1
long, but cannot use the “space” character.
Bwp Mode Select the desired Bandwidth profile (BWP). Linerate
Changing the BWP mode is not allowed while there
Inforate
are active SAT tests.
Administrative Defines the NE administrative state. IS is In Service IS
State and is the default value. See Entity State
Descriptions on p. 599. Management
NTE11x Configuration
GE11x (Edit)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Defines the GE11x administrative state. IS is In IS
State Service and is the default value. See Entity State
Management
Descriptions on p. 599.
SNMP Dying Enables or disables dying gasp message via SNMP. Enabled
Gasp When enabled, OAM dying gasp messages are sent Disabled
on EFM-enabled interfaces.
Network Ports and Access Ports
See Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on p. 661 and Access Port Configuration
Options and Rules on p. 666.
DCN (eth0) (Edit Configuration)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
User Label User Label associated with the ERP instance. Up to up to 64 characters
64 characters are allowed. (blank)
Administrative Defines the ERP administrative state. IS is In Service IS
State and is the default value. See Entity State Management
Descriptions on p. 599.
IS is normal operation. Management suppresses
alarms. Disabled initiates blocking on ring port 0 and
stops all RAPS processing and forwarding.
The ERP instance must be in the Management or Disabled
Disabled state when modifying the following ERP
instance attributes: RAPS VLAN Tag, Ring Port 0/1,
Ring Port 0/1 RPL Role, RAPS Ring ID, RAPS MD
Level and Sub-Ring without Virtual Channel.
RAPS Node ID Node ID of the local system for this ERP instance.
The value is used as the Node ID in the RAPS PDU.
For each node in the ring, a unique node ID identifies
each node. The node ID is the node's MAC address.
You can configure this node ID when configuring the
ring on the node or automatically select an ID such as Default values:
STP. In most cases, you will not configure this and DCN (eth0) MAC
the router will select a node ID, like STP does. It address
should be the manufacturing MAC address. The ring
node ID should not be changed, even if you change
the manufacturing MAC address. Any MAC address
can be used if you make sure each node in the ring
has a different node ID.
RAPS Tag The VID value of the VLAN tag for transmit-
0x8100-0x88a8
EtherType ted/received RAPS PDUs for this ERP instance.
RAPS MD Level The MD (or MEG) level of the transmitted/received
RAPS PDUs for this ERP instance. It is recom-
mended set it at higher level or same MD level as the
Down MEP to allow RPL failure CCMs. 0-7
1
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
Management Selects whether this ERP instance is protecting man- Enabled
Tunnel agement Tunnels on the ring ports.
Disabled
Protection
Revertive Revertive control for the ring. Only applicable on the Enabled
RPL Owner node. Disabled
Guard Time The Guard Time value for this ERP instance. Used by
all nodes when changing state; the guard timer
10-2000 (ms)
blocks latent outdated messages from causing
500
unnecessary state changes. Settable from
10-2000ms in steps of 10ms.
Wait-to-Restore The Wait-to-Restore (WTR) time value for this ERP
Time instance. The WTR timer is used to verify that the sig- 1-12 (minutes)
nal failure is not intermittent. Settable from 1-12 min- 5
utes in steps of 1 minute.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
Ring Port 0/1 The Ring Protection Link (RPL) Role of Ring Ports Owner
RPL Role (Ring Port 0= the ID of Ring Port 1, Ring Port 1= the Neighbor
ID of Ring Port 2).
Owner – owner or ERP ring instance, responsible for
blocking traffic over the RPL so that no loops are
formed in the Ethernet traffic. There can be only one
RPL owner in a ring.
Neighbor – An Ethernet ring node adjacent to the RPL
owner. It is responsible for blocking its end of the None
RPL under normal conditions. This node type is
optional and prevents RPL usage when protected.
None – Other members ports.
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
Ring Port 0/1 The ID of MEP monitoring Ring Ports for this ERP None
MEP instance (Ring Port 0= the ID of Ring Port 1, Ring
Port 1= the ID of Ring Port 2). Allows a
tagged/untagged MEP to be used for port monitoring
(do not always use the port MEP). Must be a Down
(drop down list of
MEP and must be associated with the Network port
provisioned MEPs)
identified in the associated Ring Port (ringPort0/ring-
Port1). Provides added value when RAPS and ser-
vice frames are passed through intermediated nodes
that do not participate in this ERP instance.
Power Pairs Which pair in the Ethernet cable is used to carry Alternative A
power:
• Alternative A: that the signal pairs (1/2 and 3/6)
are used. Alternative B
• Alternative B: The spare pairs (4/5 and 7/8) are
used.
PSE Port Type A description about the PSE port, usually related to
up to 255 characters
the type of powered device that is connected to the
(blank)
port.
Available Power Which Power Level is allowed on this port. Class1 (4.00 Watts)
Level
When the Power Level is exceeded, PSE alarm is Class2 (7.00 Watts)
raised.
Class0&3 (15.40
Watts)
Class4 (30 Watts)
LAG
Create/Edit/Delete - See LAG Configuration Rules on p. 656
SHG
NE-1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
the Member to be deleted from the Members List and
clicking on ‘Delete’. (drop down list of
• A Member List with a combination of Network applicable Network
Ports and Access Ports is not allowed. Ports and Access
Ports
• A Member List with a combination of Network
Ports and Access Port LAG is not allowed.
• A Member List with a combination of Access
Ports and Network Port LAG is not allowed.
• The ports used in ERP instance and Protection
Group cannot be selected as SHG members.
Synchronization (GE114S/GE114SH)
NE-1
NTE114S/NTE114SH
SYNC-1-1-1-1 (Edit Sync)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Defines the SYNC administrative state. IS is In IS
State Service and is the default value. See Entity State
Management
Descriptions on p. 599.
Network Clock Select the desired Network Clock Type. Option 1-SDH
Type Regional Clock
Option 2-SONET
Regional Clock
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
QL- ST2
QL-TNC
QL- ST3E
QL-EEC2
QL- SMC
QL- PROV
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Add Time Clock Reference) - GE114SH
Note: A valid Sync Reference source must first be configured and In Service prior to adding a Sync
Reference.
TIMEREF Index Unique identifier of a time clock reference entity.
While the Syncref Index is automatically indexed as
sync references are added, a dropdown list of 1
available indexes is provided for the user to select
the desired one.
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Priority Sets the priority for a sync reference. If the Selection
1-10
Mode is set to ‘Priority Mode’ this setting is used to
1
determine the sync reference hierarchy.
Time Clock Dropdown list of available sync references. GPS
GPS-1-1-1-1
Reference input is the default and only option.
Sources
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Edit Time Clock Reference) - GE114SH
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
QL-EEC1
BITS-OUT (Edit Configuration)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Defines the BITS-Out administrative state. Unassigned
State IS
Management
Line Type Sets the BITS line type. If a 2048kHz or E1 is the E1
desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock Type T1
should be set to “Option 1". If a T1 is the desired
BITS Line Type, then Network Clock Type should be
set to “Option 2". AIS or LOF will be detected at the
BITS interface endpoints if mismatches of the FSP
150CC's Network Clock Type and the FSP 150CC's 2048 kHz
line-type are provisioned. Line Type should be set
prior to selecting other BITS OUT Configuration
options.
Line Code Sets the BITS line code. If Line Type is set to E1, E1 HDB3
then the options available are E1 HDB3 and E1 AMI. E1 AMI
If Line Type is set to T1, then the options available T1 B8ZS
are T1 B8ZS and T1 AMI. If Line Type is set to 2048
kHz, then this option is not applicable. T1 AMI
QL-EEC1
QL-DNU
Line Build Out Option to set impedance for cable length or dB. Only 0-133 Ft
applicable if Line Type is “T1”. 133-266 Ft
266-399 Ft
339-533 Ft
533-655 Ft
7.5 dB
15 dB
22.5 dB
CLK-1-1-1-1 (Edit Configuration)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Define the CLK Administrative State. Unassigned
IS
Management
Signal Direction Specify the signal direction on this port. Output
Frequency Frequency Source Equipment Identifier. Drop down None
Source EID list of available PTP reference sources. The Telecom
(drop down list of
Slave has to be configured for PTP operation and be
available Frequency
in a proper admin state to appear on the drop down
Source EIDs)
list.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PPS-1-1-1-1 (Edit Configuration)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up to
(blank)
64 printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Define the PPS Administrative State. Unassigned
IS
Management
Signal Direction Specify the signal direction on this port. Output
Cable Delay Configure the PPS port input delay compensation,
Compensation which is used when PPS source does not allow delay
0 - 80 (nsec)
compensation configuration or PPS distribution
equipment is used.
Source Eid Source Equipment Identifier. Drop down list of
available PTP reference sources. The Telecom Slave (drop down list of
or Time Clock has to be configured for PTP operation available Source Eids)
and be in a proper admin state to appear on the drop
down list.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Length, m antenna. 5
Communications
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
IPv6 management
the drop-down list for selection. If Management
interface EIDs)
Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 if configured
with IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface
Name.
Note: To view IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, select the IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry tab. To delete an
existing IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection
Tree and select Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, then select the desired IPv6 static proxy ND
entry to delete, then select OK.
Source Address Config (Edit Source Address Config)
Address Type Specifies whether the System IP Address or the Outgoing Interface IP
Outgoing IP Interface's Address should be used in
System IP Address
outgoing IP PDUs.
Source Address Specifies the IP interface name when Address Type eth0
Interface Name is set to “System IP Address.” The IP Address Configured
associated with the IP interface name is set as the Management Tunnel
source IP Address in outgoing PDUs. entries
Snmp v1 Specifies the IP interface name, which will be used in eth0
Interface Name the SNMPv1 TRAP PDUs as the Agent's IP Address. Configured
Management Tunnel
entries
DCN (eth0) (Edit Configuration)
IP Mode Select the desired IP mode setting for DCN port. IPv4 Only
IPv6 Only
IPv4 and IPv6
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
this option is not editable, as the System Name will
be used automatically; if DHCP Host Name Type is User-defined string
User Defined, user is allowed to enter a customized
string up to 254 characters.
DHCP Log Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP Log Server Disabled
Server Control (DHCP Option 7) list sent by the DHCP server. Enabled
DHCP NTP Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP NTP Server Disabled
Server Control (DHCP Option 42) list sent by the DHCP server. Enabled
Edit System Selecting the checkbox allows editing the Gateway IP (checkbox,
Default Gateway Address. Only applicable if DHCP is Disabled. unselected)
Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if the “Edit System
(grayed out)
Address Default Gateway” checkbox is selected.
IPv6 Unicast Enter an IPv6 unicast address for the DCN port. This 0000:0000:0000:0000:
Address option is only applicable when DHCPv6 is disabled 0000:0000:0000:0000
and DHCPv6 Role is Client. /0
Stateless When the NE is working in router mode (IPv6 Disabled
Address Auto Forwarding enabled), this option must be Disabled.
Configuration When the NE is working in host mode (IPv6 Enabled
Forwarding disabled), this option can be Enabled.
DHCPv6 Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Disabled
Protocol (DHCP) is enabled or disabled. If this
interface is set to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to
DHCP Client, the GE11x sends a broadcast query Enabled
requesting IPv6 address information from a DHCP
server.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Target User defined text/number string used to identify this
up to 32 characters
Parameter Name set of target parameters. Entry can be up to 32
(blank)
characters long.
Security Model Drop-down list for selection of a security model for SNMPv1
this set of target parameters. SNMPv2c
USM
Security Level Sets the security level for the new Target Parameter. No Authentication
Only applicable if Security Level USM is selected. Auth/No Priv
Auth/Priv
Security Name Drop down list of available security names for private
SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. public
Drop down list of available security names for USM. ADMIN
MONITOR
OPERATOR
PROVISION
Note: To delete an existing Target Parameter, right click the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree,
select Delete Target Parameter, select an Target Parameter from the selection list, and click OK.
Add / Delete USM User (see Note)
User Name Entry for a valid user name. Valid entry contains only
1 to 32 characters
1 to 32 of the following characters are accepted: "a-z
(blank)
A-Z 0-9 ._-".
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
selection box and click on OK.
Dying Gasp (Edit Dying Gasp)
SNMP Dying Dropdown list for each configured Target Address to
Gasp Enable or Disable SNMP Dying Gasp on that Target (No Target Addresses
Address. At System Defaults, no Target Addresses Exist)
are configured.
Administration
User.
Login Timeout Login timeout for the user ID (in minutes). Only a
0 (no logout timer) to
(mins) Superuser may edit a user login timeout value. This
99 (minutes)
option is available when selecting Add User or Edit
15 (minutes)
User.
CLI Paging If the response to a CLI command fills more than one Enabled
screen, the response is divided into multiple pages if
this option is enabled. Disabled
Remote Authentication (Edit Remote Authentication)
Authentication Sets the Remote Authentication Protocol type. NONE
Protocol RADIUS
TACACS
Authentication Remote authentication type. Options available are: PAP
Type Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) or
Challenge- Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP
(CHAP).
TACACS When Enabled, the system expects the User Disabled
Privilege Control Privilege level to be returned from the TACACS+ Enabled
server.
When Disabled, the system does not expect User
Privilege level information from the TACACS+ server,
but uses the privilege level set in the TACACS
Default Privilege Level attribute.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
authenticate using the remote server. If the remote
server is reachable but the authentication failed, the
system does not authenticated with the local
database and declares authentication failure. If the
remote authentication is successful, the system
declares the authentication successful. If the remote
authentication is not enabled or if the remote server
is unreachable, then the system uses the local
database to authenticate.
Remote Enables Server for operation. Disabled
Authentication Enabled
Server (1 to 3)
Status
Remote Defines the priority of the server in servicing First
Authentication requests. Multiple servers may have the same priority Second
Server (1 to 3) value. Random ordering will be chosen for those Third
Priority servers with equal priority values. Server 1 default is
First, Server 2 default is Second and Server 3 default
is Third.
Remote The IP address of the specified Remote
Authentication Authentication Server. 0.0.0.0
Server (1 to 3)
IP Address
Edit Server Check box that if selected allows the editing of the
(deselected)
Secret Server Secret.
2
Timeout RADIUS.
Remote The maximum number of tries that will be attempted
Authentication with this server. 0 to 5
Server (1 to 3) 3
Retries
Security Policy (Edit Policy)
Security Policy The system supports the following three levels of High
Strength security strength for local user passwords. This Medium
setting is used for the basis of user name and Low
password entry.
High:
1 User Name must be 6 to 32 characters in length
and no spaces allowed.
2 Password must be 12 to 32 characters in length.
3 Password must contain only alphanumeric and
special characters '# * % - _ .' and must not begin
with '#'.
4 Password must contain upper and lower case
characters, at least 2 special characters and at
least 1 digit.
Low:
1 User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in length
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
and no spaces allowed.
2 Password must be 1 to 32 characters in length.
3Password must contain only alphanumeric and
special characters '# * % - _ .' and must not begin
with '#'.
Key Generation (Regenerate Keys)
Regenerate SSL Radio button to create a new SSL certificate. If
Certificate selected, then Edit SSL Certificate Data options are
applicable.
(unselected)
When an SSL Certificate is generated, the HTTP
server is restarted and web access is unavailable
during this time (approximately 15 seconds).
Regenerate SSH Radio button to create a new SSH certificate.
Key
(unselected)
When an SSH Key is generated, all SSH users are
logged off.
Country Edit SSL Certificate Data - Country US
State Edit SSL Certificate Data - State Texas
Locality Edit SSL Certificate Data - Locality Richardson
Organization Edit SSL Certificate Data - Organization ADVA Optical
Networking
Organization Edit SSL Certificate Data - Organization Unit
Ethernet Access
Unit
Name Edit SSL Certificate Data - Name ADVA
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
(Create only) PT FLOW-1-128
Circuit Name Defines a circuit identifier for the Flow. Up to 256 up to 256
characters are allowed. characters
(blank)
Administrative Enables or disables the Pass-through Flow. IS is In IS
State Service and is the default value. See Entity State Management
Descriptions on p. 599. Disabled
EVC Type Defines the EVC type. Regular EVC
If Default EVC: N2N Flow Membership based on a frame
received on a Network Port that does not match any other
flow membership (only 1 default flow is allowed per Sys- Default EVC
tem).
If Regular EVC: N2N Flow Membership based on VLAN
Member list.
Policing Control of N2N policing function. Enabled
If Enabled: Bandwidth Profile is applied as a policing func- Disabled
tion (CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS) and shaping function (CIR,
EIR) for N2N frames.
If Disabled: Bandwidth Profile is applied as a shaping
function (CIR, EIR) for A2N frames. A policing function is
not applied to N2N frames.
Multi COS Enables N2N per-COS Bandwidth Profiles. Enabled
Disabled
COS Identifies the CoS for all N2N frames on a flow when Multi
0-7
COS is Disabled.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Buffer Size kilobytes. 128 (KB)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
o The speed of any port in the Member Port list is configured as “AUTO”.
o All ports in the Member Port list are not configured with the same port speed
o Auto Diagnostics is enabled.
Note 4: When adding the first port to LAG, the Admin State must be INSERVICE, MAINTENANCE
or MANAGEMENT. The second port must have an Admin State of Unassigned.
Note 5: Deleting a LAG is denied if more than one port is in the Member Port List.
Note 6: The first Member Port added can have active loopback, but active loop on the second Mem-
ber port is not allowed.
Note 7: Deleting a LAG is denied if there is active loopback on the LAG or any member port.
Note 8: If the LAG is to be created with Network Ports. Network One must be added, and other Net-
work ports must be in Unassigned states.
Note 9: At the time a LAG is deleted, or the last member port is removed, the following entities exist-
ing on the LAG are migrated to the member port which is deleted the last.
o Flow
o CFM entities (MIP, MEP, Server MEP)
o Management tunnel
o ESA entities
Note 10: A LAG can be created on the Network side or Access side. This is dictated by the first
member port added to the LAG.
Note 11: Regarding the Access LAG, the Service Mode of A LAG can be EVP of EVPL, this is dic-
tated by the Service Mode of the first Member Port added to the LAG. The Service Mode of the sec-
ond port is automatically converted to align to the first Port. Once the LAG is created, the Service
Mode is not editable.
Note 12: If creating a LAG group on Access Ports: The Network Port Bridge Group Protocols “LACP”
and “LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard”. All other CPD Filter setting may be set as desired.
See Footnote 1.
CCM Defect Option used to enable the use of CFM CCM to detect Disabled
Detection defects on the LAG entity. If CCM Defect Detection is Enabled
desired, a Down MEP with proper provisioning must
preexist on the LAG Port.
System Priority Defines the LACP Actor System Priority. Minimum is 0; 0-65535
Maximum is 65535. 32768
Collector Max Set the maximum delay allowed for collector response. 50-65535
Delay
Members List of Member Ports in the LAG entity. Port Member drop
down list
LAG-1-1
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
alarm attribute.
Link Loss Sets the Link Loss Enable Delay, in seconds, from the 0-3600
Forwarding Delay time Link Loss is detected before Link Loss Forwarding
takes effect. If the loss clears during delay time, it is not
propagated. It is recommended that Link Loss
Forwarding Delay be provisioned with a non-zero
value on LAG port, in case of LLF vibration during the
link switching process. Only effective if Link Loss
Forwarding is Enabled.
Link Loss Sets link Loss Forwarding Transmit Signal Type. No Action
Forwarding TX EFM Signal
Action Link Down
Link Loss Defines the Local Link ID for the Network port to N/A
Forwarding Local indicate which port is faulted.
Link ID
Link Loss Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the EFM
Forwarding Trigger Link Loss Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down Link Down
Events may be selected, or both. At default, none are
selected.
Link Loss Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used Remote Link ID
Forwarding for matching against the Link ID in the EFM RLD check boxes
Remote Link IDs (Remote Link Down) message. The same Remote Link (none selected)
ID number may be set for multiple ports, if desired.
Default is no ports selected.
Edit Port CDP Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709.
Edit Priority Mapping (Network LAG)
None/Swap
If SWAP is selected, the incoming priority bits are
changed by the value specified in the X-Tag Priority
parameter.
New Priority This parameter defines the new priority bits to be used.
0-7
(Access LAG only) Valid only if Priority Control is set to Swap.
COS Class of Service - user can select the desired COS
from a dropdown list. The default value equals the 0-7
related In Priority.
Inner Tag Priority Specifies whether the flow participates in inner-tag
(Access LAG only) priority swap. The Priority Mapping Table allows the
A2N inner-tag priority to be specified based on 0-7
incoming priority at the Access Port (based on the
priority mapping mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Outer Tag Priority The user can select the desired Outer Tag Priority from
a dropdown list. The default value equals the related In 0-7
Priority.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3 If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or Drop Ineligible
‘5P3D’, the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs, respec- 0-7
tively. Each priority can only be used once, and the Drop Eligible
lower priority of a pair should always be the drop eligi- 0-7
ble one.
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP
Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs
1, 2 and/or 3.
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.
LAG Member (e.g., LAG MEMBER-1-1-1)
Edit Member Port Configuration
LACP Force Out Of Used to forcibly remove a port from the port selection Disabled
SYNC process without deleting it as a member. Enable
Administrative Sets Actor LACP control value to the active or passive Active
Activity state. Passive
Administrative Sets Actor LAG Port Actor LACP Timeout control Long
Timeout value. Long timeout value is 30 seconds (where Link is Short
declared dead after 90 seconds [3x30 seconds]). Short
timeout value is 1 second (where Link is declared dead
after 3 seconds [1x3 seconds]).
Port Priority Actor Port Priority is used to determine which of the 1
ports participating in the LAG has higher priority. A 0-65,535
lower value implies higher priority.
Clear Statistics
1
The LACP-Control parameter allows the selection process to be independent
of the LACP protocol for applications that require a conversion from unpro-
tected port to an active-standby LAG. For configurations where LACP-Con-
trol is disabled, the LACP protocol information may not align with the actual
selection state of the active-standby LAG. Collecting & distributing informa-
tion is derived from the LACP protocol. Active/Standby status is derived from
the port selection process.
The GE11x supports all LACP & LAMP interaction in software. A warm reboot of
the system stops all LACP processing (transmit and receive) and causes a
LAG with ‘LAG Protocols enabled’ to initiate a link down, affecting all service
frames on the LAG logical port. For warm reboot during maintenance activity
on back-to-back ADVA Optical Networking systems, the LACP Control set-
ting may be used to disable the link selection based on LACP (i.e., LACP
Control disabled) for the duration of the warm reboot.
Refer to the following table for Network Port configuration settings. Also see the
following associated options and rules: CPD Filters Options and Rules on
p. 709. Default settings are identified in bold. The following Network Port set-
tings are shown in order, as seen when using the eVision web browser manage-
ment tool in Configuration mode.
Network Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched to oper-
ate as an Access Port by entering a right click on Network Port 2, selecting
“Switch to ACC” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist
when switching from a Network Port to an Access Port are:
• LAG group
• 1+1 Network protection
• MEPs
• MACOMPs
• ERP instance
• SHG group
Conversely, Access Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be
switched back to become Network Port 2 by entering a right click on Access Port
2, selecting “Switch to NET” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must
not exist when switching from an Access Port to a Network Port are:
• LAG group
• Management tunnel
• MEPs
• MACOMPs
• SHG group
• ESA probes or reflectors
• Running ECPA test
• PTP related configurations (GE114S/GE114SH)
After the port type changes, the new port is in the unassigned state and all the
attributes use the system default values.
Edit Configuration
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
identify this Network Port. This string can be up to 64 (blank)
printable ASCII characters long.
Administrative Defines the Network Port facility administrative state. IS
State The administrative state controls the generation of Management
alarms and event reports. When an entity is in the In Maintenance
Service state, it is fully operational. The Administrative
Unassigned
State must be set to Maintenance prior to initiating a
loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic. When a
protection group is configured, and Network Port 2 is
placed in service. Administrative State and Remote
Link ID options are the only editable options on
Network Port 2. For more information on
Administrative States, see Entity State Descriptions on
p. 599.
Media Type Defines the port media type. Fiber
Copper
MTU Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size in bytes. 1518-9612
Minimum MTU is 1518; Maximum is 9612.
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the network interface. Auto 1000 Full
(Fiber) The user can select auto negotiation or manual 1000 Full
configuration. 100 Full
Indicator Disabled
B-MAC Address Define the Source MAC Address for the I-Tag frames (Network Port MAC
to be transmitted in the Backbone network. Default is Address)
the MAC address of the current Network Port. User
may also enter other MAC address manually.
Port Shaping Enables or Disables Network Port Shaping. Shaping is Enabled
useful to limit the burst size of the traffic being offered Disabled
to the network. Port rate shaping at the Network Port
enables over-subscription of client services without
exceeding a specified Network Port bandwidth.
Port Shaped Speed Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Network Port
(in bps). Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled.
This allows a carrier to force a virtual maximum
bandwidth on a Network Port and allows Access Port
services (EIR) to compete for bandwidth allocation.
0 to 1,000,000,000
Setting can not be lower than the cumulative CIR
setting for all Access Ports. If Network Port 1 and
Network Port 2 are part of LAG, this attribute can be
edited on Network Port 1 and will be replicated on
Network Port 2.
Q in Q EtherType Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to 0 (hex.)
interoperate with Q in Q frames with other vendors.
Only editable if Q in Q EtherType Override is enabled.
Q in Q EtherType Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType. Enabled
Override Disabled
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Link Loss Defines the Local Link ID for the Network port to
Forwarding Local indicate which port is faulted. Applicable entries are 1
1 or 2
Link ID or 2. Default for Network port 1 is 1 and the default for
Network port 2 is 2.
Link Loss Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used
Forwarding for matching against the Link ID in the EFM RLD
check boxes for
Remote Link IDs (Remote Link Down) message. The same Remote Link
Link IDs
ID number may be set for multiple Network ports, if
desired. Default is no ports selected.
Nearest Bridge: If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
(01:80:c2:00:00:0e include a single LAN which limits the propagation of
Selected
) LLDP frames across a link, and the MAC Address
/Unselected
01:80:c2:00:00:0e will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Nearest non-TPMR If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
Bridge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:03 Two-Port MAC Relays (TPMR) between two
/Unselected
) C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges. and
the MAC Address 01:80:c2:00:00:03 will be used as
the destination address in LLDP frames,
Nearest Customer If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
Bridge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:00 TPMRs and S-VLAN components between C-VLAN
/Unselected
) components or 802.1d bridges, and the MAC Address
01:80:c2:00:00:00 will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709.
Edit EFM-OAM
QL for that port. If the QL falls below that value, the QL-PRC
port should be considered failed from a Sync QL-SSU-A
Reference perspective and a QL Mismatch alarm will
QL-SSU-B
be raised.
QL-EEC1
Edit Priority Mapping Table
In Priority For each “In Priority” (0-7) the user can select a COS
and/or an Outer Tag Priority from a dropdown list. The 0-7
default values of COS and Outer Tag Priority match (not editable)
the In Priority.
COS Class of Service - user can select the desired COS
from a dropdown list. The default value equals the 0-7
related In Priority.
Outer Tag Priority The user can select the desired Outer Tag Priority from
a dropdown list. The default value equals the related In 0-7
Priority.
Edit A2N Shapers
Buffer Size The buffer size of the shaper. 0-15360
128 for E1000-N-1
N/A for E1000-N-2
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3 If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or Drop Ineligible
‘5P3D’, the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respec- 0-7
tively. Each priority can only be used once, and the
lower priority of a pair should always be the drop eligi-
ble one.
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Drop Eligible
Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 0-7
1, 2 and/or 3.
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings on p. 713
Network Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched to oper-
ate as an Access Port by entering a right click on Network Port 2, selecting
“Switch to ACC” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist
when switching from a Network Port to an Access Port are:
• LAG group
• 1+1 Network protection
• MEPs
• MACOMPs
• ERP instance
• SHG group
Conversely, Access Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be
switched back to become Network Port 2 by entering a right click on Access Port
2, selecting “Switch to NET” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must
not exist when switching from an Access Port to a Network Port are:
• LAG group
• Management tunnel
• MEPs
• MACOMPs
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• SHG group
• ESA probes or reflectors
• Running ECPA test
• PTP related configurations (GE114S/GE114SH)
After the port type changes, the new port is in the unassigned state and all the
attributes use the system default values.
Switching Network Port 2 to function as an Access Port
WARNING (or switching back) will cause the system to reboot,
dropping communications and traffic.
and rules and pre-determine the desired provisioning details prior to making any
provisioning changes to a service. (Default settings are identified in bold.)
Changing the Service Type on a port will drop all traffic on
WARNING the port, including Management Tunnel connectivity and
Maintenance End Points.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Service state, it is fully operational. The Administrative
Disabled
State must be set to Maintenance prior to initiating a
loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic. The Unassigned
Administrative State must first be set to Unassigned
state prior to changing the Service Type. For more
information on Administrative States, see Entity State
Descriptions on p. 599.
Media Type Defines the port media type. Fiber
Copper
MTU Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size. 1518-9612
Minimum MTU is 1518; Maximum is 9612. 9600
MDIX Defines the Media Dependent Interface, Crossover Auto
(copper) function for copper interfaces. MDIX allows the Crossed
interface to change cable signal assignments to Uncrossed
compensate for using the incorrect cable type.
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The Auto
(Copper) user can select auto negotiation or manual Auto 1000 Full
configuration. Auto 1000 Full
Master
Auto 1000 Full
Slave
Auto 100 Full
Auto 10 Full
100 Full
10 Full
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The Auto 1000 Full
(Fiber) user can select auto negotiation or manual 1000 Full
configuration. 100 Full
Auto Diagnostic Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic Enabled
(copper) tests when the cable is removed from the port. Disabled
Drop Eligibility Enables or disables Drop Eligibility. Enabled
Indicator Disabled
Service Type Defines the service type for this Access port - either EPL
Ethernet Private Line (EPL) or Ethernet Virtual Private EVPL
Line (EVPL). The Access Port Administrative State
must first be set to Unassigned state prior to changing
the Service Type. When changing from Access Port
Service Type EVPL to EPL, a new Flow is automatically
created in the Unassigned state.
AFP Defines the Acceptable Frame Policy. See Acceptable AFP Tagged
Frame Policy in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical AFP Untagged
Descriptions document. AFP All
Q in Q Ethertype Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Link Loss Defines the Facility Link Loss Forwarding transmit No Action
Forwarding action to notify the network (upstream) of access port EFM Signal
TX Action failures. All access ports must be set consistently,
otherwise individual access port(s) may be set to No Link Down
Action.
Link Loss Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the EFM
Forwarding Link Loss Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down
Link Down
Trigger Events may be selected, or both.
Link Loss Defines the Local Link ID for the Access port to indicate
1 to 6
Forwarding Local which port is faulted. Local Link ID is only provisionable
N/A
Link ID if Link Loss Forwarding is set to Send EFM RLD Msg.
Link Loss Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used
Forwarding for matching against the Link ID in the EFM RLD
1 to 6
Remote Link IDs (Remote Link Down) message. The same Remote Link
N/A
ID number may be set for multiple Access Ports, if
desired.
Nearest Bridge If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
(01:80:c2:00:00:0e include a single LAN which limits the propagation of
Selected
) LLDP frames across a link, and the MAC Address
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
/Unselected
01:80:c2:00:00:0e will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Nearest If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
non-TPMR Bridge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:03 Two-Port MAC Relays (TPMR) between two
/Unselected
) C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges. and
the MAC Address 01:80:c2:00:00:03 will be used as
the destination address in LLDP frames,
Nearest Customer If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
Edge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:00 TPMRs and S-VLAN components between C-VLAN
/Unselected
) components or 802.1d bridges, and the MAC Address
01:80:c2:00:00:00 will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Edit CDP Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709.
Edit EFM-OAM
State Manages the EFM OAM on the Ethernet Network Port. Disabled
OAM Control Enabled
Local Configures the OAM sub-layer entity in either Active or OAM Active
Configuration Passive mode.
OAM Passive
Mode
Edit Sync-E
Sync-E Mode Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Disabled
SyncE Mode. Disabled means the port operates in
non-Sync mode. Enabled means the port operates in Enabled
sync mode.
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
QL Mode Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Disabled
Quality Level (QL) Mode. The QL Mode for an Ethernet
port cannot be set to Enabled unless the SyncE Mode Enabled
attribute is also set to Enabled.
Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level (QL) on the QL-NONE
Ethernet Port. Assumed QL is a QL value that is forced QL-PRC
at a receiving interface. QL-SSU-A
For QL mode disabled, the selected Assumed QL is a
QL-SSU-B
value specified for the received recovered timing
reference (if not in the failed state).
For QL mode enabled, the selected Assumed QL
overrides the received QL value if interface is not in the
failed state and if the Assumed QL value is not QL-EEC1
QL-NONE. When Assumed QL value is QL-NONE, the
received QL represents the QL for the interface.
Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC,
QL-SSU-A. QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1. Default is QL-EEC1.
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-STU. QL-STU
Expected QL Set the Expected QL for the Ethernet port. When the QL-NONE
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PCP DE Encoding Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are None
Mode 7P1D, 6P2D and 5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 7P1D
or 3 PCP pairs respectively. 6P2D
Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user 5P3D
to edit the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly
and ignore the normal rules regarding priority reuse
and hierarchy. Any use of PCP Encoding may affect
existing traffic. The Custom mode has the potential for
causing unexpected and unintended disruption of nor-
mal traffic.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP Custom
Encoding Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided
for custom selections. The PCP Encoding Table allows
user-selectable Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible prior-
ity values. The PCP Decoding Table allows
user-selectable Outgoing Tag Priority and enabling or
disabling whether the tag is Drop Eligible.
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3 If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or Drop Ineligible
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
‘5P3D’, the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respec- 0-7
tively. Each priority can only be used once, and the
lower priority of a pair should always be the drop eligi-
ble one.
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Drop Eligible
Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 0-7
1, 2 and/or 3.
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.
PCP Encoding If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’ for each Drop Ineligible
Table ‘Incoming Tag Priority’ the user can select the desired 0-7
Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible priority. Drop Eligible
0-7
PCP Decoding If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’ for each Outgoing Tag
Table ‘Incoming Tag Priority’ the user can select the desired Priority
Outgoing Tag Priority and enable or disable Drop 0-7
Eligible. Drop Eligible
Disabled/Enabled
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings on p. 713
Flow
Edit Configuration
Circuit Name Defines a circuit identifier for the Flow. Up to 256 up to 256 characters
characters are allowed. (blank)
COS Specifies the COS (Class of Service) value for the
Traffic Flow. This value is used at flow creation time to 0 to 7
identify the COS level of the A2N and N2A shaper.
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Network Interface Select the Network Interface for this flow. Candidates NETWORK
include: Network port, Network LAG, Network PPG PORT-1-1-1-1
(including 1+1, Dual-Active, RP entity with network ring
port,), and SHG entity with network member port. Note NETWORK
that PPG, SHG and LAG can not coexist; if any one PORT-1-1-1-2
type exists, the other two cannot exist.
Access Interface Select the Access Interface for this flow. Candidates
include: the current Access port, LAG (if any) with
Current Access Port
current port as member, and SHG (if any) entity with
current port as member.
Policing Enable/Disable the selected Policing Control. When Enabled
the policing is Disabled, the policer in the
Disabled
corresponding direction will not work.
Policing Control Specify the policing direction of the flow. A2N_N2A
A2N
N2A
A2N Shaping If Flow Based is selected, system will assign 8 Flow Based
(GE112/GE114/G independent queues for this flow for A2N shaping; If
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Network Interface If set to None, the specified Network Interface will not None
Learning Control learn the Source MAC Address of received frames; If MAC Based
set to MAC Based, the Network Interface will learn the
Source MAC Address of receiving frames.
Protected Network If set to None, the existing MAC addresses learned by None
Learning Control the Network Interface will not prevent the interface Discard
learning the same MAC addresses in the received
frame SA; if set to Discard, the same MAC addresses
in the received frame SA will not be learned and
preserved, but discarded.
Max Network Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC 0 to 2048
Forwarding Table learned) allowed by the Network Interface.
Entries
MAC Table Full The action to take when the MAC table is full. Forward
Action Block
Access Interface If set to None, the specified Access Interface will not None
Learning Control learn the Source MAC Address of received frames; If MAC Based
set to MAC Based, the Access Interface will learn the
Source MAC Address of receiving frames.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Protected Access If set to None, the existing MAC addresses learned by None
Learning Control the Access Interface will not prevent the interface Discard
learning the same MAC addresses in the received Block
frame SA; if set to Discard, the same MAC addresses
in the received frame SA will not be learned and
preserved, but discarded.
Max Access Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC 0 to 2048
Forwarding Table learned) allowed by the Access Interface.
Entries
Aging Timer The aging time of the MAC address learned. 0 to 100000000
300
C-Tag Control Defines whether the C (Customer) Tag VLAN ID / Push
VLAN Priority should be PUSHed or no action taken. None
If more than one Access port is to be used in the
system, Push must be selected. If C-Tag Control is set
to None, only one LAN port may be used in the system.
If C-Tag Control is set to None, then C-Tag VLAN ID
and C-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered.
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
C-Tag Defines the C-Tag VLAN ID that will be PUSHed. This 1 to 4095
option is only available if C-Tag Control is set to Push. E1000-A-2 (if
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not provisioned)
conflict on the Network port. (For example: A service default is 2
with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will E1000-A-3
conflict with another service with the same C-Tag and default is 3
S-Tag. A service with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag None
E1000-A-4
will conflict with another service with C-Tag None,
default is 4
S-Tag PUSH 100-0. An EPL service with C-Tag PUSH
100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with a Flow with VLAN E1000-A-5
Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE and S-Tag NONE.) default is 5
E1000-A-6
default is 6
Defines the C-Tag VLAN Priority that will be PUSHed.
This option is only allowed if C-Tag Control is set to
Push. 0 to 7
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not
conflict on the Network port (see C-Tag VLAN ID).
S-Tag Control Defines whether the S (Service) Tag VLAN ID / VLAN Push
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
I-Tag Defines the I-Tag VLAN ID that will be PUSHed. This
(GE112/GE114/G option is only applicable if I-Tag Control is set to Push. 256 to 16777214
E114H/GE114PH)
Defines the I-Tag VLAN Priority that will be PUSHed.
This option is only applicable if I-Tag Control is set to 0 to 7
Push.
Destination Enable/Disable Backbone MAC Address in front of Disabled
Backbone MAC Ethernet packet. This option is configurable only when
(GE112/GE114/G I-Tag Control is set to Push. Enabled
E114H/GE114PH)
Backbone MAC The backbone MAC destination address to be added in
Destination front of Ethernet packet. When I-Tag Control is set to
Address Push, Destination Backbone MAC is set to Disabled, a
(GE112/GE114/G default MAC Destination Address calculating with the
01:1e:83:00:00:00
E114H/GE114PH) I-Tag VID will be used; When I-Tag Control is set to
Push, Destination Backbone MAC is set to Enabled,
user can specify a Backbone MAC Destination
Address themselves.
A2N Policer CIR Defines the Policer Committed Information Rate (CIR)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
for this Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set to 0, then a
Policer CIR value of 64,000 bps or greater must be
entered. Policer CIR and Policer EIR cannot both be
set to 0. A2N Policer values are compared against the
Network Port speed.
• If Network Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed
the speed of the Network Port.
• If Network Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Network Port Shaped
Speed. 0 to 1 Gbps
• If Access Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed
the speed of the Access Port.
• If Access Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Access Port Shaped
Speed.
Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps incre-
ment (e.g., if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the
value will automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if
the value of 5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value
will automatically be rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A2N Policer EIR Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for
this Policer, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a
Policer EIR value of 64,000 bps or greater must be
entered. Policer CIR and Policer EIR cannot both be
set to 0. A2N Policer values are compared against the
Network Port speed.
• If Network Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed
the speed of the Network Port.
• If Network Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Network Port Shaped
Speed. 0 to 1,000,000,000
(bps)
• If Access Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed
the speed of the Access Port.
• If Access Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Access Port Shaped
Speed.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 46: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A2N Policer Color Enable/Disable Color Coupling Flag for the policer in Enabled
Coupling Flag A2N direction. When coupling is enabled, tokens that Disabled
would normally be added to the C-bucket are passed to
the E-bucket only once the CIR bucket has reached its
CBS level. Therefore under this condition the E-bucket
is being filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” is
bounded by the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” to be
bounded by CIR + EIR.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
C-bucket is filled to its CBS level.
Edit CDP Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709.
Add Forwarding Table Entry
Destination Add a specified static destination MAC address to the (blank)
Address Forwarding table for this flow.
Destination Port Select the destination port where the input Destination Access Interface of
Address is learned. this flow
Network Interface of
this flow
Learning Action Select the action to take when this Destination Address Block
is learned. If set to Block, the learned address will be Forward
discarded and this flow will block the learning of this
MAC address again; if set to Forward, this flow will
forward this learned Destination Address.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Access Port (Edit Configuration)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The Auto
(Copper) user can select auto negotiation or manual Auto 1000 Full
configuration. Auto 1000 Full
Master
Auto 1000 Full
Slave
Auto 100 Full
Auto 10 Full
100 Full
10 Full
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The Auto 1000 Full
(Fiber) user can select auto negotiation or manual 1000 Full
configuration. 100 Full
Auto Diagnostic Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic Enabled
(Copper) tests when the cable is removed from the port. Disabled
Drop Eligibility Enables or disables Drop Eligibility. Enabled
Indicator Disabled
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Service Type Defines the service type for this Access port - either EPL
Ethernet Private Line (EPL) or Ethernet Virtual Private EVPL
Line (EVPL). The Administrative State must first be set
to Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type.
AFP Defines the Acceptable Frame Policy. See Acceptable AFP Tagged
Frame Policy in FSP 150CC GE11x R6.1 Technical AFP Untagged
Descriptions document. AFP All
Q in Q Ethertype Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to
inter-operate with Queue-in-Queue frames with other
vendors. Only editable if Q in Q EtherType Override is 0 (hex)
enabled.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Priority Map Mode Defines the Priority Map Mode. It identifies the lookup None
criteria for the priority mapping table. This table is used 802.1p
to perform priority based lookup (to determine low and IP-TOS
normal latency) and/or to change the priority value.
IP-DSCP
Priority Map Mode must be set to anything other than
None in order to enable multi-COS on this Access Port.
If Priority Map Mode is set to anything other than None,
a Priority Mapping Table is created. See Default Priority
Mapping Tables on p. 700 for default Priority Map
settings. This option is only valid when Service Type is
set to EVPL.
Port Shaping Enables or Disables Access Port Shaping. Port shaping Enabled
limits the output traffic rate to a value below the Disabled
provisioned/negotiated physical port speed. Shaping is
useful to limit the burst size of the traffic being offered
to the client.
Port Shaped Speed Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Access Port (in
0 to 1,000,000,000
bps) toward the client. Applicable when Port Shaping is
(bps)
Enabled.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Link Loss Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the EFM
Forwarding Trigger Link Loss Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down
Link Down
Events may be selected, or both.
Link Loss Defines the Local Link ID for the Access port to indicate
1 to 6
Forwarding Local which port is faulted. Local Link ID is only provisionable
N/A
Link ID if Link Loss Forwarding is set to Send EFM RLD Msg.
Link Loss Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used for
Forwarding matching against the Link ID in the EFM RLD (Remote
1 to 6
Remote Link IDs Link Down) message. The same Remote Link ID
N/A
number may be set for multiple Access Ports, if
desired.
Nearest Bridge If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
(01:80:c2:00:00:0e) include a single LAN which limits the propagation of
Selected
LLDP frames across a link, and the MAC Address
/Unselected
01:80:c2:00:00:0e will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Nearest non-TPMR If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
Bridge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:03) Two-Port MAC Relays (TPMR) between two
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
/Unselected
C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges. and
the MAC Address 01:80:c2:00:00:03 will be used as the
destination address in LLDP frames,
Nearest Customer If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will
Edge include the transmission of LLDP frames through
Selected
(01:80:c2:00:00:00) TPMRs and S-VLAN components between C-VLAN
/Unselected
components or 802.1d bridges, and the MAC Address
01:80:c2:00:00:00 will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames.
Edit CDP Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules on p. 709.
Edit EFM-OAM
State Manages the EFM OAM on the Ethernet Network Port. Disabled
OAM Control Enabled
Local Configuration Configures the OAM sub-layer entity in either Active or OAM Active
Mode Passive mode. OAM Passive
Edit Sync-E
Sync-E Mode Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Disabled
SyncE Mode. Disabled means the port operates in
non-Sync mode. Enabled means the port operates in Enabled
sync mode.
QL Mode Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Disabled
Quality Level (QL) Mode. The QL Mode for an Ethernet
port cannot be set to Enabled unless the SyncE Mode Enabled
attribute is also set to Enabled.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level (QL) on the QL-NONE
Ethernet Port. Assumed QL is a QL value that is forced QL-PRC
at a receiving interface. QL-SSU-A
For QL mode disabled, the selected Assumed QL is a
QL-SSU-B
value specified for the received recovered timing
reference (if not in the failed state).
For QL mode enabled, the selected Assumed QL
overrides the received QL value if interface is not in the
failed state and if the Assumed QL value is not QL-EEC1
QL-NONE. When Assumed QL value is QL-NONE, the
received QL represents the QL for the interface.
Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC,
QL-SSU-A. QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1. Default is QL-EEC1.
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-STU. QL-STU
Expected QL Set the Expected QL for the Ethernet port. When the QL-NONE
Received QL value is lower than the Expected QL QL-PRC
value, the interface is declared as failed and a Sync QL QL-SSU-A
Mismatch alarm is declared against the interface.The
QL-SSU-B
Expected QL only has meaning when the QL Mode
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
New Priority This parameter defines the new priority bits to be used. 0 to 7
Valid only if Priority Control is set to Swap.
COS Class Of Service (COS) Policer. Allows the incoming
traffic to be steered to the appropriate EVC Ingress 0 to 7
Policer.
Inner Tag Priority Specifies whether the flow participates in inner-tag
priority swap. The Priority Mapping Table allows the
A2N inner-tag priority to be specified based on 0 to 7
incoming priority at the Access Port (based on the
priority mapping mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Outer Tag Priority Specifies whether the flow participates in outer-tag
priority swap. The Priority Mapping Table allows the
A2N outer-tag priority to be specified based on 0 to 7
incoming priority at the Access Port (based on the
priority mapping mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Port N2A Shapers (Edit N2A Shapers)
N2A Shaper Buffer Represents the Buffer Size of the Shaper. Entered in 10 to 15,360 (KB)
Size kilobytes. 0 (KB)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Edit PCP Configuration
Note 1: Update Table option is used to update the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing
PCP Pairs 1, 2 and/or 3.
Note 2: Reset PCP Defaults option is used to reset the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables back to
default values.
PCP DE Encoding Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are None
Mode 7P1D, 6P2D and 5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 7P1D
or 3 PCP pairs respectively. 6P2D
Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user
5P3D
to edit the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly
and ignore the normal rules regarding priority reuse
and hierarchy. Any use of PCP Encoding may affect
existing traffic. The Custom mode has the potential for
causing unexpected and unintended disruption of
normal traffic.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP Custom
Encoding Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided
for custom selections. The PCP Encoding Table allows
user-selectable Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible
priority values. The PCP Decoding Table allows
user-selectable Outgoing Tag Priority and enabling or
disabling whether the tag is Drop Eligible.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3 If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or Drop Ineligible
‘5P3D’, the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs 0-7
respectively. Each priority can only be used once, and
the lower priority of a pair should always be the drop
eligible one.
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Drop Eligible
Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 0-7
1, 2 and/or 3.
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings on p. 713
Flow
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Policing Enable/Disable the selected Policing Control. When the Enabled
policing is Disabled, the policer in the corresponding
Disabled
direction will not work.
Policing Control Specify the policing direction of the flow. A2N_N2A
A2N
N2A
COS Specifies the COS (Class of Service) value for the
Traffic Flow. This value is used at flow creation time to
identify the COS level of the A2N and N2A shaper. If 0 to 7
MULTI COS is Enabled, this option is not applicable
when multiple policers/shapers exist on the flow.
Multi COS Enables or Disables Multi Class Of Service (COS). If Enabled
(Create Flow only) set to the Disabled, one N2A Policer and one A2N Disabled
Policer are provisionable. If set to the Enabled state, up
to 8 N2A Policers and 8 A2N Policers may be
provisioned. Multi COS can only be set to the Enabled
state if Priority Map Mode is set to anything other than
None for the facility.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
This option is only available during Flow creation and
cannot be edited. If it is desired to edit an existing Flow,
the Flow must be deleted and then re-created with the
Multi COS change.
N2A COS Priority Specifies whether the flow uses the inner-tag or the Outer VLAN Tag
outer-tag in determining the COS (Class of Service) in Inner VLAN Tag
the N2A direction. This option is only applicable if Multi
COS is Enabled.
Untagged Frames Specifies whether untagged traffic is supported. Enabled
Disabled
PBB Frames If Enabled, the flow will forward the received PBB Disabled
frames; If Disabled, the flow will discard the received
Enabled
PBB frames.
Inner Tag Priority Specifies whether the flow participates in inner-tag Enabled
Control priority swap. The Priority Mapping Table Disabled
cmPrioMapTable allows the A2N inner-tag priority to be
specified based on incoming priority at Access Port
(based on priority mapping mode - 802.1p, IP-TOS,
IP-DSCP). TOS/DSCP will only be used for
classification if there are no tags (valid or invalid
ethertype) on the frame.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Outer Tag Priority Specifies whether the flow participates in outer-tag Enabled
Control priority swap. The Priority Mapping Table Disabled
cmPrioMapTable allows the A2N outer-tag priority to be
specified based on incoming priority at Access Port
(based on priority mapping mode - 802.1p, IP-TOS,
IP-DSCP). TOS/DSCP will only be used for
classification if there are no tags (valid or invalid
ethertype) on the frame
Independent N2A Manages N2A rate limiting, independent of A2N rate Enabled
Rate Limiting limiting. When not enabled, N2A specification is the Disabled
same as A2N. This option is only applicable if Multi
COS is Disabled.
Frame Loss Specifies the frame-loss ratio (%) per flow that starts 0 to 100
Threshold Ratio counting Severely Errored Seconds (SES) on the flow. 30
This functionality is applicable if the flow is monitored
using the Y.1731 ESA functionality.
Frame Loss Specifies the number of frames lost per flow that starts 1 to 2147483647
Threshold counting Errored Seconds (ES) on the flow. This 1
functionality is applicable if the flow is monitored using
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Protected Network If set to None, the existing MAC addresses learned by None
Learning Control the Network Interface will not prevent the interface Discard
learning the same MAC addresses in the received
frame SA; if set to Discard, the same MAC addresses in
the received frame SA will not be learned and
preserved, but discarded.
Max Network Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC 0 to 2048
Forwarding Table learned) allowed by the Network Interface.
Entries
MAC Table Full The action to take when the MAC table is full. Forward
Action Block
Access Interface If set to None, the specified Access Interface will not None
Learning Control learn the Source MAC Address of received frames; If MAC Based
set to MAC Based, the Access Interface will learn the
Source MAC Address of receiving frames.
Protected Access If set to None, the existing MAC addresses learned by None
Learning Control the Access Interface will not prevent the interface Discard
learning the same MAC addresses in the received
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Block
frame SA; if set to Discard, the same MAC addresses in
the received frame SA will not be learned and
preserved, but discarded.
Max Access Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC 0 to 2048
Forwarding Table learned) allowed by the Access Interface.
Entries
Aging Timer The aging time of the MAC address learned. 0 to 100000000
300
C-Tag Control Defines whether the C (Customer) Tag VLAN ID / Push
VLAN Priority should be PUSHed, Swapped or no Swap VID
action taken. If Swap VID is selected, only the VLAN ID Push VID
(12 bits) are swapped with the specified C-Tag VLAN
None
ID. If Push VID is selected, only the VLAN ID (12 bits) is
PUSHed - the Priority is copied from the incoming tag’s Pop
Priority. If C-Tag Control is set to None, then C-Tag
VLAN ID cannot be entered and C-Tag Match Rx
Priority cannot be selected. If C-Tag Control is set to
None, Swap VID or Push VID, C-Tag VLAN Priority
cannot be entered.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
C-Tag Defines the C-Tag VLAN ID. If C-Tag Control is set to
None, then C-Tag VLAN ID cannot be entered.
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not
conflict on the Network port. (For example: A service
with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will
conflict with another service with the same C-Tag and
1 to 4095
S-Tag combination. A service with C-Tag PUSH 100-0,
S-Tag None will conflict with another service with
C-Tag None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. A EPL service with
C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with an
EVPL service Flow with VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag
NONE and S-Tag NONE.)
Defines the C-Tag VLAN Priority. If C-Tag Control is set
to None or Push VID, C-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be
0 to 7
entered. All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values
must not conflict on the Network port (see above).
I-Tag Control Defines whether the I-Tag and I-Tag Priority should be None
PUSHed, If Push IS is selected, only the VLAN ID (12 Push
bits) is PUSHed - the Priority is copied from the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
S-Tag Defines the Transport VLAN ID. If S-Tag Control is set
to None, S-Tag VLAN ID cannot be entered. All C-Tag
and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict on
the Network port. (For example: A service with C-Tag
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will conflict with
another service with the same C-Tag and S-Tag
1 to 4095
combination. A service with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag
None will conflict with another service with C-Tag
None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. An EPL service with C-Tag
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with an EVPL
service Flow with VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE
and S-Tag NONE.)
Defines the S-Tag VLAN Priority. If S-Tag Control is set
to None, S-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered.
0 to 7
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not
conflict on the Network port (see above).
I-Tag Control Defines whether the I (Instance) Tag SID (Service None
(GE112/GE114/GE Instant VLAN ID)/ VLAN Priority should be PUSHed or Push
114H/GE114PH) no action taken.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
If I-Tag Control is set to None, then I-Tag VLAN ID and Push IS ID
I-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered.
I-Tag Defines the I-Tag VLAN ID that will be PUSHed. This
(GE112/GE114/GE option is only applicable if I-Tag Control is set to Push. 256 to 16777214
114H/GE114PH)
Defines the I-Tag VLAN Priority that will be PUSHed.
This option is only applicable if I-Tag Control is set to 0 to 7
Push.
Preserve S-Tag Preserve the S-Tag properties. Disabled
Properties Enabled
N2A Outer Tag Enable/Disable N2A Outer Tag priority. Disabled
Priority Enabled
Destination Enable/Disable Backbone MAC Address in front of Disabled
Backbone MAC Ethernet packet. This option is configurable only when
(GE112/GE114/GE I-Tag Control is set to Push. Enabled
114H/GE114PH)
Backbone MAC The backbone MAC destination address to be added in
Destination front of Ethernet packet. When I-Tag Control is set to
Address Push, Destination Backbone MAC is set to Disabled, a
(GE112/GE114/GE default MAC Destination Address calculating with the
01:1e:83:00:00:00
114H/GE114PH) I-Tag VID will be used; When I-Tag Control is set to
Push, Destination Backbone MAC is set to Enabled,
user can specify a Backbone MAC Destination Address
themselves.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Hierarchical COS Whether to use Hierarchical COS Settings. Disabled
Settings Only available for Multi-COS enabled Flow.
Hierarchical COS Settings can be used by selecting the
checkbox. Hierarchical COS settings allows managing
bandwidth profiles of schedule entities by bounding a Enabled
group of traffic classes (Multi COS group). The user
can set values for the guaranteed and maximum flow
bandwidths bounding the whole multi COS group.
Guaranteed Flow Guaranteed bandwidth for the flow.
Bandwidth This option is only available if Multi COS is enabled and
the Hierarchical COS Settings is selected. This allows
the provisioning of guaranteed bandwidth of a flow.
Guaranteed Flow Bandwidth (GFB) must be less than
or equal to the Maximum Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a
Flow's A2N Shaper CIR values must be less than or
equal to the Guaranteed Flow Bandwidth.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Maximum Flow Supports the Hierarchical Class of Service (HCOS)
Bandwidth feature. This option is only available if Multi COS is
enabled and the Hierarchical COS Settings is selected.
This is the peak limit of a flow. Maximum Flow
Bandwidth (MFB) must be greater than or equal to PIR
(Peak Information Rate) = CIR + EIR. The sum of a
Flow's A2N Shaper PIR values must be less than or
equal to the oversubscribed Maximum Flow Bandwidth
value. Note: The oversubscribed Maximum Flow
Bandwidth value is equal to 8 times the Maximum Flow
Bandwidth value.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Access Port port shaped speed.
If Network Port Port Shaping is disabled, then
Maximum Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal
to the Network Port port speed.
If Network Port Port Shaping is enabled, then Maximum
Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal to the
Network Port port shaped speed.
Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps
increment (e.g., if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the
value will automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if
the value of 5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value
will automatically be rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).
A2N Policer Active Checkbox for selecting the desired Active A2N
Checkbox Policers. This option is only available if Multi COS is Check boxes for
enabled. To activate Policer entry, select the desired Policers 0-7
Policer (0 to 7).
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A2N Policer CIR Defines the A2N Policer Committed Information Rate
(CIR) for this Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set to 0,
then a Policer CIR value of 64,000 bps or greater must
be entered. Policer CIR and Policer EIR cannot both be
set to 0. A2N Policer values are compared against the
Network Port speed. CIR entry must not exceed the
speed of the Network Port. PIR (Peak Information Rate)
= CIR + EIR; must be less than or equal to the
Maximum Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's A2N
Shaper PIR values must be less than or equal to the
oversubscribed Maximum Flow Bandwidth value. Note:
The oversubscribed Maximum Flow Bandwidth value is
equal to 8 times the Maximum Flow Bandwidth value.
If Network Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
0 to 1 Gbps
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
speed of the Network Port.
If Network Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.
If Access Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A2N Policer EIR Defines the A2N Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR)
for this port, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a
Policer EIR value of 64,000 bps or greater must be
entered. Policer CIR and Policer EIR cannot both be
set to 0. A2N Policer values are compared against the
Network Port speed. PIR (Peak Information Rate) =
CIR + EIR; must be less than or equal to the Maximum
Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper PIR
values must be less than or equal to the
oversubscribed Maximum Flow Bandwidth value. Note:
The oversubscribed Maximum Flow Bandwidth value is
equal to 8 times the Maximum Flow Bandwidth value.
If Network Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the 0 to 1 Gbps
speed of the Network Port.
If Network Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.
If Access Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
speed of the Access Port.
If Access Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be
less than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.
Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps
increment (e.g., if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the
value will automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if
the value of 5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value
will automatically be rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).
A2N Policer CBS Defines the A2N Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS)
for this port, in Kilobytes. The minimum A2N Policer
CBS entry allowed is based on the A2N Policer CIR
0 to 1,024 (KB)
entry, see Table 48. For IP type traffic, see Table 49 for
recommended CBS value, based on CIR/EIR entry
range.
A2N Policer EBS Defines the A2N Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for
this port, in Kilobytes. The minimum A2N Policer EBS
entry allowed is based on the A2N Policer EIR entry,
0 to 1,024 (KB)
see Table 48. For IP type traffic, see Table 49 for
recommended EBS value, based on CIR/EIR entry
range.
A2N Policer Color Specifies the A2N Policer Color Mode as 'Color Aware' Color Aware
Marking or 'Color Blind'. Color Blind
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A2N Policer Color Specifies the A2N Policer Coupling Flag. When Enabled
Coupling Flag coupling is enabled, tokens that would normally be Disabled
added to the C-bucket are passed to the E-bucket only
once the CIR bucket has reached its CBS level.
Therefore under this condition the E-bucket is being
filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the long term
average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded by the
EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the long term
average of frames declared ˜yellow” to be bounded by
CIR + EIR. This allows a higher volume of yellow
frames to be delivered/received if the arrival of green
marked frames is low. Tokens from the E-bucket do
NOT get passed to the C-bucket once the EBS level
has been reached. Enabling coupling in combination
with a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a single rate three
color marking (srTCM) algorithm to be established. In
this situation the E-bucket is filled at the CIR rate in the
case the C-bucket is filled to its CBS level.
A2N Shaper Queue Specifies the A2N Shaper Queue Identifier associated 0-7
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
N2A Policer EIR Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for
this port, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a Policer
EIR value of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. An
entry of 0 cannot be entered for both N2A Policer CIR
and N2A Policer EIR. N2A value is compared against
the Access Port speed.
If Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak Information
Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of the
0 to 1 Gbps
Access Port.
If Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less than or
equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.
Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps
increment (e.g., if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the
value will automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if
the value of 5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value
will automatically be rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).
N2A Policer CBS Defines the N2A Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS)
for this port, in Kilobytes. The minimum N2A Policer
CBS entry allowed is based on the N2A Policer CIR
0 to 1,024 (KB)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
entry, see Table 48. For IP type traffic, see Table 49 for
recommended CBS value, based on CIR/EIR entry
range.
N2A Policer EBS Defines the N2A Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for
this port, in Kilobytes. The minimum N2A Policer EBS
entry allowed is based on the N2A Policer EIR entry,
0 to 1,024 (KB)
see Table 48. For IP type traffic, see Table 49 for
recommended EBS value, based on CIR/EIR entry
range.
N2A Policer Color Specifies the N2A Policer Color Mode as 'Color Aware' Color Aware
Marking or 'Color Blind'. Color Blind
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
N2A Policer Color Specifies the N2A Policer Coupling Flag. When Enabled
Coupling Flag coupling is enabled, tokens that would normally be Disabled
added to the C-bucket are passed to the E-bucket only
once the CIR bucket has reached its CBS level.
Therefore under this condition the E-bucket is being
filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the long term
average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded by the
EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the long term
average of frames declared ˜yellow” to be bounded by
CIR + EIR.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
VLAN Members Defines the frames that belong to the flow. Frames are VLAN ID portion of
(Regular EVC only) classified based on the VLAN tag and the membership VLAN ID-Priority:
is specified as a list of VLAN IDs. The VLAN member
format is VLAN ID-*, VLAN ID (range)-* or *-Priority. 0 to 4095, or *
The valid values for VLAN ID are 0 to 4095. Valid Priority portion of
values for Priority are * or 0 to 7. A VLAN ID range is a VLAN ID-Priority:
contiguous block of VID values delineated by a first
member and a last member, inclusive (e.g., Range 100 0 to 7, or *
- 199 shall consist of all frames with VID values {100,
101..... 198, 199}) including all PRI values for those
VIDs, and is entered using a colon, for example:
100:199. Range must list lower value on left and larger
value on the right. Up to 16 VLAN ID range entries are
allowed per flow. 2 VLAN ID range entries are allowed
per flow on average.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
value is supplied, this FID becomes the default FID for
the port, i.e., all the VLAN IDs that don’t belong to any
other FID on the port belongs to this FID.
Table 47: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service (Continued)
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Destination Add a specified static destination MAC address to the (blank)
Address Forwarding table for this flow.
Destination Port Select the destination port where the input Destination Access Interface
Address is learned. of this flow
Network Interface
of this flow
Learning Action Select the action to take when this Destination Address Block
is learned. If set to Block, the learned address will be Forward
discarded and this flow will block the learning of this
MAC address again; if set to Forward, this flow will
forward this learned Destination Address.
Table 48: Minimum CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on CIR / EIR Range
Minimum
CIR / EIR Range
CBS / EBS Value
0 bps 0 KB
1 - 65,536,000 bps 1 KB
65,536,001 - 131,072,000 bps 2 KB
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
3 None N/A 3
4 None N/A 4
5 None N/A 5
6 None N/A 6
7 None N/A 7
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
LAG
o
3 LAGs
Encapsulation User setting for Ethernet or PPP Encapsulation. PPP Ethernet
Type can only be used for directly connected ADVA Optical
Networking NIDs. Not available if Management Traffic PPP
Bridging is Enabled.
IP Mode Select the desired IP mode setting for DCN port. IPv4 Only
IPv6 Only
IPv4 and IPv6
DHCP Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is Disabled
enabled or disabled. If this interface is set to Enabled,
the GE11x sends a broadcast query requesting IP
address information from a DHCP server. This option
also enables or disables the DHCP Client “Role.” For
Enabled
management tunnels, a separate DHCP Role attribute is
not supported since only DHCP Client is allowed. Not
applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Management
Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
DHCP Client Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Client ID (DHCP Disabled
ID Control Option 61) if configured in DHCP request to the DHCP
server. Not applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Enabled
Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
product name>
Disabled
e.g: “ADVA FSP150CC-GE112” for the GE112, with the
same format used for other products. Not applicable if
Encapsulation is PPP or if Management Traffic Bridging
is Enabled.
DHCP Host Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Host Name (DHCP Enabled
Name Control Option 12) if configured in DHCP request to the DHCP
server.Not applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Disabled
Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
DHCP Host Select a desired DHCP Host Name Type when DHCP System Name
Name Type Host Name Control is enabled. If System Name is
selected, the System Name shown in gray (same as the
System Name in System Detail Pane) will be used as the
DHCP Host Name; if User Defined is selected, use is User Defined
allowed to enter a customized name as the DHCP Host
Name.
DHCP Host This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP Host FSP150CC-GE11x
Name Name. If DHCP Host Name Type is System Name, this
option is not editable, as the System Name will be used
automatically; if DHCP Host Name Type is User Defined, User-defined string
user is allowed to enter a customized string up to 254
characters.
DHCP Log Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP Log Server Disabled
Server (DHCP Option 7) list sent by the DHCP server. Not
Control applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Management Enabled
Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
an interface, it is recommended that you perform a
system reboot after changing the IP address. This will
force RIP to advertise the address immediately. Note
that this operation should be performed locally, or a
static route must be created to the remote in order to
make the changes remotely. Not applicable if
Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
IPv6 Unicast Enter an IPv6 unicast address for the management 0000:0000:0000:0000:
Address tunnel interface. This option is only applicable when 0000:0000:0000:0000
DHCPv6 is disabled and DHCPv6 Role is Client. /0
Stateless When the NE is working in router mode (IPv6 Disabled
Address Auto Forwarding enabled), this option must be Disabled.
Configuration When the NE is working in host mode (IPv6 Forwarding Enabled
disabled), this option can be Enabled.
DHCPv6 Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Disabled
(DHCP) is enabled or disabled. If this interface is set to
Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client, the
Enabled
GE11x sends a broadcast query requesting IPv6
address information from a DHCP server.
DHCPv6 Role Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Client
Role in IPv6 Network is as a server or a client. Servers
assign IP addresses, Clients receive addresses. This
option is only applicable if DHCP is set to Enabled. If the
DHCP Server
DHCP Role is set to DHCP Server, the user must
Disable and then Enable DHCPv6 for the initialization of
the server function (IP Address range) to take place.
(grayed out)
Address Default Gateway” checkbox is selected.
Tunnel Mode Defines the management tunnel mode. I-Tag based VLAN Based
mode is not applicable to GE114S/GE114SH and is only MAC Based
supported on Network Port management tunnels. ITAG Based
C-Tag VLAN Enable or Disable C-Tag VLAN ID entry. This option is Enabled
not available when Tunnel Mode is set to MAC Based,
and cannot be enabled with S-Tag VLAN at the same Disabled
time when Tunnel Mode is set to ITAG Based.
C-Tag VLAN Define the C-Tag Management VLAN ID. It is used to
ID identify management traffic on the port. This option is 1 to 4095
only editable when C-Tag VLAN is enabled.
S-Tag VLAN Enable or Disable S-Tag VLAN ID entry. This option is Enabled
not available when Tunnel Mode is set to MAC Based
and cannot be enabled with C-Tag VLAN at the same Disabled
time when Tunnel Mode is set to ITAG Based.
S-Tag VLAN Define the S-Tag Management VLAN ID. It is used to
ID identify management traffic on the port. This option is 1 to 4095
only available when S-Tag Vlan is enabled.
I-Tag Enable or Disable I-Tag SID. This option is not Enabled
applicable to GE114S/GE114SH and is only supported
on Network Port management tunnels in ITAG Tunnel Disabled
Mode.
I-SID Define the I-Tag Service Instance Identifier (SID). It’s
used to identify management traffic. This option is only 256 to 16777214
available when I-Tag is enabled.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
COS Configurable Class Of Service (COS). Specifies the
Class of Service associated with the IP Management
Tunnel. This value is also used in the p-bits of the VLAN 0-7
based management tunnels (for both VLANs in the case
where S-TAG VLAN is enabled).
1. If RIP is enabled on an interface and you are changing the IP address, it may take minutes for RIP to
advertise the new IP address. If RIP is enabled on an interface, it is recommended that you perform a
FSP 150CC reboot after changing the IP address. This will force RIP to advertise the address immedi-
ately. Note that this operation should be performed locally, or a static route must be created to the
remote in order to make the changes remotely.
To delete an existing IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel, enter a right click on the IPv6 over
IPv4 tunnel and select Delete and then select OK. An IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel can-
not be deleted if it has been selected as the Interface Name value for IPv6 Static
Route, IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry or IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
an NBMA link layer for IPv6. ISATAP is designed for
transporting IPv6 packets within a site where a
native IPv6 infrastructure is not yet available. IP
address format: Prefix: 0000:5EFE:A.B.C.D. The
ISATAT tunnel is not supported if IPv6 Forwarding is
enabled at the system level.
Tunnel Address
Destination IPv4 Specify the destination IPv4 address for Configured IPv6
0.0.0.0
Address over IPv4 tunnel.
IPv6 Unicast Enter the source IPv6 unicast address used to transmit 0000:0000:0000:00
Address IPv6 packets on tunnel. 00:0000:0000:0000:
0000/0
Potential Router Specify a router that can provide standard router
advertisement network configuration supported for
ISATAP tunnel, so that the other nodes one the end of
0.0.0.0
Tunnel can get prefix from this route. Once a router is
entered, clicking on Add to add it to the Potential Router
List.
Potential Router The list of potential routers. Selecting one router in the (default is a bank
List list and clicking Remove to delete a router. list)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Port either end of the link and
Aggregation 01-00-0C-CC assist the channel in adapting
PAgP 0x0104
Protocol -CC-CC to link failure or addition.
Cisco (PAgP) IEEE 802.3ad Link
Group Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) will likely supersede
PAgP in the long term.
Unidirection UDLD monitors physical
al Link 01-00-0C-CC cabling, shutting down
UDLD 0x0111
Detection -CC-CC miswired ports, protecting
(UDLD) against uni-directional links.
Cisco Proprietary Discovery
01-00-0C-CC
CDP Discovery 0x2000 Protocol
-CC-CC
Protocol
The VTP protocol
communicates between
switches using an Ethernet
destination multicast MAC
address (01-00-0c-cc-cc-cc)
VLAN
01-00-0C-CC and SNAP HDLC protocol
VTP Trunking 0x2003
-CC-CC type Ox2003. It does not work
(VTP)
over non-trunk ports (VTP is a
payload of ISL or 802.1Q), so
messages cannot be sent
until DTP has brought the
trunk online.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Link
protocol. For Access Ports
LACP Aggregation 01-80-C2-00- 0x8809
being put in service with
(802.3ad) Control 00-02 (01)
Network Ports in LAG groups,
Protocol
this must be set to Discard.
LACP Marker protocol. For
LACP Access Ports being put in
Marker 01-80-C2-00- 0x8809
Marker service with Network Ports in
Protocol 00-02 (02)
(802.3ad) LAG groups, this must be set
Bridge to Discard.
Group Sync 01-80-C2-00- 0x8809 Port QL Function
SSM
Messaging 00-02 (0A)
Port Port Based Port Authentication Protocol
Authentic Network 01-80-C2-00-
0x888E
ation Access 00-03
(802.1x) Control
Rapid N/A - DSAP 42 SSAP 42
Reconfigura
BPDU tion of
(802.1w) Spanning
Tree
(RSTP) 01-80-C2-00-
N/A
00-00
IEEE
BPDU
Spanning
(802.1d)
Tree 802.1d
BPDU Multiple
(802.1s) STP
01-80-C2-00-
00-2F
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
System
Capabilities
Management Select an interface as the LLDP management DCN-1-1-1-1
Interface interface for this port. Up to two management management
interfaces (DCN interface and the management tunnel tunnel
on this port) are allowed, and up to six management
addresses are allowed if IPv4 and IPv6 mode are both
enabled for the two management interfaces.
Control Enable or Disable the transmission of management Disabled
interface in LLDP frames. Enabled
Loopback Settings
Refer to Table 58 for Network and Access Port loopback option settings. To set
loopback options, select Maintenance view, enter a right click on the desired
entity in the Selection Tree and select Loopback. The Administrative State must
be set to Maintenance prior to initiating a loopback. For Network interfaces
when a Dual Active Receive Protection Group is present, only a Network-1 or
Network-2 loopback may be applied at a time. Independent loopbacks may be
applied simultaneously on Network-1 and Network-2 if a 1+1 Protection Group
exists. Default settings are identified in bold.
The following loopback provisioning options and rules are described for each
option setting available:
The port EFM-OAM State must be set to Enabled prior to Terminal Port
setting EFM-OAM Remote or EFM-Remote Timed Terminal Port
loopbacks or the selection will be denied. When activating a Timed
Remote EFM-OAM loopback, the loopback includes Terminal VLAN
management traffic, therefore management traffic is
dropped while the EFM-OAM loopback is active. Since all
EFM-OAM frames are still processed, when the Remote
EFM-OAM loopback is released, management connectivity
will also be restored.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
or Facility VLAN is
selected)
Allows swapping the Source Address (SA) and Destination None
Addresses (DA) or Swap DA Overrides SA for loopback Swap SADA
testing. Swap DA Overrides
SA
Swap SADA operation will swap the Source Address and
Destination MAC addresses for looped-back frames. Swap
DA Overrides SA operation will swap DA=SA, SA=Local
Address (LA) (loop-point address), whereby the Destination
Swap SADA
Address is swapped with the Source address and the
Source Address is swapped with the Local Address.
Voltage
Low Temperature
Open Door
Commercial Power
Failure
Notification Defines the Notification Code associated with the Alarm CR
Code Input. MJ
MN
NA
NR
Alarm Input The dry contact alarm inputs are programmable to specify Disabled
Mode whether the alarm shall be raised on contact close or open, Alarm on Open
or disabled. Alarm on Closed
Alarm Hold Enables or disables Alarm Hold Off. Disabled
Off Enabled
Alarm Specifies a description for the associated Alarm Input.
blank
Description
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Protocol is set to RADIUS.
Note
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ABR-RX Average Bit Rate Received. The average Receive Near 0 0
bit rate received over the specific interval End
in the ingress direction. If there is link
down during the interval, the bin is not
accessible. This counter is based on
RMON etherStatsOctets.
ABR-TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted. The Receive Near 0 0
average bit rate transmitted over a specific End
interval in the egress direction, based on
Bytes Sent. If there is link down during the
interval, the bin is not accessible.
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames. The Receive Near 0 0
Broadcast Frames Sent in the egress End
direction If there is link down during the
interval, the bin is not accessible.
ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Received. Receive Near 0 0
The total number of good packets received End
that were directed to the broadcast
address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent. The Bytes Sent in Transmit Near 0 0
the egress direction If there is link down End
during the interval, the bin is not
accessible.
ESC EtherStats Collisions. The best estimate of Receive Near 0 0
the total number of collisions on this End
Ethernet segment. The value returned will
depend on the location of the RMON
probe. Section 8.2.1.3 (10BASE-5) and
section 10.3.1.3 (10BASE-2) of IEEE
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESF EtherStats Fragments. The total number Receive Near 37055 3557280
of packets received that were less than 64 End
octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is
entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both
runts (which are normal occurrences due
to collisions) and noise hits.
ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent. The Frames Transmit Near 0 0
Sent in the egress direction If there is link End
down during the interval, the bin is not
accessible.
ESJ EtherStats Jabbers. The total number of Receive Near 0 0
packets received that were longer than End
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
including FCS octets), and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that this definition of jabber is
different than the definition in IEEE-802.3
section 8.2.1.5 (10BASE5) and section
10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents
define jabber as the condition where any
packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range
to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150
ms.
ESMF EtherStats Multicast Frames. The Receive Near 0 0
Multicast Frames Sent in the egress End
direction If there is link down during the
interval, the bin is not accessible.
ESMP EtherStats Multicast Packets Received. Receive Near 0 0
EtherStats Multicast Packets Received. End
The total number of good packets received
that were directed to a multicast address.
Note that this number does not include
packets directed to the broadcast address.
ESO EtherStats Octets Received. The total Receive Near 0 0
number of octets of data (including those End
in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESOF EtherStats Oversize Frames. The total Transmit Near 0 0
number of frames received that were End
oversized.
ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets. The total Receive Near 37055 3557280
number of packets received that were End
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
ESP EtherStats Packets Received. EtherStats Receive Near 0 0
Packets Received. The total number of End
packets (including bad packets, broadcast
packets, and multicast packets) received.
ESP64 EtherStats Packets - 0 to 64 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits
but including FCS octets).
ESP65 EtherStats Packets - 65 to 127 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESP1519 EtherStats Packets - 1519 to 1536 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 1519 and 1536 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames. The Unicast Transmit Near 0 0
Frames Sent in the egress direction If End
there is link down during the interval, the
bin is not accessible.
ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets. The total Receive Near 37055 3557280
number of packets received that were less End
than 64 octets long (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0
Discarded. Number of Layer 2 Control End
Protocol Frames discarded on the
interface.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
L2PTFE Number of received Layer 2 Protocol Receive Near 0 0
Tunneling Frames Encapsulated. End
L2PTFD Number of transmitted Layer 2 Protocol Transmit Near 0 0
Tunneling Frames Decapsulated. End
LES Line Errored Seconds. Increments if a Receive Near 0 0
False Carrier or Errored Symbol event End
occurs since the last 1 second poll.
OPR Optical Power Received (dBm) Receive Near -80 -80
End
OPR-VAR Optical Power Received Variance (+/- Receive Near 4 4
dBm) represents the variance from the End
configured OPR thresholds where the
measured value will not result in the
generation of a TCA. For example: with an
OPR threshold of -80 and an OPR-VAR of
4, no TCA is generated if the measured
OPR is -76 to -84.
OPT Optical Power Transmit (dBm) Transmit Near -80 -80
End
OPT-VAR Optical Power Transmit Variance (+/- Transmit Near 4 4
dBm) represents the variance from the End
configured OPR thresholds where the
measured value will not result in the
generation of a TCA. For example: with an
OPR threshold of -80 and an OPT-VAR of
4, no TCA is generated if the measured
OPT is -76 to -84.
Table 60: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
PSC Protection Switch Count Receive Near 0 0
End
TEMP1 Temperature for the physical layer None Near 0 0
(expressed in Celsius). Applicable only if End
the media type is Fiber.
UAS Unavailable Seconds - counted if one or Receive Near 10 10
more of following exists in that second: End
Link down, link deactivated (triggered by
LLF), SFP faults, EFM-OAM discovery
failure, and EFM-OAM local loopback.
Also, any one of the following port based
MEP conditions: cross connect defect
(unexpected MD level or MAID Mismatch),
Error CCM Defect (Unexpected MEP or
unexpected period), RMEP CCM Defect
(Loss of Connectivity), and RDI Defect
(unidirectional failure makes the port
based service unavailable).
1. Valid only when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ABR-RX Average Bit Rate Received. The average Receive Near 0 0
bit rate received over the specific interval in End
the ingress direction. This counter is based
on RMON etherStatsOctets.
ABR-TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted. The average Transmit Near 0 0
bit rate transmitted over a specific interval End
in the egress direction, based on Bytes
Sent.
APFD AFP Priority-tagged Frames Dropped. Receive Near 0 0
Priority-tagged frames dropped due to AFP End
setting. AFP Priority-tagged Frames
Dropped. Priority-tagged frames dropped
due to AFP setting.
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
AUFD AFP Untagged Frames Dropped. Untagged Receive Near 0 0
frames dropped due to AFP setting. End
ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames. If there is Receive Near 0 0
link down during the interval, the bin is not End
accessible.
ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Received (in Receive Near 0 0
the A2N direction). The total number of End
good packets received that were directed to
the broadcast address. Note that this does
not include multicast packets.
ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent. Transmit Near 0 0
End
ESC EtherStats Collisions. The best estimate of Receive Near 0 0
the total number of collisions on this End
Ethernet segment. The value returned will
depend on the location of the RMON probe.
Section 8.2.1.3 (10BASE-5) and section
10.3.1.3 (10BASE-2) of IEEE standard
802.3 states that a station must detect a
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
collision, in the receive mode, if three or
more stations are transmitting
simultaneously. A repeater port must detect
a collision when two or more stations are
transmitting simultaneously.
ESCAE EtherStats CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Receive Near 37055 3557280
Check) Aligned Errors. The total number of End
packets received that had a length
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
ESDE EtherStats Drop Events. The total number Receive Near 37055 3557280
of events in which packets were dropped End
due to lack of resources. Note that this
number is not necessarily the number of
packets dropped; it is just the number of
times this condition has been detected.
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESF EtherStats Fragments. The total number of Receive Near 37055 3557280
packets received that were less than 64 End
octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is
entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both
runts (which are normal occurrences due to
collisions) and noise hits.
ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent. The Frames Sent Transmit Near 0 0
in the egress direction. End
ESJ EtherStats Jabbers. The total number of Receive Near 0 0
packets received that were longer than End
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets), and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets. The total Receive Near 37055 3557280
number of packets received that were End
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
ESP EtherStats Packets Received. The total Receive Near 0 0
number of packets (including bad packets, End
broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
ESP64 EtherStats Packets - 0 to 64 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits
but including FCS octets).
ESP65 EtherStats Packets - 65 to 127 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
including FCS octets).
ESP128 EtherStats Packets - 128 to 255 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
ESP256 EtherStats Packets - 256 to 511 Octet Receive Near 0 0
Packets. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
ESP512 EtherStats Packets - 512 to 1023 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
ESP1024 EtherStats Packets - 1024 to 1518 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
ESP1519 EtherStats Packets - 1519 to 1536 Octets Receive Near 0 0
Frames. The total number of packets End
(including bad packets) received that were
between 1519 and 1536 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames sent. If there is Transmit Near 0 0
link down during the interval, the bin is not End
accessible.
ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets received. Receive Near 37055 3557280
The total number of packets received that End
were less than 64 octets long (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
were otherwise well formed.
L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0
Discarded. Number of Layer 2 Control End
Protocol Frames discarded on the
interface.
L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 61: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored Loca- 15
Description Direction 1 Day
Type tion Min.
TEMP1 Temperature for the physical layer None Near 0 0
(expressed in Celsius). Applicable only if End
the media type is Fiber.
UAS2 Unavailable Seconds. Used by Receive Near 0 0
Network/Service Management Systems to End
compute port-based service un-availability.
Counted if one or more of following exists in
that second:
• Link down
• link deactivated (triggered by LLF)
• SFP faults
• EFM-OAM discovery failure
• EFM-OAM loopback.
Also, any one of the following port based
MEP conditions:
• Port-based cross-connect defect
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
(unexpected MD level or MAID Mis-
match/Mismerge)
• Port-based MEP Error CCM Defect
(Unexpected MEP or unexpected
period)
• Port-based MEP RMEP CCM Defect
(Loss of Connectivity)
• Port-based MEP RDI Defect (unidirec-
tional failure makes the port based ser-
vice unavailable)
1. Valid only when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces.
2. Any second that is deemed UAS for the port will also be UAS for all the EVCs on that port.
Table 62: Ethernet Access Port/LAG QoS Queues Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited for QoS Receive Near End 0 0
queue n1
BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
Table 62: Ethernet Access Port/LAG QoS Queues Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
BT Bytes Transmitted by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
BTD Bytes Tail Dropped from this QoS queue Receive Near End 0 0
n1 (in the N2A direction)
FD Frames Dequeued by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
FTD Frames Tail Dropped by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0
1. There can be up to 8 QoS queues, where n is 0 through 7.
ABRA2N Average Bit Rate (in the A2N Receive Near End 0 0
direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 81 A2N bytes
received policer counts.
ABRN2A Average Bit Rate (in the N2A Transmit Near End 0 0
direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 81 N2A bytes
transmitted policer counts.
ABRRLA2N Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (in the Receive Near End 0 0
A2N direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 81 A2N bytes
received QoS queue counts.
ABRRLN2A Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (in the Transmit Near End 0 0
N2A direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 81 N2A bytes
transmitted QoS queue counts.
BA2N Total Bytes In (in the A2N direction). Receive Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up
to 8 A2N BytesIn policer counts.
BN2A Total Bytes In (in the N2A direction). Transmit Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up
to 8 N2A BytesIn policer counts.
BOA2N Total Bytes Out (in the A2N direction). Receive Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up
to 8 A2N BytesOut policer counts.
Table 63: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
BON2A Total Bytes Out (in the N2A direction). Transmit Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up
to 8 N2A BytesOut policer counts.
ES The number of Errored Seconds (ES) Receive Near End 0 0
on the flow.
FMGA2N Frames Marked Green and Passed (in Receive Near End 0 0
the A2N direction). This parameter is
an aggregation of up to 8 A2N Green
frames passed policer counts
FMGN2A Frames Marked Green and Passed (in Transmit Near End 0 0
the N2A direction). This parameter is
an aggregation of up to 8 N2A Green
frames passed policer counts.
FMRDA2N Frames Marked Red and Discarded Receive Near End 0 0
(in the A2N direction). This parameter
is an aggregation of up to 8 A2N Red
frames discarded policer counts.
FMRDN2A Frames Marked Red and Discarded Transmit Near End 0 0
(in the N2A direction). This parameter
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
is an aggregation of up to 8 N2A Red
frames discarded policer counts.
FMYA2N Frames Marked Yellow and Passed (in Receive Near End 0 0
the A2N direction). This parameter is
an aggregation of up to 8 A2N Yellow
frames passed policer counts.
FMYN2A Frames Marked Yellow and Passed (in Transmit Near End 0 0
the N2A direction). This parameter is
an aggregation of up to 8 N2A Yellow
frames passed policer counts.
FTDA2N Frames Tail Dropped (in the A2N Receive Near End 0 0
direction).
L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near End 0 0
Discarded. Number of Layer 2 Control
Protocol Frames discarded on the
interface.
Table 63: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
SES Severely Errored Seconds: 1 second Receive Near End 0 0
period with 30% or more errored or
lost frames. (Note that 30% is a
configured value [user configurable].)
UAS Unavailable Seconds: Used by Receive Near End 0 0
Network/Service Management
Systems to compute port-based and
VLAN-based service availability. A
second is deemed unavailable for an
EVC if any one of the following
service-level defects is detected in that
second:
• VID-based MEP Cross-connect
Defect (Unexpected MD level or
MAID mismatch/Mismerge)
• VID-based MEP Error CCM
Defect (Unexpected MEP or unex-
pected period)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 64: Ethernet Network Port QoS Queues Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited for QoS Receive Near End 0 0
queue n1.
BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
BT Bytes Transmitted by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0
BTD Bytes Tail Dropped from this QoS queue Receive Near End 0 0
n1(in the N2A direction).
FD Frames Dequeued by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
FTD Frames Tail Dropped by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0
1. There can be up to 8 QoS shaper on each Network port, where n is 0 through 7.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The following performance parameters are for each of the Policers which are
supported for a Flow. Policers exist for the A2N direction as well as the N2A
direction.
Table 65: Flow Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABR Average Bit Rate - for Policer n1. Receive Near End 0 0
BYTESIN Number of bytes received by the Receive Near End 0 0
Policer.
BYTESOUT Number of bytes transmitted by the Receive Near End 0 0
Policer.
FMG Frames Marked Green and Passed for Receive Near End 0 0
Policer n.
FMRD Frames Marked Red and Discarded for Receive Near End 0 0
Policer n.
FMY Frames Marked Yellow and Passed for Receive Near End 0 0
Policer n.
1. There are at most 8 Policers for each direction, where n is 0 through 7.
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Default
Performance Parameter Definition
Threshold
P2R-ERR-PKTS Probe to Reflector Errored Packets. The total number
of Packets in the current interval, for which there was a
problem in transmission. This error is counted when
there is a failure in packet transmission due to
0
resource limitations (buffers). This can happen if the
Probe Configuration was changed to send in a large
number of packets in a time interval. NOTE: This is not
applicable for Y.1731 probes.
P2R-FRAMES Probe to Reflector Frames 0
P2R-LOST-FRAMES Probe to Reflector Lost Frames 0
P2R-LOST-PKTS The number of Lost Packets from probe to reflector in
the current interval. For Y.1731 probes, these are the 0
actual data frames lost.
P2R-MAXABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Absolute Jitter (µsec) 0
P2R-MAXNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Negative Jitters. The
maximum negative one-way jitter from source to 0
destination in the current interval.
P2R-MAX-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Maximum Oneway Delay. The
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
maximum one-way source to destination delay (in
0
microseconds) across all packets received in the
current interval.
P2R-MAXPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Positive Jitters. The
maximum positive one-way jitter from source to 0
destination in the current interval.
P2R-MINABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Absolute Jitter (µsec) 0
P2R-MINNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Negative Jitters. The
minimum negative one-way jitter from source to 0
destination in the current interval.
P2R-MIN-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Minimum Oneway Delay. The
minimum one-way source to destination delay (in
0
microseconds) across all packets received in the
current interval.
P2R-MINPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Positive Jitters. The
minimum positive one-way jitter from source to 0
destination in the current interval.
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Default
Performance Parameter Definition
Threshold
P2R-NEG-LOSSES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This
is the number of occurrences of negative frame loss
from Source MEP (Probe) to Destination MEP
(Reflector). If these counts are non-zero, then there
could be some kind of provisioning mismatch between
the Probe MEP and Reflector MEP. Here are some
scenarios where this can happen:
• Probe MEP is configured to count in-profile frames
only and the Reflector MEP is configured to count
all frames with a mismatch in value for the attribute 0
cfmMepLmCount InProfileFrames.
• Probe MEP is configured to count data frames for
specific VLAN priority and the Reflector MEP is
configured to count data frames for all the priorities
with a mismatch in values for the attributes cfmMe-
pLmTx CountAllPrios or cfmMepLm RxCountAll-
Prios. NOTE: This could possibly happen due to
reasons not related to configuration, such as frame
reordering in the network.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Default
Performance Parameter Definition
Threshold
P2R-SUM-SQ-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Oneway Delays.
The sum of square of one-way delay from source to 0
destination in the current interval.
P2R-SUMSQPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Positive Jitters.
The sum of square of positive one-way jitters from 0
source to destination in the current interval.
P2R-SYNC-ERRS The number of (time) Synchronization Errors from
0
probe to reflector in the current interval.
R2P-AVGABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Average Absolute Jitter (µsec) 0
R2P-AVG-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Average Oneway Delay. The
average one-way destination to source delay (in
0
microseconds) across all packets received in the
current interval.
R2P-DATA-FRAMES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This
is the number of data frames counted by the
Destination MEP (Reflector) that are transmitted
towards the Source MEP (Probe). Based on the
0
configuration the MEP counts the data frames with:
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• MEP's LM RX priority or all the priorities
• All the VLAN IDs belonging the MEP's MA VID list
R2P-ERR-FRAMES Reflector to Probe Errored Frames 0
R2P-ERR-PKTS Reflector to Probe Errored Packets. The total number
of Received Packets in the current interval, which had
errors such as length of received packet is less than
0
the protocol header length, packet was received after it
was marked as lost (i.e., beyond timeout). NOTE: This
is not applicable for Y.1731 probes.
R2P-FRAMES Reflector to Probe Frames 0
R2P-LOST-FRAMES Reflector to Probe Lost Frames 0
R2P-LOST-PKTS Reflector to Probe Lost Packets. The number of Lost
Packets from reflector to probe in the current interval.
0
For Y.1731 probes, these are the actual data frames
lost.
R2P-MAXABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Absolute Jitter (µsec) 0
R2P-MAXNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Negative Jitters. The
maximum negative one-way jitter from destination to 0
source in the current interval.
R2P-MAX-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Maximum Oneway Delay. The
maximum one-way destination to source delay (in
0
microseconds) across all packets received in the
current interval.
R2P-MAXPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Positive Jitters. The
maximum positive one-way jitter from destination to 0
source in the current interval.
R2P-MINABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Absolute Jitter (µsec) 0
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Default
Performance Parameter Definition
Threshold
R2P-MINNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Negative Jitters. The
minimum negative one-way jitter from destination to 0
source in the current interval.
R2P-MIN-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Minimum Oneway Delay. The
minimum one-way destination to source delay (in
0
microseconds) across all packets received in the
current interval.
R2P-MINPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Positive Jitters. The
minimum positive one-way jitter from destination to 0
source in the current interval.
R2P-NEG-LOSSES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This
is the number of occurrences of negative frame loss
from to Destination MEP (Reflector) to Source MEP
(Probe). If these counts are non-zero, then there could
be some kind of provisioning mismatch between the
Probe MEP and Reflector MEP. Here are some
scenarios where this can happen:
• Probe MEP is configured to count in-profile frames
only and the Reflector MEP is configured to count
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 66: ESA Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Default
Performance Parameter Definition
Threshold
R2P-SUM-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Sum of Oneway Delay. The total
sum of one-way delay from destination to source in the 0
current interval.
R2P-SUMPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Positive Jitters. The total
sum of positive one-way jitters from destination to 0
source in the current interval.
R2P-SUMSQABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Absolute Jitter
0
(µsec)
R2P-SUMSQNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Negative Jitters.
The sum of square of negative one-way jitters from 0
destination to source in the current interval.
R2P-SUM-SQ-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Oneway Delay.
The sum of square of one-way delay from destination 0
to source in the current interval.
R2P-SUMSQPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Positive Jitters.
The sum of square of positive one-way jitters from 0
destination to source in the current interval.
R2P-SYNC-ERRS Reflector to Probe Sync Errors. The number of (time)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Synchronization Errors from reflector to probe in the 0
current interval.
SEQ-GAPS The total number of sequence gaps across all packets
received in the current interval. If (Received Sequence
Number) is greater than or equal to (Last Received 0
Sequence Number + 2)) it is termed as a sequence
gap. NOTE: This is not applicable for Y.1731 probes.
SUM-RTDELAY The total sum of round trip delay (in milliseconds) in
the current interval. The reflector's processing time is 0
excluded from the value.
SUM-SQ-RTDELAY The sum of square of round trip delays in the current
0
interval.
Table 67: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
15
Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Min.
PDELAYRSPSTX Number of Peer Delay Response Transmit Near End 0 0
Messages transmitted on the
PTP Flow Point
PDELAYRSPFOL Number of Peer Delay Response Receive Near End 0 0
UPSRX Followup Messages received on
the PTP Flow Point.
PDELAYRSPFOL Number of Peer Delay Response Transmit Near End 0 0
UPSTX Followup Messages transmitted
on the PTP Flow Point.
PTPUNKNOWNS Number of Unknown PTP Receive Near End 0 0
RX Messages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
PTPUNKNOWNS Number of Unknown PTP Transmit Near End 0 0
TX Messages transmitted on the
PTP Flow Point.
SIGNALINGRX Number of PTP Signaling Receive Near End 0 0
Messages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
SIGNALINGTX Number of PTP Signaling Transmit Near End 0 0
Messages transmitted on the
PTP Flow Point.
SYNCSRX PTP Sync Messages Received Receive Near End 0 0
SYNCSTX PTP Sync Messages Transmit Near End 0 0
Transmitted
AVGSYNCRESTI The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
ME PTP Sync messages.
MINSYNCRESTI The minimum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
ME PTP Sync messages.
MAXSYNCRESTI The maximum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
ME PTP Sync messages.
AVGDELAYREQ The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
RESTIME PTP Delay Request messages.
MINDELAYREQR The minimum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
ESTIME PTP Delay Request messages.
MAXDELAYREQ The maximum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
RESTIME PTP Delay Request messages.
AVGPDELAYRE The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
QRESTIME PTP Peer Delay Request
messages.
MINPDELAYREQ The minimum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
RESTIME PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
MAXPDELAYRE The maximum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
QRESTIME PTP Peer Delay Request
messages.
Table 67: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
15
Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Min.
AVGPDELAYRS The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PRESTIME PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
MINPDELAYRSP The minimum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
RESTIME PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
MAXPDELAYRS The maximum residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PRESTIME PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
Table 68: Master Clock Interface Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15
Definition Direction Location 1 Day
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Type Min.
MC_PTPDISC PTP Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
ARDS
MC_ANNOUN Announce Service Denied Events Receive Near End 0 0
CEDENEVTS
MC_SYNCDE Sync Service Denied Events Receive Near End 0 0
NEVTS
MC_DELAYR Delay Response Service Denied Receive Near End 0 0
ESPDENEVTS Events
MC_ANNCAN Announce Service Canceled Events Receive Near End 0 0
CELEVTS
MC_SYNCCA Sync Service Canceled Events Receive Near End 0 0
NCELLEVTS
MC_DELAYR Delay Response Service Canceled Receive Near End 0 0
ESPCANCELE Events
VTS
MC_DYNSLA Dynamic Slaves Learned Count Receive Near End 0 0
VESLEARNC
OUNTS
MC_DYNSLA Dynamic Slaves Service Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
VESDROPPE
D
Table 69: PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15
Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type Min.
ANNOUNC Announce Messages Generated Transmit Near End 0 0
EMSGSGE
N
RS_SYNC Sync Messages Generated Transmit Near End 0 0
MSGSGEN
RS_DELAY DelayResp messages generated Transmit Near End 0 0
RESPMSG
SGEN
RS_SIGNA Signaling Messages generated Transmit Near End 0 0
LMSGSGE
N
RS_SIGNA Signaling Messages Received Receive Near End 0 0
LMSGSRX
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
RS_DELAY Delay Req Messages Received Receive Near End 0 0
REQMSGS
RX
RS_DELAY Delay Req Messages Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
REQMSGS
DROPPED
RS_INVTL PTP messages with invalid PTP TLV Receive Near End 0 0
VLENDISC length
ARDS
RS_INVTL PTP messages with unknown PTP Receive Near End 0 0
VTYPEDIS TLV type
CARDS
RS_TIMES Times Announce lease duration Receive Near End 0 0
ANNOUNC expired
ELEASEEX
P
RS_TIMES Times Sync lease duration expired Receive Near End 0 0
SYNCLEAS
EEXP
RS_TIMES Times Delay_Resp lease duration Receive Near End 0 0
DELAYRES expired
PEXP
YNCD
PTPTWOST PTP Two Step Sync Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
EPSYNCD
PTPFOLLO PTP Follow-up Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
WUPSD
PTPDELAY PTP Delay_Req Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
REQSD
PTPPDELA PTP PDelay_Req Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
YREQSD
PTPPDELA PTP PDelay_Resp Message Discards Receive Near End 0 0
YRSPSD
PTPPDELA PTP PDelay Follow-up Message Receive Near End 0 0
YFOLLOWU Discards
PSD
PTPINVTLV PTP Invalid TLV Length Discards Receive Near End 0 0
LENSD
PTPINVTLV PTP Invalid TLV Type Discards Receive Near End 0 0
TYPESD
AVGSYNCP Average Sync Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
D
MINSYNCP Minimum Sync Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
D
MAXSYNCP Maximum Sync Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
D
MINSYNCP Minimum Sync PDV (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
DV
Monitored 15
Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type Min.
AVGSYNCP Average Sync PDV (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
DV
MAXSYNCP Maximum Sync PDV (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
DV
AVGMEANP Average Mean Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
ATHDELAY
MINMEANP Minimum Mean Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
ATHDELAY
MAXMEANP Maximum Mean Path Delay (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
ATHDELAY
AVGOFM Average Offset from Master (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
MINOFM Minimum Offset from Master (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
MAXOFM Maximum Offset from Master (nsec) Receive Near End 0 0
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 71: PT Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABRPT12 Average Bit Rate (PT12). Receive Near End 0 0
ABRPT21 Average BIt Rate (PT21). Transmit Near End 0 0
ABRRLPT12 Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
ABRRLPT21 Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
ABRRLRPT Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited and Receive Near End 0 0
Replicated (PT12)
BPT12 Total Bytes In (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
BPT21 Total Bytes In (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
BOPT12 Total Bytes Out (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
BOPT21 Total Bytes Out (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
ES Errored Seconds Receive Near End 0 0
FMGPT12 Frames Marked Green (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
FMGPT21 Frames Marked Green (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
FMRDPT12 Frames Marked Red and Discarded Receive Near End 0 0
(PT12)
FMRDPT21 Frames Marked Red and Discarded Transmit Near End 0 0
(PT21)
FMYPT12 Frames Marked Yellow (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
FMYPT21 Frames Marked Yellow (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
FTDPT12 Frames Tail Dropped (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frame Receive Near End 0 0
Discarded
Table 71: PT Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings (Continued)
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
SES Severely Errored Seconds Receive Near End 0 0
UAS Unavailable Seconds Receive Near End 10 10
Table 72: PT Flow QoS Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited Receive Near End 0 0
BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
BT Bytes Dequeued (Transmitted) Receive Near End 0 0
BTD Bytes Tail Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
FD Frames Dequeued Receive Near End 0 0
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Table 73: PT Flow Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 1
Definition Direction Location
Type Min. Day
ABR Average Bit Rate - for Policer n1 Receive Near End 0 0
BYTESIN Total Bytes In Receive Near End 0 0
BYTESOUT Total Bytes Out Receive Near End 0 0
FMG Frames Marked Green and Passed - Receive Near End 0 0
for Policer n
FMRD Frames Marked Red and Discarded - Receive Near End 0 0
for Policer n
FMY Frames Marked Yellow and Passed - Receive Near End 0 0
for Policer n
FTD Frames Tail Dropped - for Policer n Receive Near End 0 0
1. There are at most 8 Policers for each direction, where n is 0 through 7.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
respectively. Default settings are identified in bold.
used by the customer traffic, all packets destined for that IP address
are routed up to the Network Processor.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Untagged. Not available if protocol is Y.1731. VLAN Tagged
VLAN ID2 Virtual LAN identifier. Provides the ability to monitor a
0 to 4096
specific service. This option is only applicable when
N/A
Packet Type is set to VLAN Tagged.
VLAN Priority2 Defines the VLAN Priority. This option is only 0 to 7
applicable when Packet Type is set to VLAN Tagged. N/A
Priority Mode Identifies the priority classification mechanism for None
ESA traffic. TOS stands for Type Of Service, and TOS
DSCP is Diffserv Codepoint. Not available if protocol DSCP
is Y.1731.
Priority2 Specifies the ESA service priority bits. Not available if 0 to 63 (DSCP)
protocol is Y.1731. or
0 to 7 (TOS)
N/A
Packet Size2 Set the packet size (in bytes) of the Service
64-1512
Assurance Packets. Not available if protocol is
104
Y.1731.
Packets per Sample2 Set the number of packets per sample. Not available if 1- 99999
protocol is Y.1731. 500
Packet Interval2 Interval between packets (in milliseconds). Not 1-99999
available if protocol is Y.1731. 100
Dead Interval2 Setting time (in seconds) after all packets within a 1-99999
sample are sent. Not available if protocol is Y.1731. 10
Response Timeout2 Set the amount of time to wait for a response (in
1-99999
seconds). Packets received after this timeout are
5
considered lost. Not available if protocol is Y.1731.
Service Parameters (Only available if protocol is Y.1731.)
(Create Probe only) This is the amount of time between history bins. 8
History Distribution Number of History Distribution Bins (up to a maximum
1 to 32
Bins of 32 bins).
8
(Create Probe only)
History Interval History Interval (in minutes). 1 Minute
(Create Probe only) 5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
60 Minutes
History Distribution History Distribution Interval (in minutes). This is the 1 Minute
Interval amount of time between history distribution bins. 5 Minutes
(Create Probe only) 10 Minutes
15 Minutes
60 Minutes
Statistics and Distribution
Min.2 Minimum delay threshold (in milliseconds). The entry
must be less than the entry for Max. Round Trip -2147483647 to
Round Trip Delay, 2147483647
One Way Tx Delay, Delay. Valid entry is -2147483647 to 2147483647.
Default is dependant on the type of statistics and dis- 0
One Way Rx Delay
One Way Tx Jitter, or tribution.
-5000
One Way Rx Jitter
2. Oneway options are only available if ICMP timestamp is set for protocol type. A Probe that is assigned
to an active schedule cannot be edited.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The following section describes scheduled ESA activities option settings. A
scheduled ESA is invoked by selecting the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select-
ing ESA from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selec-
tion Tree, entering a right click on Schedules and selecting Create Schedule.
Default settings are identified in bold. Up to 10 Scheduled ESA groups may be
created.
Once a Scheduled ESA has been created, options available when entering a
right click on the ESA Entity ID in the Selection Tree are: Delete Schedule, Sus-
pend Schedule and Resume Schedule. To delete an activity, you must first Sus-
pend the activity.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
System Default Maintenance Domain (MD) level parameters may be created by
selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications
menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree, entering a right click
on the System entity and selecting Edit System Default MD Level. The Default
MD may be edited by entering a right click on the desired Default MD entity and
selecting Edit.
Table 77: Configure Default MD Parameters Settings
System Level Default MD Description / Option Settings /
Parameter Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults
Configuration
System Default Level System or specified Maintenance
0 to 7
MD Level Domain default MD level.
System MIP MIP Creation MIP Creation Control. If Default is None
Creation Control Control selected, the parameters set in the Default
Default Maintenance Domain will Explicit
be used for MD Level, MIP Creation
Control and Default Sender ID
Control.
entity to edit, then modify the VID entries by adding new ones and/or deleting
existing ones.
To delete and VLAN entry, in the selection tree enter a right click on the Access
Port entity and selecting Delete VLAN Entry, then select the Delete radio button
for the VLAN entity to delete, then click on OK.
See the following table for Maintenance Domain configuration settings.
Table 79: CFM VLAN Table Configuration Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Primary VID Primary VLAN Identifier. 1 to 4095
CFM Virtual Identifier (VID) list. To add a VID member, enter
VID List a valid VID ID in the VID Entry window and select Add. To
delete a VID member, select the VID number in the VID List
1 to 4095
window and select Remove. The last VID member cannot be
removed.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
entity and selecting Create MD. To edit an existing MD, expand the Maintenance
Domain entity, enter a right click on the desired MD and select Edit Configura-
tion. The following parameters cannot be edited: MD Index, Level. To edit these
parameters, the MD must be deleted and then re-entered with the new desired
parameters.
To remove an MD, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, enter a right click on
the desired MD and select Delete. Then select OK.
See the following table for Maintenance Domain configuration settings. Default
settings are identified in bold.
Table 80: Maintenance Domain Configuration Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Identification
MD Index Maintenance Domain identifier.
(Create MD 1 - 256
Only)
See the following table for MANET configuration settings. Default settings are
identified in bold.
Table 81: Maintenance Association Network Configuration Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Identification
MANET Index Maintenance Association Network identifier.
(Create MANET 1 - 256
Only)
Format Type Selectable Name Entry type. Integer
Primary VID
String
VPN Id
ICC Format
MA Name A Maintenance Association name identified by ICC
Format, integer, in Hexadecimal (if Format Type Integer is
selected) or by Primary VLAN Identifier (if Format Type ICC Format,
Primary VID is selected) or by character string (if Format Text string
Type String is selected) or by VPN identifier (if Format Hexidecimal or
Type VPN ID is selected). If Format Type String is Primary VLAN
selected, ASCII characters are allowed. The MA Name Identifier
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
must be unique per associated MD. Note that it is not
allowed to use system reserved names (i.e. ltp, cfm, efm, (blank)
elmi, erppdu, eth0, eth1,jdsu, lagpdu, lldppdu, lo,
ptpsyncjack, ptpts, sat, ssm, etc) to name CFM entities.
CCM Interval Continuity Check Message (CCM) interval. The same 3.3 Milliseconds
interval must be selected for all MEPs associated with the 10 Milliseconds
MA. For GE11x, up to 16 local MEPs can be created in the 100 Milliseconds
CCM interval of 3.3 ms and 10 ms.
1 Second
10 Seconds
1 Minute
10 Minutes
MEP ID Entry Maintenance End Point (MEP) list. To add a MEP
member, enter the valid MEP ID number in the MEP ID 1 to 8191
Entry window and select Add. To delete a MEP member,
select the MEP number in the MEP ID List window and (blank)
select Delete. The last VID member cannot be removed.
deleted.
Note
The following MA provisioning options and rules are described for each option
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Default settings are identified in bold.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Initiate Loopback Message
Loopback Message (LBM) may be initiated by selecting the CFM icon on the
Tool Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system,
NE-1, NTE11x and Access Port, Network Port or LAG entities in the Selection
Tree, entering a right click on the desired MEP entity, and selecting Loopback.
See the following table for Initiate Loop Back Message configuration settings.
Default settings are identified in bold.
The MEP must be set to the In Service State for the Loop Back
PS
Message to be initiated.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
The MEP must be set to the In Service State for the Link Trace
PS
Message to be initiated.
Note
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Create / Edit a Master Clock
• Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface
• Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)
• Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port
• Create / Edit a Static Slave or Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
• Create / Edit a Telecom Slave
• Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)
• Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)
• Create / Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port
• Add a sync reference and associate the Telecom Slave entity to the Sync
Reference (SYNC-1-1-1-1)
• Associate the Telecom Slave entity to the desired Clock, PPS and/or TOD
interface
• Edit System Time of Day (T0D) via PTP Clock
Number ipates in. It is used in the domainNumber field of the PTP 0-255
(Create only) header in the PTP packet generated by the SOOC.
Clock Recovery Selects one way or two way clock recovery mode. One Way
Mode • One way: delay request/response messages are not
used and in this mode only frequency can be recov-
ered. (only sync message)
Two Way
• Two way (default): delay request/response will be
used and in this mode frequency and/or phase/time
can be recovered
Time Holdover Selects the time holdover accuracy in nanoseconds for 500
Accuracy (ns) the telecom slave. The Holdover state is entered when 1000
Telecom Slave is currently locked to the Master Clock 1500
and when the active SOOC’s OC-S PTP Virtual Port
5000
goes to LISTENING or UNCALIBRATED. In this state
the phase lock can be sustained for certain amount of
time specified as Holdover time before the accuracy
becomes insufficient for holdover accuracy requirement. 10000
The provisioned value and the assembled oscillator
stability co-determine the Holdover time.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
When enabled, on transmit side:
-port shall periodically (once a second) transmit QL TLV
information PDUs
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Slave IP The IP Address of the SOOC.
Address (Create 0.0.0.0
only)
Slave Subnet The Slave subnet mask.
Mask (Create 0.0.0.0
only)
Interface Name Name for this SOOC interface (mandatory entry).
(blank)
(Create only)
Unicast Enable/Disable Unicast Message Negotiation. When Enabled
Message Enabled the following provisioned rates are used in the
Negotiation negotiation between the master and slave (in the
(Create only) signaling massage). When Disabled, the following Disabled
provisioned rates are used for manually calculating the
negotiation intervals.
Unicast Timeout Unicast timeout (in seconds). 1
Unicast Restart Unicast restart timer (in seconds).
60
Timer
Priority Mode Priority mode for transmitted packets. None
TOS
DSCP
Priority Priority for transmitted packets. 0-7
Master Delay Master Delay Mechanism. Only End to End is supported.
Mechanism End to End
(Create only)
Master Priority Master priority. 0-7
Second
8 Packets Per 1
Second
Master Indicates how long (in seconds) for the GrandMaster to
Announce send the announce packet. 2-255 (secs)
Receipt Timeout
Master Delay Selects a minimum mean time interval in which the Mas- 1 Packet Per
Response ter Clock responds to successive Delay Request pack- Second
Message Rate ets. 2 Packets Per
(Create only) Second
4 Packets Per
Second
8 Packets Per
Second
16 Packets Per
Second
32 Packets Per
Second
64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second
Master Delay Master Delay Response Receipt Timeout.
Response 2-255 (secs)
Receipt Timeout
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Master Lease Master Lease Duration.
60 - 1000 (secs)
Duration
300
(Create only)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
(varies)
(Create only) characters.
Administrative Enables or disables the Boundary Clock. See Entity IS
State State Descriptions on p. 599. Management
PTP Domain This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number
Number (Create field of the PTP header in the PTP packet. 0-127
only)
Priority 1 Priority 1 (based on IEEE 1588v2). 0-255
128
Priority 2 Priority 2 (based on IEEE 1588v2). 0-255
128
Timing Clock Eid The timing reference of the Master Clock.
(drop-down list)
(Create only)
IP Protocol IP Protocol.
IPv4
(Create only)
Master Clock Valid IPv4 address. The IP address must be unique
Interface IP across all IP interfaces in the system.
0.0.0.0
Address
(Create only)
Master Clock Valid IPv4 subnet mask.
Interface Subnet
0.0.0.0
Mask
(Create only)
Interface Name When an Master Clock Interface is created, an IP
(Create only) interface is created with the Interface Name, IP Address
and Subnet Mask. The IP address and Interface Name
(blank)
must be unique across all IP interfaces in the system.
The interface name is from 1 to 15 alphanumeric
characters (no spaces). This entry is mandatory.
Priority Mode Defines the Priority Mode. It identifies the lookup criteria None
(Create only) for the priority mapping table. This table is used to TOS
perform priority based lookup (to determine low and
normal latency) and/or to change the priority value. DSCP
Priority (Create Priority Map Index Selection. The following ranges of 0
only) Indexes are: 0...7 if Priority Mode is set to TOS; 0...63 if 0-7 (TOS)
Priority Map Mode is set to DSCP. 0-63 (DSCP)
Clock Type Selects the Clock Type. Only One Step is applicable in
One Step
(Create only) this release.
Delay Selects the Delay Mechanism. Only End to End is
Mechanism applicable in this release. End to End
(Create only)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
Message Rate Second
(Create only) 2 Packets Per
Second
4 Packets Per
Second
8 Packets Per
Second
16 Packets Per
Second
32 Packets Per
Second
64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second
only)
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
up to 64 characters
identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Administrative Enables or disables the Static Remote Slave. See Entity IS
State State Descriptions on p. 599. Management
Static Remote Valid IPv4 address. The IP address must be unique
Slave IP across all IP interfaces in the system.
0.0.0.0
Address
(Create only)
Unicast Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled
Message
Negotiation Disabled
(Create only)
Announce Announce Message Rate. (Applicable only if Unicast 1 Packet Per 16
Message Rate Message Negotiation is Disabled.) Seconds
(Create only) 1 Packet Per 8
Announce Message Rate cannot be greater than the
associated MCI Max Announce Message Rate. Seconds
1 Packet Per 4
Seconds
1 Packet Per 2
Seconds
1 Packet Per 1
Second
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
streams may belong to different flows, or same flow but different COS depend-
ing on the VID and priority in the stream.
A SAT Test Stream is created by entering a right click on the SAT Control entity
and selecting Create SAT Test Stream. To edit an existing SAT test stream,
expanding the SAT Control entity, entering a right click on the desired test
stream and selecting Edit. To delete a SAT test stream, enter a right click on the
desired test stream and selecting delete.
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential
DEI Enable/Disable the Drop Eligibility Indicator. Disabled
• In Color Aware mode:
o
if DEI is enable:
• Generate Test Function (GTF) will set DEI
to 0 for green frames, 1 for yellow frames;
Collect Test Function (CTF) will distin-
guish color by (DEI || priority).
o
if DEI is disabled:
• GTF will set DEI to 0 for both green and Enabled
yellow frames; CTF distinguishes color
only by priority.
• In Color Blind mode:
o
DEI can only be disabled.
• GTF will set DEI to 0 for both green and
yellow frames. CTF distinguishes color
only by priority
CIR Set the green FLPDU sending rate. 0 (Kbps)
EIR Set the yellow FLPDU sending rate. 0 (Kbps)
CBS Set the FLPDU committed burst size. CBS cannot be 0
0 - 256(KBytes)
when CIR is not 0.
EBS Set the FLPDU excess burst size. EBS cannot be 0
0 - 256(KBytes)
when EIR is not 0.
Green PCP Enter the priority of the green frames’ outer VLAN tag.
0-7
Only applicable in color aware mode.
Inner VLAN1 Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4094
Tag with FLPDU Inner VLAN1 Tag. 0-7
Inner VLAN2 Defines whether the Inner VLAN2 tag entry is allowed. Selected
Check Box Only selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
Inner VLAN2 Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN2 tag.
8100 (hex)
Ethertype
Inner VLAN2 Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4094
Tag with FLPDU Inner VLAN2 Tag. 0-7
FSP 150CC-GE11x R6.1 80000026494 Issue: A, © 2013 ADVA Optical Networking SE - Confidential